Home

PAC MANAGER™ USER'S GUIDE LEGACY EDITION

1. On Off Of these points 0 0 On these modules 1 0 These memory map addresses apply not only to G1 and G4 modules but also to integral racks and even to Quad Pak modules Points on all E1 I O units are treated the same way no matter how they are physically placed on the rack Unsigned 32 bit Integer Data Much of the data in the memory map is in the form of unsigned integers either one byte two bytes or four bytes With multiple bytes since the memory mapped devices use a Big Endian architecture the high order byte is in the low order address For example digital bank counter data is in 4 byte unsigned integers It takes four bytes to contain the data for one point To read digital bank counter data for point 0 on module 0 you would start with address FFFFF0400100 The following table shows the pattern of bank counter data for the first few points on a SNAP rack OrAMD THORI MOOLA OCAWLI Ornmnl YTNOOR oooo oooo oo0oo oo0oo rrrr rrrtT Byesatthese 53 38 8888 8388 8888 8888 8888 addresses rF F rT rTFt rFFF rrr rrrr OOOO O000 0 00 00 000 01090 9D90 0090 0 Wo U Waban ee abaya aye ei W L E e u a a e L e U L L a EL ie L u U U U U LE U U U a U L U U L U o A b U A U O U W u U U ue L u u a l U u U u D u 0 e o e e D W E O L IL O e i L a L L E L W e G i u i E L Show data for this point 0 1 2 3 0 1 On
2. 3 From the drop down list choose the PID loop number you want to configure view or change Existing PID loops are indicated by an asterisk next to the number 4 To configure or change the PID click inside the cell in the Value column and type the new value or choose it from a drop down list if one is available When you have finished making changes click Apply to send them to the I O unit NOTE If you are using PAC Control it is easiest to tune PID loops in your PAC Control strategy running in Debug mode See the PAC Control User s Guide for more information For information on memory map addresses and what they contain see the OptoMMP Protocol Guide form 1465 168 PAC Manager User s Guide Legacy Edition Reading and Writing to Points You can use PAC Manager to read or change I O point values You must configure points before you can read or write to them CHAPTER 5 READING AND WRITING TO SPECIFIC DEVICES 5 Inspect I O Unit IP Address 10 192 55 67 Status Read Status Read Status Write Point Contig Digital Bank Digital Point Analog Bank Analog Point High Density System gt Scratch Pad gt DataLog gt PID gt Events gt Communications gt Other gt OxFFFF F030 OxFFFF F030 OxFFFF F030 OxFFFF F030 OxFFFF F030 OxFFFF F030 OxFFFF F030 OxFFFF F030 OxFFFF F030 OxFFFF F030 OxFFFF F030 OxFFFF F030 OxFFFF F030 OxFFFF F030 OxFFFF F030 OxFFFF F030 OxFFFF F030 OxFFFF FFF
3. 00 00 00 cc cece cece cece eee e ene e ees 48 Configuring Flow Control and 2 or 4 Wire Mode 0 000 cece cece eee e eee e es 50 Configuring Profibus Modules acandaacrisa cade trian GQrtdeciern laa ntetaeicealacsiadn 53 Configuring Wiegand Modules i 0icrcssraws lt avereeiwassesevdredanewboaeroadeloenbernds 55 Configuring PIDModUleS s ui c 3 4 ninatarag dassiew bone prea ernn hena aana bond eomats 57 Moving a Configured 0 Point xp cncculunaenandy sameatllalmerndllenentulimanermedneaees 59 Copying and Pasting 0 Units 250 icnindicenigineseuaenendsenieii esau aenbedsentimeteawaeninds 60 Configuring PID LOOKS spierien aeree AEE E R EER 61 Whatisa PID nucantaudonesnbehoudemsaxouerdetakenttesay E ES 61 Algorithm Choices ce ace date atk hee mats d ated hon eeesk hace cee eae eee hee clean tehon aeons 62 Steps for Configuring PIDS sche uanwiaaere wcavadnoweieue naaavad iawinatrewecseatiaes 63 Sending Configuration Data to the I O Unit ccccssccseceesseoenesesenseeseanesseuatoes 67 Using PAC Manager to Clear Flash Memory o n 68 Using VO Ront Features siriar itera uaa ra a a a AR rea ctl EE ance litte 68 States Digital Points senceich epee ve rears a ato stoeaiceatonst ace meareaneea aoa n nd errr rr eerren nrn 70 Latches Digital Points a cixhnsnsacidbensdoceteiaarcidpsnsecieertuseniieiwecciietasanees 70 Counters Digital Points i 5 ets Gere cece Gis dened b wid ek arene dle HANS task ee iicole nrn rrr reenn rrn 71 Quadrature C
4. Import Copy 170 Points PID Loops Modules gt Events Scratch Pad gt gi gt Communications gt Communications r Help Others gt button 4 Make sure the correct I O unit is highlighted in the list Click the Communications button and choose E mail from the pop up menu 3 Configure E mail SMTP Server A IP Address l Port 25 B Timeout milliseconds 30000 E mail Header C From D To E Subject Cancel Help 5 Complete the fields as follows A Enter the IP address and port number of the Simple Mail Transfer Protocol SMTP server the I O unit will use to send email You should be able to get this information from your network administrator B Enter the length of time in milliseconds the I O unit should wait for a response from the email server The default is 30 000 C Enter a valid email address that will identify the I O unit to the person who receives the email D Enter the email address of the person who will receive the email EI PAC Manager User s Guide Legacy Edition CHAPTER 3 CONFIGURING OPTIONAL FUNCTIONS E Entera phrase that will indicate the purpose of the email to the person receiving it Note that this subject line applies to all email messages sent by this I O unit Plugins can be used in this field For example if a similar email will be sent at intervals such as an email of the data log you can use the segid plugin to put a se
5. Events gt Events Scratch Pad gt button E B Communicators Help Others gt PAC Manager User s Guide Legacy Edition 2 CHAPTER 4 SETTING UP EVENTS AND REACTIONS Click the Events button and choose Alarm Events from the pop up menu 5 Configure Alarm Events Alatm v J Used Number 0 Address Description ae OxFFFF F110 0004 OxFFFF F110 0008 OxFFFF F110 000C OxFFFF F110 0010 OxFFFF F110 0008 OxFFFF F110 0020 OxFFFF F110 0024 OxFFFF F110 0028 OxFFFF F110 002C OxFFFF F110 0030 OxFFFF F110 0038 OxFFFF F110 0040 OxFFFF F110 0044 OxFFFF F110 0048 OxFFFF F110 004C OxFFFF F110 0050 OxFFFF F110 0058 OxFFFF F110 0060 OxFFFF F110 0064 OxFFFF FOAO 0000 DEVIATION ALARM Enable Disable Alarm Middle of deviation range Deviation Amount Scaled Units Scratch Pad Bits ON Scratch Pad Bits OFF HIGH ALARM In Alarm State Enable Disable Alarm Limit Scaled Units Limit Deadband Scaled Units Scratch Pad Bits ON Scratch Pad Bits OFF LOW ALARM In Alarm State Enable Disable Alarm Limit Scaled Units Limit Deadband Scaled Units Scratch Pad Bits ON Scratch Pad Bits OFF ADVANCED VALUE SELECTION Address of value to check Is Value a Float CURRENT VALUE Value being alarmed Disabled 0 000000 0 000000 Ox 00000000 00000000 Ox 00000000 00000000 N A Disabled 0 000000 0 000000 Ox 00000000 00000000 Ox 00000000 00000000 NZA Disabled 0 000000 0 000000 Ox 0
6. Maintaining files page 202 For other maintenance tasks such as resetting the device to factory defaults or handling a device whose IP address you don t know see the controller or brain user s guide Changing IP Addresses If you need to change an IP address or subnet mask you can do so using PAC Manager You must know the current IP address in order to change it The white sticker on the device may show the IP address If not see the device s user guide for instructions Controllers Brain Boards and Brains with Firmware Version 5 0 or Newer If your SNAP Ultimate or SNAP Ethernet brain has firmware version 5 0 or newer or if you have a SNAP PAC controller E1 or E2 brain board or SNAP Simple 1 0 brain use the steps in this section to change an IP address For SNAP Ultimate and SNAP Ethernet brains with older firmware see the brain user s guide form 1460 NOTE This method of changing the IP address uses FTP which cannot get through a firewall in the PC where PAC Manager is running Make sure any firewall in the computer such as the built in firewall in Windows XP is disabled before you change the IP address Firewalls in a router should not be a problem 1 Choose Start Programs Opto 22 gt PAC Project Software gt PAC Manager PAC Manager User s Guide Legacy Edition CHANGING IP ADDRESSES The PAC Manager main window opens 3 PAC Manager File Tools View Help ajajaj xjajaj Aj ij ol 2 Choose
7. Remember that any E1 or E2 used with PAC Project software PAC Control PAC Display OptoOPCServer or OptoDataLink or applications built with the OptoMMP Communication Toolkit or the Optomux Driver Toolkit must be assigned a static IP address because you will use the IP address to communicate with the device Discovering the IP Address Y TIP 1 Make sure you know the MAC address of the E1 or E2 For multiple devices The MAC address is printed on a white sticker on the brain board see page 23 Make sure that the Opto 22 hardware is installed according to directions in its user s guide 3 Turn onthe E1 or E2 1 0 unit The 1 0 unit sends a DHCP broadcast The broadcast is usually answered by a DHCP server on the network and the server assigns a dynamic IP address 4 OnaPCon the same network open a Command Prompt Type ping and the host name of the 1 0 unit The default host name for any E1 or E2is opro followed by the last six digits of the brain board s MAC address For example an E1 with a MAC address of 00 a0 3d 00 09 35 would 16 PAC Manager User s Guide Legacy Edition CHAPTER 2 CONFIGURING DEVICES have this default host name opro 00 09 35 So in the command prompt you would type ping OPTO 00 09 35 If the ping command works you know that the I O unit has been assigned an IP address The current IP address of the device is returned to you in the reply Choose one of the following Ifthe ping comma
8. page 89 for more information For example a resulting string that includes the pattern string the serial port that sent it and the text Overload would look like this _str_ _port_ Overload b To send an SNMP trap also enter how often in seconds to send the trap use zero to send it only once and enter the trap type Remember to configure email page 93 Trap types are determined by your SNMP management system c To send a one time email notification also enable E mail Message Make sure to configure email page 93 To send multiple emails don t enable email here Instead turn on a Scratch Pad bit step e and set up the email when you configure event messages page 86 d To send a serial message out a serial port don t put the message here Instead turn ona Scratch Pad bit step e and set up the serial message when you configure event messages page 86 e To set Scratch Pad bits enter masks for the bits to turn on and the bits to turn off when the serial event occurs 6 Repeat from step 2 for other serial events and reactions When you have finished configuring serial events and reactions click OK 7 Click the Save button al to save the configuration file Configuring Timed Events and Reactions PAC R Reactions normally occur immediately after their events happen If you want a delay between an EB event and its reaction you can configure a timer UIO The timer starts timing in response to a digit
9. 4 or enter a new value NOTE This is the only way to change hardware flow control for a SNAP SCM 232 or 2 or 4 wire mode for a SNAP SCM 485 422 You can also change other parameters in this dialog box if necessary However parameters changed in this dialog box are NOT saved to the configuration file PAC Manager User s Guide Legacy Edition PAC R EB UIO EIO CHAPTER 2 CONFIGURING DEVICES This example shows how to change Hardware Flow Control on a SNAP SCM 232 Inspect 1 0 Unit IP Address 10 192 55 67 Status Read Status Write Point Config Digital Bank Digital Point Analog Bank Analog Point High Density System b Scratch Pad gt DataLog gt PID Events gt Communications Other Close Serial Modules Serial Module Number 3 X v Port 2001 Timeout 1000 ms Status Serial Module area last read at 10 09 06 10 50 49 Module 3 is a Serial Module OxFFFF FOCO 0300 OxFFFF F034 7F30 OxFFFF F034 7F32 OxFFFF F034 7F36 OxFFFF F034 7F34 OxFFFF F034 8060 OxFFFF FO34 8064 OxFFFF F034 8068 OxFFFF F034 8069 OxFFFF F034 8064 OxFFFF F034 8068 OxFFFF F034 806C OxFFFF F034 8260 OxFFFF F034 8070 OxFFFF FOSA 8074 OxFFFF F034 8078 OxFFFF F034 8079 OxFFFF F034 8074 OxFFFF F034 807B OxFFFF F034 807C OxFFFF F034 8270 Help Description MODULE INFORMATION Module Type Module Subtype Hardware Revision Date Loader Version Firmware Version PORTA IP Port N
10. CHAPTER 5 READING AND WRITING TO SPECIFIC DEVICES SNAP AIMV2 4 25 25 mV 67 43 45 4 mV 27 5 25 0 25 0 27 5 SNAP AIPM point 1 only 70 46 OA AC VRMS 27 5 0 250 27 5 SNAP AIPM point 2 only 71 47 OA AC ARMS 27 5 0 10 27 5 SNAP AIPM point 3 only 82 52 OA True power n a n a n a n a SNAP AIPM point 4 only 83 53 OA Volt Amps n a n a n a n a SNAP AIRATE Rate Frequency 69 45 69 2 Hz 0 0 0 0 25000 0 27500 0 SNAP AIRTD 100 Ohm Pt 3 wire 10 A 10 2 Degrees C 200 0 200 0 850 0 850 0 SNAP AIRTD 100 Ohm Ni 3 wire 46 2E 10 2 Degrees C 60 0 60 0 250 0 250 0 SNAP AIRTD 120 Ohm Ni 3 wire 48 30 10 2 Degrees C 80 0 80 0 260 0 260 0 SNAP AITM 150 150 mV 66 42 66 2 mV 165 0 150 0 150 0 165 0 SNAP AITM 75 75 mV 68 44 66 2 mV 82 5 75 0 75 0 82 5 SNAP AITM Type E Thermocouple 19 13 66 2 Degrees C 270 0 270 0 1000 0 1000 0 SNAP AITM Type J Thermocouple 5 5 66 2 Degrees C 210 0 210 0 1200 0 1200 0 SNAP AITM Type K Thermocouple 8 8 66 2 Degrees C 270 0 270 0 1372 0 1372 0 SNAP AITM i 150 150 mV 66 42 20 2 mV 165 0 150 0 150 0 165 0 SNAP AITM i 75 75 mV 68 44 20 2 mV 82 5 75 0 75 0 82 5 SNAP AITM i Type E Thermocouple 19 13 20 2 Degrees C 270 0 270 0 1000 0 1000 0 SNAP AITM i Type J The
11. Counters page 71 68 PAC Manager User s Guide Legacy Edition CHAPTER 2 CONFIGURING DEVICES Quadrature counters Watchdog digital input A quadrature counter requires a SNAP quadrature input mod ule which is attached to the encoder device The module sends a pulse to the I O unit upon each change in quadrature state and the I O unit counts the pulses and keeps track of the direction and rotation digital and analog input and output A watchdog monitors communication with the PC or other host device If the host does not write data to the I O unit for the length of time set in the watchdog the I O unit automatically sets desig nated digital and analog output points to the values you have determined A watchdog helps make sure that a communication failure doesn t result in disaster If communication fails between the host and the I O unit controlling a process the watchdog makes sure the process is automatically brought to a safe state For example a valve could automatically close to avoid completely emptying a tank page 71 page 72 Scaling analog input and output Analog input and output points can be scaled as needed For example you can scale a 5 V to 5 V input point to reflect 0 to 100 page 72 Minimum and maximum val ues analog input Minimum and maximum values are sometimes called peaks and valleys You can read these values at any time for example to record
12. E TE 00 SNAP IDC5 10 32 VDCAVAC Digital Input 7 Modify s 0 Pump_1_Status a L Counter par Delete Move To Expand All _ Expand al Collapse All E a rf Hoo 8 To configure more digital points repeat the steps To configure analog points see the next section Configuring Analog Points NOTE To configure E1 and E2 1 0 units see Opto 22 form 1576 Technical Note I O Configuration for E1 and E2 Brain Boards 1 0 points on mistic serial I O units must be configured in PAC Control Use the following steps to configure analog points on all SNAP analog modules supported by the brain or on the rack controller PAC Manager User s Guide Legacy Edition CHAPTER 2 CONFIGURING DEVICES 1 In the Configure I O Points dialog box double click the number that represents the analog 2 5 Add Module Digital Output Analog Input Analog Output SNAP IDCS 10 32 VDCAVAC SNAP IDC5 FAST 2 5 16 VDC SNAP IDC5 FAST A 18 32 VDC SNAP IDCSD 2 5 28 VDC SNAP IDC5MA 10 32 VDCAVAC Man Auto Switch SNAP IDC5 SW Dry Contact Switch SNAP IDC5Q 4 24 VDC SNAP IDC5G 35 75 VACAVDC SNAP IDC5 HT 15 32 VDC SNAP IDC5 SW NC Dry Contact Switch SNAP IDC5FM 10 32 VDC SNAP IDCSDFM 2 5 28 VDC SNAP IDC 32 10 32 VDC Generic Digital Input SNAP IACS 90 140 YDC AC SNAP IAC54 180 280 YDC VAC SNAP IAC5SMA 90 140 VDCA AC Man Auto Switch SNAP IACSFM 90 140 YDC AC
13. TCP Idle Session Timeout msec 0 Disable Max Digital Scantime msec Max Analog Scantime msec Scanner Flags Secondary IP Address Secondary Subnet Mask Operation Commands Send Command Switch to loader made Events gt Communications gt Other gt Clear datalog Clear digital event configuration Clear alarm configuration Clear PPP configuration Clear e mail configuration Clear timer configuration Clear PID configuration No Degrees C Apply 1000 250 3000 5 240000 1000 1000 0x 00000000 10 192 255 5 255 255 192 0 4 Click Send Command The device is restarted and a Success message appears Resetting Points to Defaults Resetting the I O unit s points to defaults has the following effects e Clears error information in the status area e Clears offsets and gains latches and minimum maximum data also clears and deactivates counters e Turns off digital outputs e Sets analog outputs to zero scale 0 counts e Restarts the I O unit Follow these steps to reset and restart the I O unit 1 In the PAC Manager main window click the Inspect button al 2 Inthe IP Address field type the IP address of the I O unit Click Status Write PAC Manager User s Guide Legacy Edition WRITING COMMANDS TO THE DEVICE 3 In the Operation Command list highlight Reset to defaults and Restart I O Unit 3 Inspect 1 0 Unit IP Address 10 192 55 67 v Port 2001 Ti
14. 2 Degrees C 42 0 42 0 1820 0 1820 0 SNAP AITM2 Type C Thermocouple 32 20 09 2 Degrees C 0 0 0 0 2320 0 2320 0 PAC Manager User s Guide Legacy Edition CONFIGURING 1 0 MODULES POINTS AND FEATURES SNAP AITM2 Type D Thermocouple 33 21 09 2 Degrees C 0 0 0 0 2320 0 2320 0 SNAP AITM2 Type G Thermocouple 31 1F 09 2 Degrees C 0 0 0 0 2320 0 2320 0 SNAP AITM2 Type N Thermocouple 30 1E 09 2 Degrees C 270 0 270 0 1300 0 1300 0 SNAP AITM2 Type R Thermocouple 17 11 09 2 Degrees C 50 0 50 0 1768 0 1768 0 SNAP AITM2 Type S Thermocouple 23 17 09 2 Degrees C 50 0 50 0 1768 0 1768 0 SNAP AITM2 Type T Thermocouple 18 12 09 2 Degrees C 270 0 270 0 400 0 400 0 SNAP AITM2 i 50 50 mV 9 a Al 2 mV 55 0 50 0 50 0 55 0 SNAP AITM2 i 25 25 mV 67 43 21 2 mV 27 5 25 0 25 0 27 5 SNAP AITM2 i Type B Thermocouple 24 18 21 2 Degrees C 42 0 42 0 1820 0 1820 0 SNAP AITM2 i Type C Thermocouple 32 20 21 2 Degrees C 0 0 0 0 2320 0 2320 0 SNAP AITM2 i Type D Thermocouple 33 21 21 2 Degrees C 0 0 0 0 2320 0 2320 0 SNAP AITM2 i Type G Thermocouple 31 1F 21 2 Degrees C 0 0 0 0 2320 0 2320 0 SNAP AITM2 i Type N Thermocouple 30 1E 21 2 Degrees C 270 0 270 0 1300 0 1300 0 SNAP AITM2 i Type R Thermocouple 17 11
15. 70 offset 47 73 definition 69 on 70 on latch 68 70 operation commands 185 Opto 22 Product Support 3 OptoMMP default port 76 limiting access to 76 P PAC Control 123 145 and direct reads and writes 145 and event reactions 123 copying configuration files from 35 managing files on I O unit or controller 202 protecting strategy 77 parallel algorithm for PID 62 password for FTP 77 peak 69 PID loops algorithms 62 configuring 61 166 PID modules configuring 57 183 reading 183 plugins 89 port changing for security 76 serial on brain or controller 113 ports for serial modules 156 power powerup clear 188 restarting controller 186 restarting I O unit 186 powerup clear 188 PPP clearing configuration 189 configuring 117 185 primary IP address assigning 11 problems troubleshooting 211 processor assigning IP address 10 feature comparison chart 5 Product Support 3 getting device and firmware data 212 Profibus configuring modules 53 165 protecting PAC Control strategy 77 protocol default ports 76 limiting access to 76 le Q quadrature counter 69 71 R racks for mounting 1 0 154 reaction delayed 138 digital 128 example 129 Scratch Pad 124 trigger analog 134 digital 129 reading analog bank 174 analog point 172 data log 84 digital bank 174 PAC Manager User s Guide Legacy Edition digital point 170 digital points on
16. 9 Click the Communications button and choose Communication Port Control from the pop up menu 5 Configure Communication Port Control COMMUNICATION PORT 0 OxFFFF F031 0400 Control Function For Communication Port 0 PPP OxFFFF F031 0404 Logging For Communication Port 0 Disabled COMMUNICATION PORT 1 OxFFFF F031 0408 Control Function For Communication Port 1 None OxFFFF F031 040C Logging For Communication Port 1 Disabled COMMUNICATION PORT 2 Cancel If there is no check mark in the Used box click the box to place a check mark there Ports shown in the window are as follows Port 0 RS 232 connector on controller s top Ports 1 and 2 Not used If Port 0 is directly connected to a serial device do the following a Inthe Control Function for Communication Port value field choose None from the drop down list b In the Logging for Communication Port field leave the value field set to Disabled This log file is used for PPP troubleshooting When the control function is set to None the log file logs only characters received by the PAC Control strategy Since PAC Control is handling the data you don t need the log file When you have finished configuring the port click OK Configure other optional functions or return to the PAC Manager main window and click the Save button Hl to save the configuration file When you are ready to upload the configuration file to the I O unit see Sending Configuration Data to the I
17. Legacy Edition CONFIGURING PPP A SNAP Ultimate 1 0 unit is shown in the following examples PC with Remote Access Server Ethernet IP Address PPP IP Address PCs with Dial Up Networking SNAP Ultimate Brain re PCs dial in to SNAP Ultimate brain IMPORTANT After you have followed the steps in this section to configure PPP on the O unit see the I O units user s guide for information on attaching the modem to the system and setting up Windows dial up networking or remote access server on the PC PAC R Configuring PPP on the I O Unit T 1 In the PAC Manager main window click the Open button or choose File Open EIO pg PAC Manager User s Guide Legacy Edition CHAPTER 3 CONFIGURING OPTIONAL FUNCTIONS 2 In the Open Tag Database dialog box navigate to the configuration file and double click it to open it 3 PAC Manager Main_Process SEE File Edit Tools View Help olsa xaje A Bl Main_Process SEE iy Line_1 AN Preprocess 3 In the configuration tree right click the name of the I O unit on which you want to set up PPP and choose Configure from the pop up menu 5 Configure 1 0 Units Ref Count Desc Add Modify Delete Import Copy 1 0 Points wocess SNAP P ETHER 10 192 5 Enabled PID Loops Modules gt Events Scratch Pad gt gt Communications Communication Others
18. OxFFFF F030 0038 OxFFFF F030 003C OxFFFF F030 0040 OxFFFF FFFF F060 OxFFFF FFFF F050 ox F 055 OxFFFF FFFF F068 OxFFFF FFFF F070 PID Close Help Powerup Clear Flag PUC Needed Busy Flag Loader Version Memory Map Version Firmware Version Firmware Version Date Firmware Version Time Unit Type Unit Description I 0 Unit Hardware Revision Month I 0 Unit Hardware Revision Day I O Unit Hardware Revision Year Installed Ram v Port 2001 Timeout 1000 ms Status Status Read area last read at 10 06 06 14 36 24 PUC Received 0 A 0 Rl la 1 R8 0a 06 08 2006 09 24 43 0x0000007A SNAP PAC R1 1 24 2006 16777216 MAC Address TCP IP Address TCP IP Subnet Mask TCP IP Default Gateway P IP Name Server econdary MAC Address Secondary TCP IP Address Secondary TCP IP Subnet Mask Secondary TCP IP Default Gateway Secondary TCP IP Name Server Creating an I O Unit Configuration File 00 A0 3D 00 DB 4C 10 192 55 67 255 255 192 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 00 A0 3D 00 DB 4D 10 192 255 5 255 255 192 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 NOTE For E1 and E2 1 0 units ifyou are communicating with them using Optomux only you do not need to configure them in PAC Manager However if you are also communicating with E1 and E2 1 0 units using OptoMMP Modbus TCP or PAC Project software including OptoOPCServer and OptoDataLink you must configure them To configure E1 and E2 1 0 units do not use the steps in this secti
19. SNAP IACSASFM 180 280 YDC AC Cancel Help module s position on the rack For help see the diagrams starting on page 153 In the Add Module dialog box choose Analog Input or Analog Output and then choose the exact module part number from the list Click OK 3 In the Configure I O Points dialog box click the plus sign next to the new module to expand it Notice that the module icon is color coded to reflect the type of module being configured blue for analog input green for analog output PAC Manager User s Guide Legacy Edition CONFIGURING 1 0 MODULES AND POINTS Configure 1 0 Points Module icon Expand or collapse points on the module by clicking the or sign in the box Points El cd 00 SNAP IDCS 10 32 VDC VAC Digital Input Modity FE D Pump_1_Status Counter Wy Not ised Delete D 01 SNAP AIV Analog Input 21 Not Used Expand All Collapse All z Add Analog Point Name l Description Type Module SNAP AIW i 10 10 VDC Scaling Units VDC Zero Scale E 0 Full Scale ji 0 Watchdog No C OK Cancel Help e ee 5 Complete the fields as follows A B Cc Enter a name for the point The name must start with a letter and may contain letters numbers and underscores Spaces are converted to underscores Optional Enter a description of the point Type and module are inserted for you You may be able to c
20. Type Port Address Watchdog Ref Count Desc Add Preprocess SNAP P ETHER 10 192 5 Enabled 2 Modify Delete Import Copy 1 0 Points PID Loops Modules gt Modules Evens gt button Scratch Pad gt gt Communications gt Help Others gt PAC Manager User s Guide Legacy Edition 49 CONFIGURING 1 0 MODULES AND POINTS 2 Make sure the correct I O unit is highlighted Click the Modules button and choose Serial Modules from the pop up menu 5 Configure Serial Modules Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Cancel Help r MUMOATMEePwWWNNHAAOO DOrPoOrororoarororo 3 Click the status cell for the module number and port number whose parameters you want to change From the pop up menu choose Enabled The Status changes to Enabled 4 To change a communication parameter click the cell you want to change within the highlighted line Choose from the drop down list if there is one or type the new value in the cell NOTE The start bit is not configurable To set flow control and 2 or 4 wire mode see the steps on page 50 5 When you have finished changing parameters for serial modules click OK to close the dialog box and return to configuring I O units IMPORTANT If you have changed an IP Port number you must save the change to flash and restar
21. You can configure most Ethernet based 1 0 unit and point functions either in PAC Control or in PAC Manager IMPORTANT For E1 and E2 1 0 units you must use PAC Manager See form 1576 Technical Note I O Configuration for E1 and E2 Brain Boards for instructions For mistic 1 0 units PAC Manager cannot be used for configuration Use PAC Control For most I O units ifyou are already in PAC Control configuration is easier there and you can use the loopback IP address for SNAP PAC R series or SNAP Ultimate I O units controlling themselves However some functions for I O units cannot be configured in PAC Control If you use PAC Manager you can save your configuration to a file load it to multiple I O units at once and use it for referencing points in OPC However you cannot use the loopback address in PAC Manager and you cannot use PAC Manager for mistic I O units Choose your configuration tool based on what you need to do e You have only one I O unit or I O unit configurations You have multiple I O units whose configurations are different are exactly the same or similar You are configuring mistic I O units You are configuring an E1 or E2 I O unit e The strategy will run on SNAP PAC P series or e You are using a modem connection PPP or SNAP Ultimate I O units that are controlling SNMP themselves using the loopback IP address e You are using event messages or email 127 0 0 1 You are configuring events and reactions on t
22. gt s button 4 Make sure the correct I O unit is highlighted in the list Click the Communications button and choose PPP from the pop up menu PAC Manager User s Guide Legacy Edition 119 CONFIGURING PPP 5 Configure PPP General PPP Serial Port A Local IP Address 168 0 1 Subnet Mask i Baud Rate 19200 v B Max Authentication Retries 3 I PPP Link Always Connected Parity None c Modem Initialization String Data Bits 8 z D ATADO MYY r Stop Bits 1 X Modem Hangup String THO MO Flow Control None bd E i F Incoming PPP Outgoing PPP Incoming Connections Disabled v Outgoing Connections Disabled Inactivity Timeout 30 Set As Default Gateway No af Use Local IP Address No v Max Connect Time 0 Inactivity Timeout 30 Set As Default Gateway No x Max Dial Retries 0 Remote IP Address 192 168 0 2 ar M Remit oO Login P d en SSN Password Disable Time 0 Modem Listen String ATSO 1 M Phone Number Cancel Help 5 Complete the fields as follows A Enter the Local IP Address for the PPP interface on the I O unit Enter the local Subnet Mask only if you are using classless IP addressing If you are not using classless IP addressing leave the Subnet Mask at zero and the I O unit will calculate the subnet mask IMPORTANT The network address for the PPP interface must be different from the network ID for the Ethernet interface The network address is obtained by ANDing the IP a
23. gt PAC Manager PAC Manager User s Guide Legacy Edition CHAPTER 2 CONFIGURING DEVICES 2 In the PAC Manager main window click the Inspect button Ql 3 Inspect 1 0 Unit IP Address 0 0 0 0 Port 2001 Timeout 1000 ms Status EEEE RE tel amet eres Status Read Status Write Point Config Digital Bank Digital Point Analog Bank Analog Point High Density System gt Scratch Pad gt DataLog gt PID Events Communications gt Other Close Help If this is the first time you have used the Inspect button the IP address will show 0 0 0 0 as shown above If you have used the Inspect button before the last IP address you used is shown and the most recently used IP addresses are available in the drop down list 3 Inthe IP Address field type the IP address for ENET1 the primary IP address on the SNAP PAC controller or choose it from the drop down list Click Status Read Status information for the controller is shown in the window If the secondary IP address has not been assigned yet the secondary IP address information will show all zeros PAC Manager User s Guide Legacy Edition ASSIGNING AN IP ADDRESS 5 Inspect 1 0 Unit IP Address 10 192 55 67 gt Port 2001 Timeout 1000 ms Status Status Read area last read at 10 06 06 14 13 38 r Status Read Status Read Status Write DESCRIPTION a 5 Powerup Clear Flag PUC Needed PUC Received 0 Point Config Busy Flag o
24. the event When the pattern is matched the I O unit reacts in a predetermined way You UIO can configure up to 128 digital events and reactions EIO NOTE Digital events and reactions are available for points on 4 channel digital modules but not for points on high density digital modules Digital event reactions can be as simple as turning on a light reaction when a door opens event They can also be very complex depending on your needs For example suppose you need to monitor a critical group of switches If switches 1 2 and 3 are all off at once you want to turn on an emergency light and sound an alarm You can set up a digital event for the state of the three switches and a reaction that automatically turns on the emergency light and alarm The reaction to a digital event can turn digital points on or off and can also set bits in the Scratch Pad The reaction can also depend on alarm conditions noted in the Scratch Pad For instance to regulate the temperature of a room you might set up an alarm event that turns on a bit in the Scratch Pad when the temperature reaches 78 F see Configuring Alarms and Reactions on page 133 Then you would set up a digital event reaction to turn on an air conditioning unit when that Scratch Pad bit is on NOTE Ifyou want to turn on or off digital points that are located on a different I O unit you can do so by using the memory map copying feature See Copying Memory Map Data on pag
25. you can choose the status or value the point should be set to if the watchdog timer expires For E1 and E2 1 0 units follow the steps in form 1576 1 0 Configuration for E1 and E2 Brain Boards Scaling Analog Points You can scale analog input or output points to match your needs For example you can scale a 5 V to 5 V input point to reflect 0 to 100 Point types may be unipolar or bipolar Examples of Unipolar Points 4 20 mA analog output 0 10 A RMS analog input Unipolar and bipolar points are scaled in the same way with the lowest reading reflecting the low Examples of Bipolar Points 25 mV to 25 mV analog input 10 to 10 VDC analog output scale and the highest reading reflecting the high scale Here are two examples Unipolar Input Point Bipolar Input Point Low scale High scale Low scale High scale Actual reading OmA 20 mA 5V OV 5V Scaled for percentage 0 100 0 50 100 Scaled for counts 0 25 000 25 000 0 25 000 Counts for input points always range 25 000 to 25 000 Unipolar Output Point Bipolar Output Point Low scale High scale Low scale High scale Actual reading 4mA 20 mA 10VDC 0VDC 10 VDC Scaled for percentage 0 100 0 50 100 Scaled for counts 0 4 095 0 2 047 5 4 095 Counts for output points always range 0 4 095 To scale an analog point see the instructions on page 45 EXCEPTION For an E2 1 0 unit follow the ste
26. 0 3 a 3 0 3 0 Close Help Remember that values for points on high density digital modules are not included You can copy part or all of the data in this window and paste it into another file such as a text file or email Just highlight what you want to copy right click it and choose Copy from the pop up menu or use cRL c To highlight all data in the window right click in the window and choose Select All Data Formats Most digital bank data is in the form of a mask For example the State of Digital Points value shown in the previous figure is this mask 0x00000000 0000B001 This mask shows in hex the state of all 64 possible points maximum rack of 16 modules with four points per module The lowest points are on the right Hex 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 B 0 0 1 Binary 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 1011 0000 0000 0001 Points 3 0 3 0 3 0 3 0 3 0 3 0 3 0 3 0 3 0 3 0 3 0 3 0 3 0 3 0 3 0 3 0 Modules 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 In this case all points are OFF except for point 0 on the module in position 0 and points 0 1 and 3 on the module in position 3 which are ON For more help in interpreting bank data see page 191 Bank counter data however uses unsigned 32 bit integers for help in interpreting counter data see page 191 PAC Manager User s
27. 0 Show data for these points 3 2 111013 2 1 0 3 2 1 0 3 2 1 0 On SNAP modules in these positions in the rack bas 1 o Therefore at address FFFFF0400000 This hex data B 1 Equals this binary data 1 0 1 1 0 0 0 1 Showing the states On Off On On Off Off Off On Of these points 3 2 1 0 3 2 1 0 On these modules 15 14 Data from other addresses marked as masks is formatted in a similar way Mask Data for E1s The bank area of the memory map is based on a four point SNAP module For I O units with E1 brain boards each point is treated as the first point on a SNAP module That means that when you read a bank of digital points on an E1 data appears only in the first of every four points like this At address FFFFFO400000 FFFFF0400007 These bit numbers 7 6 5 413 2 110 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Show data for these points 0 0 0 10 On G1 or G4 modules in these positions in the rack 15 14 1 0 190 PAC Manager User s Guide Legacy Edition CHAPTER 5 READING AND WRITING TO SPECIFIC DEVICES So at address FFFFO4000000 This hex data 1 0 Equals this binary data O O 0 1 0 0 0 0 Showing the states
28. 0 5 0 5 0 55 SNAP PID V 99 63 DO 4 Percent 0 0 100 0 110 0 The SNAP AIPM module monitors one device from point 1 volts and point 2 amps Points 3 and 4 return calculated values PAC Manager User s Guide Legacy Edition CHAPTER 5 READING AND WRITING TO SPECIFIC DEVICES Analog Output Modules Use this data for configuring point types and features see page 158 SNAP AOA 3 4 20 mA 131 83 83 1 mA 4 0 4 0 20 0 20 0 SNAP AOV 5 0 10 VDC 133 85 85 1 VDC 0 0 0 0 10 0 10 0 SNAP AOA 23 4 20 mA 163 A3 A3 2 mA 4 0 4 0 20 0 20 0 SNAP AOA 23 iSRC 4 20 mA 163 A3 B3 2 mA 4 0 4 0 20 0 20 0 SNAP AOV 25 0 10 VDC 165 A5 A5 2 VDC 0 0 0 0 10 0 10 0 SNAP AOV 27 10 10 VDC 167 A7 A7 2 VDC 10 0 10 0 10 0 10 0 SNAP AOA 28 0 20 mA 168 A8 A8 2 mA 0 0 0 0 20 0 20 0 SNAP AOD 29 TPO 169 A9 AQ 2 percent n a 0 0 00 0 n a Configuring Serial Profibus and Wiegand Modules Remember that configuration changes made in the Inspect window cannot be saved to a configuration file To use a configuration file see Chapter 2 1 In the PAC Manager main window click the Inspect button al 2 In the Inspect 1 0 Unit dialog box type the IP address of the I O unit or choose it from the drop down list Click Communications and then click the type of module from the submenu Serial Modules Profibus Modules or W
29. 1 0 3 2 1 0 State gt On fo fo fe Binary notation 0 0 0 0 gt 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 gt Hex notation 0 You don t need to enter anything in the Scratch Pad section because the open door is the only dependency for this event Here s how the Event and Reaction sections would appear if you were using Event 0 Configure Digital Events Event Number 0 v M Used EVENT OxFFFF FODO 0000 Digital ON OxFFFF FODO 0008 _ Digital OFF Ox 00000000 00000000 Ox 00000000 00000001 OxFFFF FODO 0020 cratch Pad Bits ON OxFFFF FODO0028 Scratch Pad Bits OFF REACTION Ox 00000000 00000000 OxFFFF FODO 0010 Digital ON OxFFFF FODO 0018 _ Digital OFF Ox 00000000 00000020 Ox 00000000 00000000 OxFFFF FODO 0030 Scratch Pad Bits ON OxFFFF FODO 0038 Scratch Pad Bits OFF OK Cancel PAC Manager User s Guide Legacy Edition Ox 00000000 OOOOO000 Ox 00000000 00000000 Event Digital OFF mask door on mod 0 pt 0 is open Reaction Digital ON mask turn on light at mod 1 pt 1 CHAPTER 4 SETTING UP EVENTS AND REACTIONS 8 Now choose Event Number 1 from the drop down list and click Used In the Event and Reaction sections enter the Digital ON mask for the closed door and the Digital OFF mask to turn off the light 5 Configure Digital Events Event Number v M Used EVENT Event Digital ON OxFFFF FODO 0040 Digital ON Ox 00000000 000
30. 1 0 Unit 10 192 55 67 Succe Products lt DIR gt 2006 10 12 16 27 00 email doc 19456 2006 10 12 16 39 00 ___ Selecta Clear Completed Results The listing shows the file or folder name the file s size in bytes or lt DIR gt for folders and the date and time it was placed there in the format YYYY MM DD hh mm ss Deleting a File from a SNAP Controller or I O Unit You can also use PAC Manager to delete a file from one device or from several devices at once 1 In the PAC Manager main window click the Maintenance button 2 In the Command list highlight Delete File On I O Unit 3 Inthe Filename field type the filename and path if any of the file you want to delete For example Products Product Categories txt 4 Inthe IP Addresses list highlight the IP address es of the SNAP device s you are deleting the file from Ifthe correct IP addresses are not shown click Add to add an address or group of addresses or if you have saved a list of IP addresses click Load to load the saved list 5 Click Execute The file is deleted and a Success message appears in the Results area Using Flash Memory with the File System You can use PAC Manager to move files between the controller or I O unit s file system and its flash memory which stores files so they are not lost if the device loses power Remember that flash memory is smaller than the memory available for file storage check the controller s or I O unit s dat
31. Address OxFFFF F034 0024 Filter 0 Mask OxFFFF F034 0028 Filter 1 Address OxFFFF F034 002C Filter 1 Mask OxFFFF F034 0030 Filter 2 Address OxFFFF F034 0034 Filter 2 Mask OxFFFF F034 0038 Filter 3 Address OxFFFF F034 003C Filter 3 Mask OxFFFF F034 0040 Filter 4 Address OxFFFF F034 0044 Filter 4 Mask OxFFFF F034 0048 Filter 5 Address OxFFFF F034 004C Filter 5 Mask OxFFFF F034 0050 Filter 6 Address OxFFFF F034 0054 Filter 6 Mask OxFFFF F034 0058 Filter 7 Address OxFFFF F034 005C Filter 7 Mask OxFFFF F03A 0060 Filter 8 Address Cancel If there is no check mark in the Used box click the box to place a check mark there To limit access to a specific protocol change the Port number in the Value column CAUTION If you change the Control Engine port to zero a strategy that is already in the control engine will still run but PAC Display PAC Control and other hosts will not be able to communicate with it See Protecting a PAC Control Strategy from Interference on page 77 To set up an FTP login enter the Username and Password to be required from anyone who uses FTP to access the device To limit access to specific computers set up to ten filter addresses and filter masks The filter address is the IP address that is allowed to access the 1 0 unit the filter mask indicates a range of allowed addresses If only one IP address may access the I O unit enter 255 255 255 255 for the filter mask If a r
32. Config i e 3 Type Digital Input 0x100 Feature Counter 0x01 Digital Bank Name Pump_1_Status Digital Point Read Area Analog Bank Address Description Refresh STATUS Analog Point OxFFFF F080 0000 Point State LATCHES High Density OxFFFF FO800004 On Latch OxFFFF FO800008 Off Latch System gt COUNTER OxFFFF F080 000C Active ScratchPad gt OxFFFF F080 0010 Data DataLog gt PID gt Write Area Counter State Clear Events gt po 0 Counter On OxFO90 0008 Counter OxFOFO 0000 Communications gt mon Counter On Cownter E ii 4 OnLatch OxFOFO 0100 Off Latch OxFOFO 0200 Click the point number you want to read or write to The current values for that point number appear in the Read Area The Status data at the top right corner of the window shows the date and time values were last read The Read Area and the Write Area change depending upon the point type To turn counting on or off or to clear counters and latches click the buttons in the Counter State and Clear areas near the bottom of the window For more information on these features see page 71 Your changes are immediately sent to the I O unit and the window is updated to reflect your changes PAC Manager User s Guide Legacy Edition CHAPTER 5 READING AND WRITING TO SPECIFIC DEVICES Digital Output Points The following example shows a digital output point 5 Inspect 1 0 Unit IP Address 10 192 55 67 X Port
33. Digital Bank Digital Point Analog Bank Analog Point High Density System gt Scratch Pad gt DataLog gt PID Events Communications gt Other gt Status Read OxFFFF F030 0004 OxFFFF F030 0008 OxFFFF F030 0018 OxFFFF F030 0000 OxFFFF F030 001C OxFFFF F030 0040 OxFFFF F030 OOBO OxFFFF F030 0020 OxFFFF F030 0080 OxFFFF F030 0024 OxFFFF F030 0025 OxFFFF F030 0026 OxFFFF F030 0028 OxFFFF F030 002E OxFFFF F030 0034 OxFFFF F030 0038 OxFFFF F030 003C OxFFFF F030 0040 OxFFFF FFFF F060 OxFFFF FFFF F050 OxFFFF FFFF F058 DESCRIPTION Powerup Clear Flag PUC Needed Busy Flag Loader Version Memory Map Version Firmware Version Firmware Version Date Firmware Version Time Unit Type Unit Description I O Unit Hardware Revision Month I 0 Unit Hardware Revision Day I O Unit Hardware Revision Year Installed Ram MAC Address TCP IP Address TCP IP Subnet Mask TCP IP Default Gateway TCP IP Name Server Secondary MAC Address Secondary TCP IP Address Secondary TCP IP Subnet Mask PUC Received 0 0 R1 0n 1 R7 2a 10 05 2006 15 40 54 0x0000007C SNAP PAC 51 il 22 2005 33554432 00 A0 3D 00 9D A7 10 192 54 88 255 255 192 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 00 40 3D 00 9D 48 If you have used the Inspect button before the last IP address you used is shown and current Status Read information from that IP address appears The most recently used IP addresses are available in the dro
34. Digital Bank __ Distal Bark Loader Version Rl la Digital Point Memory Map Version 1 Firmware Version R8 0a Analog Bank Firmware Version Date 06 08 2006 R Firmware Version Time 09 24 43 Analog Point High Density Unit Type 0x0000007A Unit Description SNAP PAC R1 System I 0 Unit Hardware Revision Month as I 0 Unit Hardware Revision Day 24 Scratch Pad gt I O Unit Hardware Revision Year 2006 Installed Ram 16777216 DataLog gt E 7 MAC Address 00 A0 3D 00 DB 4C TCP IP Address 10 192 55 67 Events gt TCP IP Subnet Mask 255 255 192 0 Secondary IP address TCP IP Default Gateway 0 0 0 0 A i Communications TCP IP Name Server 0 0 0 0 information scroll down on z Secondary MAC Address 00 A0 3D 00 DB 4D er Secondary TCP IP Address 0 0 0 to see all entries Secondary TCP IP Subnet Mask 0 0 0 4 Click Status Write Scroll down to see all the secondary IP address fields 3 Inspect 1 0 Unit IP Address 10 192 55 67 v Port 2001 Timeout 1000 ms Status Status Write area last read at 10 06 06 14 15 27 Status Write Status Read adress Desio Vee S S OxFFFF F038 0010 Comm Watchdog Time msec 0 Disable 5 3 OxFFFF F038 0014 TCP Minimum Retransmission Timeout msec Point Config OxFFFF F038 0018 TCP Initial Retransmission Timeout msec Digital Bank OxFFFF F038 001C TCP Retransmission Attempts OxFFFF F038 0020 TCP Idle Session Timeout msec 0 Disable Digital Poi
35. E Enter the new scaled upper value This value can be any floating point value greater than the scaled lower value This example uses 1000 which scales the output to 1000 liters per second when its actual reading is 5 VDC 3 Click OK The new custom scaled units appear in the Add Analog Point dialog box Add Analog Point Name Flowmeter_A Description Type npt Y Module SNAP AIV i 10 10 VDC Scalable v Units Liters per second pe Default Zero Scale j 2000 Full Scale 2000 Watchdog No C OK Cancel Help 0K cma He Ea PAC Manager User s Guide Legacy Edition Notice the new units of liters per second and the new zero scale and full scale values of 2000 and 2000 The example connects a sensor with a range of 0 1000 liters per second but an output of only 0 5 volts to a SNAP AIV module with an output of 10 to 10 volts The figures in this dialog box reflect the total possible range of the module not the sensor Customscale Module s Liters sec scale VDC Possible low 2000 10 value for module 1000 5 Upper amp lower 0 0 values entered in 1000 Ke 5 dialog box Possible high 2000 10 value for module CHAPTER 2 CONFIGURING DEVICES Calibrating Offset and Gain The SNAP Ethernet based 1 0 unit can calibrate analog input points If a 50 mV to 50 mV input receives signals that are slightly off not exactly 50 mV at the lowest point for exa
36. Events Scratch Pad gt button gt Communications Help Others gt 5 Click the Events button and choose Digital Events from the pop up menu 5 Configure Digital Events Event Number fo M Used Address Description ae O EVENT OxFFFF FODO 0000 Digital ON Ox 00000000 o0000000 OxFFFF FODO 0008 Digital OFF Ox 00000000 o0000000 OxFFFF FODO 0020 Scratch Pad Bits ON Ox 00000000 oo000000 OxFFFF FODO 0028 Scratch Pad Bits OFF Ox OOO00000 oO000000 REACTION OxFFFF FODOO010 Digital ON Ox OOO00000 oO000000 OxFFFF FODO 0018 Digital OFF Ox 00000000 o0000000 OxFFFF FODO 0030 Scratch Pad Bits ON Ox 00000000 00000000 OxFFFF FODO 0038 Scratch Pad Bits OFF Ox 00000000 00000000 6 In the drop down list choose the lowest unused Event Number Click to place a check mark in the Used box NOTE To reduce scanning time the 1 0 unit stops scanning digital events when it reaches an unused event Make sure you use event numbers in order starting with the lowest 7 Inthe Event section enter the Digital OFF mask for the open door In the Reaction section enter the Digital ON mask to turn on the light PAC Manager User s Guide Legacy Edition Ls CONFIGURING DIGITAL EVENTS AND REACTIONS Remember that the masks are in hex notation Here s how you might figure out the Digital ON mask to turn on the light Module position 15 gt 1 Digital point 3 2 1 0 gt 3 2
37. F038 0008 OxFFFF F038 0010 OxFFFF F038 0014 OxFFFF F038 0018 OxFFFF F038 001C OxFFFF F038 0020 OxFFFF F038 004C OxFFFF F038 0050 OxFFFF F038 0054 OxFFFF FFFF F050 OxFFFF FFFF F058 Description Always BootP DHCP On Powerup Degrees F C Comm Watchdog Time msec 0 Disable TCP Minimum Retransmission Timeout msec TCP Initial Retransmission Timeout msec TCP Retransmission Attempts TCP Idle Session Timeout msec 0 Disable Max Digital Scantime msec Max Analog Scantime msec Scanner Flags Secondary IP Address Secondary Subnet Mask x Port 2001 Timeout fi 000 ms Status Status Write area last read at 10 11 06 12 26 56 Apply No Degrees C 0 250 3000 5 240000 1000 1000 Ox 00000000 10 192 255 5 255 255 192 0 High Density System gt Scratch Pad gt DataLog gt PID gt Events gt Communications gt Other gt Operation Commands Send Command Send powerup clear Reset to defaults and Restart 1 0 Unit Store configuration to flash Erase configuration from flash Restart 1 0 Unit from powerup Switch to loader mode Clear digital event configuration Clear alarm configuration Clear PPP configuration Clear e mail configuration Clear timer configuration Clear PID configuration Clear datalog 3 In the Operation Command list click the configuration you want to clear Erase configuration from flash removes configuration data from flash memory Reset to defaul
38. Fast 34 22 OC 2 Percent 110 0 100 0 100 0 110 0 SNAP AILC 2 4 4 mV V Slow 36 24 OC 2 Percent 110 0 100 0 100 0 110 0 SNAP AILC 2 Filter of 1st channel 0 0 0C 2 Percent 110 0 100 0 100 0 110 0 SNAP AIMA 20 20 mA 64 40 64 2 mA 22 0 20 0 20 0 22 0 SNAP AIMA 0 20 mA 2 2 64 2 mA 22 0 0 0 20 0 22 0 SNAP AIMA 4 20 mA 3 3 64 2 mA 22 0 4 0 20 0 22 0 SNAP AIMA2 i 1 to 1 mA 85 55 27 2 mA 1 1 1 0 1 0 1 1 SNAP AIMA i 20 20 mA 64 40 22 2 mA 22 0 20 0 20 0 22 0 SNAP AIMA i 0 20 mA 2 2 22 2 mA 22 0 0 0 20 0 22 0 SNAP AIMA i 4 20 mA 3 3 22 2 mA 22 0 4 0 20 0 22 0 SNAP AIMA iSRC 20 20 mA 64 40 26 2 mA 22 0 20 0 20 0 22 0 SNAP AIMA iSRC 0 20 mA 2 2 26 2 mA 22 0 0 0 20 0 22 0 SNAP AIMA iSRC 4 20 mA 3 3 26 2 mA 22 0 4 0 20 0 22 0 SNAP AIMA 4 20 20 mA 64 40 40 4 mA 22 0 20 0 20 0 22 0 SNAP AIMA 4 0 20 mA 2 2 40 2 mA 22 0 0 0 20 0 22 0 SNAP AIMA 4 4 20 mA 3 3 40 2 mA 22 0 4 0 20 0 22 0 SNAP AIMA 32 20 to 20 mA 64 40 4D 32 mA 22 0 20 0 20 0 22 0 SNAP AIMA 32 0 20 mA 2 2 4D 32 mA 22 0 0 0 20 0 22 0 SNAP AIMA 32 4 20 mA 3 3 4D 32 mA 22 0 4 0 20 0 22 0 SNAP AIMV 4 150 150 mV 66 42 44 4 mV 165 0 150 0 150 0 165 0 SNAP AIMV 4 75 75 mV 68 44 44 4 mV 82 5 75 0 75 0 82 5 SNAP AIMV2 4 50 50 mV 9 9 45 4 mV 55 0 50 0 50 0 55 0 PAC Manager User s Guide Legacy Edition
39. File Edit Tools View Help olala xaje A Bl Main_Process Sle eit Yo units Sl Line 25 Preprocess 3 In the configuration tree right click the name of the I O unit on which you want to change Modbus float format and choose Configure from the pop up menu For a SNAP PAC S series controller if it does not already appear in the list add it as an I O unit of the type Generic OptoMMP Device Do not add any points 5 Configure 1 0 Units Name Type Port Line_1 SNAP E ETHER 10 192 5 Enabled Preprocess SNAP P ETHER 10 1925 Enabled 5 Modify Delete Import Copy 1 0 Points PID Loops Modules gt Events Scratch Pad gt Communications gt Communications Others button gt PAC Manager User s Guide Legacy Edition CONFIGURING MODBUS OPTIONS 4 Click the Communications button and choose Modbus from the pop up menu 5 Configure Modbus M Used MODBUS OxFFFF F039 0000 Modbus 32 bit Float Format Big Endian Cancel Advanced 5 Click to place a check mark in the Used box In the Value column click the value shown for float format Choose the format you want from the drop down list NOTE Word swapped is still Big Endian but places the most significant bit in the most significant register 6 When the value you want is shown click OK 7 Configure other optional functi
40. Mask TCP IP Default Gateway TCP IP Name Server Secondary MAC Address Secondary TCP IP Address Secondary TCP IP Subnet Mask PUC Received 0 0 R1 0o l R8 0a 01 02 2007 16 42 13 0x0000007C SNAP PAC 51 ll 22 2005 33554432 00 A0 3D 00 9D EA 10 192 56 241 255 255 192 0 Keep this window open on your screen when you call Product Support NOTE Because the Status Read area is used for both standalone controllers and I O units some items apply to some devices and not others The following items do not apply to standalone controllers Degrees F C PID Loops Comm Watchdog Time msec Smart Modules Present Scanner Flags Arcnet data Digital Scan Counter Digital resets and failures since powerup Analog Scan Counter The following items do not apply to E1 and E2 brain boards Scanner Flags Ethernet Errors Digital Scan Counter Smart Modules Present Analog Scan Counter PID Loops Milliseconds Since Powerup Arcnet data TCP Settings Ethernet Digital Resets Failures since Powerup For help in interpreting Status Read data see page 148 PAC Manager User s Guide Legacy Edition PAE USING PAC MANAGER TO TROUBLESHOOT PROBLEMS TCP Settings Does not apply to E1 and E2 I O units Retransmit timeout RTO refers to the length of time the controller or I O unit waits while communicating before timing out The RTO is determined by the controller or brain s TCP IP stack and the stack continually r
41. O Unit on page 67 Standalone SNAP PAC S Series Controller 1 In the PAC Manager main window click the Inspect button al 114 PAC Manager User s Guide Legacy Edition CHAPTER 3 CONFIGURING OPTIONAL FUNCTIONS The Inspect window opens Z Inspect 1 0 Unit IP Address 10 192 56 241 v Port 2001 Timeout f 000 ms Status Status Read area last read at 01 30 07 12 34 17 r Status Read Status Read Status Write Point Config Digital Bank Digital Point Analog Bank Analog Point High Density System gt Scratch Pad gt DataLog gt PID Events gt Communications gt Other gt DESCRIPTION Powerup Clear Flag PUC Needed Busy Flag Loader Version Memory Map Version Firmware Version Firmware Version Date Firmware Version Time Unit Type Unit Description I 0 Unit Hardware Revision Month I O Unit Hardware Revision Day I 0 Unit Hardware Revision Year Installed Ram MAC Address TCP IP Address TCP IP Subnet Mask TCP IP Default Gateway TCP IP Name Server Secondary MAC Address Secondary TCP IP Address Secondary TCP IP Subnet Mask PUC Received 0 0 RL 0o l R6 0a 01 02 2007 16 42 13 0x0000007C SNAP PAC 51 218 22 2005 33554432 00 A0 3D 00 9D EA 10 192 56 241 255 255 192 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 A 0 3D 00 9D EB 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 20 0 If you have used the Inspect window before the last IP address you used is shown and current Sta
42. Opto 22 device such as SNMP below You can require a password for using FTP see page 77 In addition you can protect a PAC Control strategy so that it runs without possibility of interference from a host page 77 Limiting Access to Specific Computers You can limit access to the SNAP controller or I O unit based on the IP address of the computer or other host device attempting to communicate with it You specify the IP addresses that may access the controller or I O unit Anyone on a computer or other host device with an acceptable IP address has access Work with your network administrator to make sure you are specifying the correct IP addresses See Configuring Security on an I O Unit on page 77 or Configuring Security on a Standalone Controller on page 80 for instructions Limiting Access to Specific Protocols You can also limit access to specific protocols the SNAP controller or I O unit uses These protocols can travel simultaneously over the Ethernet TCP IP link and set up sessions or ports on the SNAP device e File transfer protocol FTP used for exchanging files between the device and a computer applies to SNAP PAC R series and S series and SNAP Ultimate I O units only e Modbus TCP protocol used by Modbus TCP software and hardware OptoMMP the IEEE 1394 based memory map protocol used by most other tools for interfacing with the SNAP device Simple network management protocol SNMP used to co
43. SNAP M series rack SNAP M16 SNAP M64 SNAP UP1 M64 etc SNAP ENET S64 SNAP B series rack SNAP B4M SNAP B8MC SNAP UP1 ADS see page 155 SNAP B12MC P SNAP B16M etc SNAP B3000 ENET SNAP ENET RTC SNAP D64RS rack SNAP UP1 D64 see page 155 SNAP ENET D64 Racks for G4 G1 or Quad Pak digital modules E1 see page 157 Racks for G1 analog modules E2 see page 157 PAC Manager User s Guide Legacy Edition REFERENCING I O POINTS SNAP PAC Racks SNAP PAC R1 SNAP PAC RCK4 or SNAP M16 SNAP PAC R2 SNAP PAC RCK8 or SNAP M32 SNAP PAC EB1 SNAP PAC RCK12 or SNAP M48 SNAP PAC EB2 SNAP PAC RCK16 or SNAP M64 SNAP ENET S64 SNAP UP1 M64 SNAP PAC mounting racks can hold up to 4 8 12 or 16 Opto 22 SNAP I O modules Point features and modules supported vary by processor see the processor s data sheet for specifications Each module contains 1 to 32 points channels depending on the module Examples of modules are shown in the following diagram NOTE Module support functions and positions vary by processor Module position 0 4 ch digital Points 3 2 1 0 Module position 6 high density digital ass Points 31 lt ___ 0 1 Module position 8 analog Points 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 t Module position 12 analog Points 1 0 Module position 14 serial Ports PAC Manager User s Guide Legacy Edition CH
44. TCP IP Address Secondary TCP IP Subnet Mask Secondary TCP IP Default Gateway Secondary TCP IP Name Server PUC Received 0 p 0 Rl la R8 0a 06708 2006 09 24 43 0x00000074 SNAP PAC R1L 1 24 2006 16777216 00 40 3D 00 DB 4C 10 192 55 67 255 255 192 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 00 A40 3D 00 DB 4D 10 192 255 5 255 255 192 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Close Help To verify that the secondary IP address is also communicating make sure ENET2 is attached to the correct network On a PC on the same subnet as ENET2 open the PAC Manager Inspect window Enter the secondary IP address in the IP Address field and click Status Read The controller now shows the same information but through the secondary interface PAC Manager User s Guide Legacy Edition CREATING AN 1 0 UNIT CONFIGURATION FILE IP address for secondary interface Primary IP address 3 Inspect 1 0 Unit IP Address 10 192 255 5 r Status Read Status Read z OxFFFF F030 0004 __ StatusWrte OxFFFF F030 0008 Point Config loxerFF FO30 0016 Digital Bank OXFFFF F030 0000 OxFFFF F030 001C Digital Poit 0xFFFF F030 ooa0 OxFFFF F030 0080 Analog Bank Analog Point OxFFFF F030 0020 OxFFFF F030 0080 High Density OxFFFF F030 0024 OxFFFF F030 0025 System gt ScratchPad gt DataLog gt OxFFFF F030 0026 OxFFFF F030 0028 OxFFFF F030 002E OxFFFF F030 0034 information Secondary IP address information
45. Tools Change IP Settings 5 Change IP Settings Current IP Address Read Current Settinas Pott 2001 Timeout msec fi 0000 New IP Address Change IP Settings Subnet Mask Gateway Address DNS Address g 196 PAC Manager User s Guide Legacy Edition CHAPTER 6 MAINTAINING DEVICES 3 Inthe Current IP Address field type the IP address of the device whose address you want to view or change Click Read Current Settings to see the current subnet mask gateway address and DNS address 5 Change IP Settings Curent IP Address 10 192 50 34 Read Current Settings Pott 2001 Timeout msec ft 0000 New IP Address 23 A Subnet Mask 255 255 192 0 Gateway Address 0 0 0 0 DNS Address 0 0 0 0 4 Ifyou want to change the IP address subnet mask or other addresses enter the new numbers Make sure you have typed everything correctly When everything is correct click Change IP Settings After you confirm the change a message appears stating that the change was successful and that the device will restart Restarting may take 10 to 20 seconds to complete When you see the following indicator the device is ready for use with its new address The SNAP PAC S1 s or SNAP PAC R1 s STAT LED shows solid green or solid orange when viewed from the top green means a strategy is running orange means no strategy is running The SNAP PAC EB1 s or SNAP PAC EB2 s ST
46. User s Guide Legacy Edition ey MAINTAINING FILES PAC Manager User s Guide Legacy Edition Troubleshooting Introduction If you are having difficulty using PAC Manager here are some suggestions that may help In addition make sure to check the Troubleshooting section in the device s user s guide If you cannot find the answers you need in these guides contact Opto 22 Product Support Contact information is on page 3 PAC Manager Error Messages When you send configurations to I O units in PAC Manager you may see the following messages in the lower part of the Send Configuration to I O Unit dialog box Could not open I O unit IP address or Timeout error Check basic communication with the An error occurred while connecting to I O Unit device See the Troubleshooting appendix in the device s IP address user guide for help number points successfully configured Success message Could not configure digital module number point number Check the point to make sure it s correct for the module type installed Could not configure analog module number point number Module name exists at position number but was Check configuration an analog module is at this position not configured but no points have been configured on it yet Could not configure temperature These configurations apply to the I O unit as a whole not to individual points Contact Product Support for help C
47. Watchdog Time 1 0 units only Changes settings for the whole 1 0 unit TCP settings All devices except E1 and E2 CAUTION Before changing TCP settings see page 214 Max Digital and Analog Scantimes PAC R UIO EIO and SIO only Default for each is 1000 msec You can increase the scan time to make sure the scanner isn t slowed or stopped by heavy communication on the network This is not a problem for E1s and E2s because they scan differently You can also shut down the scanner immediately by changing its scantime value to 1 does not require restarting the I O unit Note that scantime changes revert to default values when power is lost unless you save to flash Scanner Flags To change the way scanners work or stop start the control engine enter one or a combination of the following values in hex PAC R UIO EIO and SIO only To process alarms in the digital scanner rather than the analog scanner enter 1 PACR UIO EIO and SIO only To disable the analog scanner enter 2 PACR UIO EIO and SIO only To disable the digital scanner enter 4 PAC Manager User s Guide Legacy Edition 5 CHAPTER 5 READING AND WRITING TO SPECIFIC DEVICES PACS PAC R and UIO only To stop the PAC Control engine runtime enter 8 For example if you have a SNAP PAC R1 1 0 unit with digital I O only and are not using a PAC Control strategy you can get faster reactions to events by entering 1 2 8 which wou
48. a button in the Write Area The change is immediately sent to the I O unit and the window is updated PAC Manager User s Guide Legacy Edition READING AND WRITING TO POINTS Reading and Writing to Analog Points Analog Input Points This example shows an analog input point Module position numbers are shown near the top of the page with the point numbers for each module listed just below the position number For more on locating modules and points see Referencing 1 0 Points on page 153 5 Inspect 1 0 Unit IP Address 10 192 55 67 Port 2001 Timeout 1000 ms Status Analog Point area last read at 10 12 06 15 57 21 Analog Point Status Read Step 1 Choose a module Module position number Status Write j 3 10 11 12 13 14 15 Type Alv 0x23 R 7 Point Confi Step 2 Choose a point on the selected module Point numbers for this Poit Cong Paint eee peer ee module Point 0 is currently __DistelBank Name igital Poi Read Ai being read here Digtal Pore penen Analog Bank Address Description Value Refresh ne OxFFFF F026 1000 Scaled Units 0 000 j nalog Point OxFFFF F026 1004 Counts 1 000 Click the Refresh button to z OxFFFF F026 1008 Min Value Scaled Units 0 001 update values HighDensity OxFFFF F026 100C Max Value Scaled Units 0 001 System Write Area Scratch Pad gt j Clear Offset and Gain __Datalog gt J Min Value OxFO1D 4300 Step 1 Set the ca
49. additional configuration required for them in the PAC Manager Inspect window make sure the IP address shown is the correct one Then click the Status Write button in the upper left part of the window 15 In the Operation Commands list highlight Store configuration to flash 5 Inspect 1 0 Unit IP Address 10 192 55 67 Port 2001 Timeout 1000 r Status Write Status Read OxFFFF F038 0004 s OxFFFF F038 0008 __ Point Config oFFFF F038 omo Digital Bank OxFFFF F038 0014 2 OxFFFF F038 0018 Always BootP DHCP On Powerup Degrees F C Comm Watchdog Time msec 0 Disable TCP Minimum Retransmission Timeout msec TCP Initial Retransmission Timeout msec TCP Retransmission Attempts TCP Idle Session Timeout msec 0 Disable Max Digital Scantime msec OxFFFF F038 001C OxFFFF F038 0020 Analog Bank OxFFFF F038 004C Analog Point High Density System gt Scratch Pad gt DataLog PID gt Events gt Communications gt Other gt OxFFFF F038 0050 Max Analog Scantime msec OxFFFF F038 0054 Scanner Flags OxFFFF FFFF F050 Secondary IP Address OxFFFF FFFF F058 Secondary Subnet Mask Operation Commands None Send Command Send powerup clear r Reset to defaults and Restart 1 0 Unit Store configuration to flash Erase configuration from flash Restart 1 0 Unit from powerup Switch to loader mode Clear digital event configuration Clear alarm configuration Clear PPP configu
50. analog point 42 adding digital point 39 adding 1 0 unit 36 copying 60 creating 33 217 creating from a PAC Control strategy 35 custom scaling 45 loading to brain 67 moving 0 point 59 configuration clearing 189 configuring alarm events and reactions 133 alarms 134 communications port 113 copying 0 configuration 34 data logging 82 data streaming 98 date and time 111 digital event reactions 128 email 93 event messages 86 event reactions 126 0 32 158 1 0 unit 36 mistic I O units 10 PID loops 61 166 PID modules 57 PPP 117 Profibus modules 53 165 Scratch Pad 95 security 76 serial event reactions 136 serial modules 48 165 serial ports on brain or controller 113 SNMP 90 timed reactions to events 138 timer 138 Wiegand event reactions 136 Wiegand modules 55 165 control engine port changing 77 79 controller assigning IP address 10 changing IP address 195 control engine port 77 restarting 186 converting IEEE float 193 copying 0 configuration 34 memory map data 103 PAC Manager User s Guide Legacy Edition counter description 68 71 quadrature 71 D data copying from memory map 103 formatting and interpreting 190 IEEE float format 193 streaming 86 98 data format 2 channel analog modules 193 digital bank counters 191 digital point 192 IEEE float 193 mask 190 data logging accessing data 84 clearing data log
51. assistance in using an O unit or controller it is helpful to have device and firmware information at hand before you call us 1 Choose Start Programs Opto 22 PAC Project Software gt PAC Manager 2 In the PAC Manager main window click the Inspect button Ql 3 In the IP Address field type the IP address of the device Click Status Read PAC Manager User s Guide Legacy Edition CHAPTER 7 TROUBLESHOOTING This example shows a SNAP PAC S1 other devices are similar 3 Inspect 1 0 Unit IP Address 10 192 56 241 x Port 2001 Timeout 1000 ms Status Status Read area last read at 02 01 07 17 08 29 gt Status Read Status Write Point Contig Digital Bank Digital Point Analog Bank Analog Point High Density System gt Scratch Pad gt DataLog gt PID gt Events gt Communications gt Other gt OxFFFF F030 OxFFFF F030 OxFFFF F030 OxFFFF F030 OxFFFF F030 OxFFFF F030 OxFFFF F030 OxFFFF F030 OxFFFF F030 OxFFFF F030 OxFFFF F030 OxFFFF F030 OxFFFF F030 OxFFFF F030 OxFFFF F030 OxFFFF F030 OxFFFF F030 DESCRIPTION Powerup Clear Flag PUC Needed Busy Flag Loader Version Memory Map Version Firmware Version Firmware Version Date Firmware Version Time Unit Type Unit Description I O Unit Hardware Revision Month I 0 Unit Hardware Revision Day I O Unit Hardware Revision Year Installed Ram MAC Address TCP IP Address TCP IP Subnet
52. cc ccxaneeorenaetadadanauceodensmendosauans 124 Types of Events Alarms and Reactions 0 00 cece eee e eee ce cece eset tease enna 125 Configuring Digital Events and REAONS s 1 45rd deneaanngearieOmnareuaeaeeam tied acaeda 128 Digital Point and Scratch Pad MASKS 6 2 ssavdewadsakveedsbaxswewkdsakweadeaxeweukw sans 128 How Digital Events Trigger Reactions 421 kansas peuouchorsiunssovatoussersivaceroadious 129 Example Digital Event Reaction nnana anunue nere rererere erreren rreren 129 Configuring Alarms and Reactions 5 cn a lt drcaipnaddaceacsnedatsaaiiaedriaetindasaanietseecniad 133 HOW Alarms Trigger REACTIONS einni iiaia iena e a a 134 Example Alarms Event Reaction ns venadsenddendavanseeds cesta eadaventeedsveeneetavons 134 Configuring Serial or Wiegand Events and Reactions 00 00 c cece cece cece seen ees 136 Configuring Timed Events and Reactions n iia diiaeriiqadae Mcrae 138 Configuring Event MESSAGES kersies ainne aaaea EEEE EEEO EAEEREN 140 Chapter 5 Reading and Writing to Specific Devices 004 145 NI WOMUCTION eseina dadcd erin E A 145 Reading Basic Device Information ciate Sedeians bodduindeGaduyustiiaduendebadunbidusadwanes 146 Iiterpreting status Dala cuss fa screscencavtonwed indore nr intonato EEEE EOE AES 148 Changing Status Data ecieca etee acs ches cater a eat eae cane cena tan E nena 151 Referencing I O POIN tss satiate eesth awe nde anid oes ae aloe aw ead EEES 153 SNAP PA
53. enable the watchdog and enter the value that the output point should be set to if the watchdog is tripped 160 PAC Manager User s Guide Legacy Edition CHAPTER 5 READING AND WRITING TO SPECIFIC DEVICES d Analog points only To set offset and gain for the point manually enter values in those fields To have the processor compute offset and gain see Reading and Writing to Analog Points on page 172 e Analog points only Set upper and lower scaled units filter weight and upper and lower clamps as necessary For help see Using I O Point Features on page 68 5 When all lines are correct click Apply to send the configuration to the I O unit All other points on the same module are automatically configured with the same features and the same point name 6 Click another point on the same module and change its point name and features as necessary 7 Repeat steps for each module you need to configure To save configuration to flash memory see Saving to an 1 0 Unit s Flash Memory on page 185 PAC R Point Type Configuration Tables The following tables help you configure points by showing the part number the point type in decimal and in hex and the module type in hex module type is read only For analog modules tables also include the number of points per module the unit of measurement for the module and its range Digital Input and Output Modules page 161 Analog Input Modules page 162 Analog Outp
54. event data see these sections Event messages page 140 Serial events page 136 Alarm events page 133 Timers page 138 Digital events page 128 Wiegand events page 136 184 PAC Manager User s Guide Legacy Edition CHAPTER 5 READING AND WRITING TO SPECIFIC DEVICES Reading or Changing Communications and Other Data Other data on the I O unit or standalone controller can also be read and changed using PAC Manager s Inspect window The following table shows where to find the data in the Inspect window and references page numbers in this guide for information to help you understand what you are reading or how to change it Security Communications Network Security page 76 PPP Communications PPP page 117 Streaming Communications gt Streaming page 98 Email CommunicationsE mail page 93 Modbus Communications Modbus page 106 SNMP Agent Communications gt SNMP page 90 Serialports ori brain Communications Communication Port Control page 113 or controller In addition you can read or write to any memory map address by clicking Other gt Generic Read Write See the memory map appendix in the OptoMMP Protocol Guide form 1465 to make certain you have the correct address before making any changes Writing Commands to the Device Using Hardware Commands CAUTION Hardware commands directly affect the operation or configuration of the device Be careful when you use them as they cannot be undone Sa
55. from the drop down list Click Digital Point or Analog Point depending on the type of point you want to read or write to Continue with the next section for digital points or see page 172 for analog points PAC Manager User s Guide Legacy Edition 169 READING AND WRITING TO POINTS Module position number Point numbers for this Reading and Writing to Digital Points NOTE For points on high density digital modules you can read or write to individual points using the steps in this section To read or write to all points at one time see Reading and Writing to SNAP High Density Digital Points on page 177 Digital Input Points Here s an example showing a digital input point Module position numbers are shown near the top of the page with the point numbers for each module listed just below the position number For more information on locating modules and points see Referencing I O Points on page 153 5 Inspect 1 0 Unit IP Address ft 0 192 55 67 x Port 2001 Timeout 1000 ms Status Digital Point area last read at 10 11 06 14 57 56 Digital Point Status Read Step 1 Choose a module SEAE i 3 10 11 12 13 14 15 Type Dig none 0x00 module Point zero is currently being read here To update values click the Refresh button Since point 0 is an input point you can turn counting on and off or clear counters and latches P 3 Step 2 Choose a point on the selected module E Point
56. future reference write the IP address next to the MAC address on the white sticker provided on the device 12 Repeat steps 6 through 11 for any other devices in the list that you are responsible for 13 To save the list of IP address and MAC address mappings the lower list in the dialog box for future reference click the Save List button Navigate to the folder where you want to save the file enter a filename and click Save The address information is saved You can load this information into PAC Manager later if you need to see it 14 For a SNAP PAC R series controller to assign a secondary IP address see page 28 Then continue with Creating an O Unit Configuration File on page 32 15 For a SNAP PAC EB SNAP Ultimate SNAP Ethernet or SNAP Simple I O unit continue with Creating an I O Unit Configuration File on page 32 16 For a SNAP PAC S series controller choose from the following Toset up security see page 76 SNAP PAC only To assign a secondary IP address see page 28 Tocreate PAC Control strategies to run on the controller see the PAC Control User s Guide and the PAC Control Command Reference Information on peer to peer communication using the Scratch Pad area of the controller can be found in Communication Commands in Chapter 10 of the PAC Control User s Guide To work with the controller s file system and FTP see page 202 z Assigning IP Addresses to E1 and E2 I O Units
57. in the lower section 5 Assign IP Address Units Requesting IP Addresses MAC Address IPAddress Subnet Mask Assign All Set All Static IP MAC To IP Address Mappings MAC Address IP Address SubnetMask Hostname Gateway Address DNS Address 00 a0 3d 00 d4 eb 10 192 54 37 255 255 192 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 00 a0 3d 00 9d d3 10 192 56 230 255 255 192 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 00 a0 3d 00 d5 ed 10 192 55 110 255 255 192 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 00 a0 3d 00 c1 48 10 192 54 115 255 255 192 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 00 a0 3d 00 c1 40 10 192 54 70 255 255 192 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 00 a0 3d 00 c7 22 10 192 54 156 255 255 192 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 00 a0 34 00 3d c5 10 192 56 229 255 255 192 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Sieu Load List 8 Double check the addresses If one is incorrect click it to highlight it click Modify and make the necessary changes 9 To save the mapping file click Save List In the Save dialog box navigate to the folder where you want to place the file enter a filename and click Save If you later want to change the mapping map file or assign IP addresses from it you can open it in PAC Manager or Notepad 10 Continue with the next section to assign the addresses PAC Manager User s Guide Legacy Edition CHAPTER 2 CONFIGURING DEVICES Assigning Addresses from the Map File NOTE BootP and DHCP broadcasts cannot get through a firewall in the PC where PAC Manager is running Make sure any firewall in the computer suc
58. memory in a SNAP PAC or SNAP Ultimate controller firmware version 5 0 and newer includes a substantial area available for file storage as shown below SNAP PAC S1 2 5 MB SNAP PAC R1 SNAP PAC R2 20MB SNAP PAC EB1 SNAP PAC EB2 20MB SNAP Ultimate 2 0 MB Any types of files can be stored in this area and files can be sorted into directories or folders just as they can on a PC These stored files are then available for use within a PAC Control strategy or an application you develop For example the SNAP device can read the files add data to them and even send data from them via FTP to another device on the network For information on using PAC Control strategy logic to create and manage files on the SNAP controller or I O unit see Communication Commands in Chapter 10 of the PAC Control User s Guide Opto 22 form 1700 There are several ways to manage files You can use FTP software or even Windows Explorer to move files to and from the device via FTP and you can use PAC Manager to move and manage files on the device Here are some additional details e PAC Control lets you programmatically work with the SNAP controller or 1 0 unit s file system within your control strategy You can create files and folders on the device and write to add data to or read them receive file data via FTP send all or part of the data ina file via FTP and more PAC Control works with one I O unit at a time A PAC Control strat
59. mini mum and maximum temperatures You can also reset min max values For example if you want to record the maximum temperature at point 2 in each 24 hour period you must reset the values after they are read each day page 73 Thermocouple linearization analog input The I O unit automatically converts the thermocouple junction s millivolt values into temperature values so you don t have to Choose the appropriate module and make sure you configure the point as the correct ther mocouple type E K etc for your purpose Offset and gain analog input Offset and gain calculations are used to calibrate analog points If a 50 mV to 50 mV input receives signals that are slightly off not exactly 50 mV at the lowest point for example the offset and gain can be cal culated so that values will appear accurately when read page 73 Clamping analog output Clamping limits values that can be sent to analog output points so they do not go above or below a specific value For example if you are using a 0 10 VDC output module but the device attached to one of its points can only handle a maximum of 5 VDC you can set an upper clamp of 5 VDC for that point The values for upper and lower clamp are set in engineering units page 73 PID loop control analog points Proportional integral derivative PID loops are used to drive an input toward a particular value the setpoint and keep the input very clos
60. new values are Value column entered click Apply 3 Inspect 1 0 Unit IP Address fi 0 192 55 67 x Port 2001 Timeout 1000 ms Status Scratch Pad Integers area last read at 10 11 08 16 37 00 Scratch Pad Integers Status Read Status Write Apply Address Vaue o OxFFFF FOD8 1000 Appl Point Config OxFFFF FOD8 1004 0 ew DxFFFF FOD8 1008 Digital Bank OxFFFF FOD8 100C Clear All ae OsFFFF FOD8 1010 Digital Point Era OsFFFF FODS 1014 Select Al_ Analog Bank OxFFFF FOD8 1018 Unsde amp Al Analog Point DxFFFF F0D8 101C OsFFFF FOD8 1020 High Density OsFFFF FOD8 1024 OsFFFF FOD8 1028 Sm gt OsFFFF FOD8 102C Scratch Pad gt OsFFFF FOD8 1030 OsFFFF FOD8 1034 Datalog gt OsFFFF FODS 1038 PID gt OxFFFF FODS 103C OKFFFF FODS 1040 Eves gt OxFFFF FOD8 1044 Communications gt OxFFFF FODS 1048 OxFFFF FODS 104C he gt OxFFFF FOD8 1050 OxFFFF FODS 1054 OxFFFF FODS 1058 The Select All and Unselect All buttons control the check marks in the Apply column boxes The Clear All button puts all values at zero 1 To change a value in Scratch Pad integers floats or strings click the cell in the Value column and type the new value A checkmark appears in the Apply column box If you do not want to send a value click the box to uncheck it 2 Click the Apply button to write the new values to the Scratch Pad All the checked items are changed PAC Manager User s Guide Legacy Edition CHAPTER 5 RE
61. serial module 201 getting data about 212 oading to controller 197 oading to 1 0 unit 197 flash memory 68 clearing files 208 oading files from 208 saving configuration data to 67 185 saving file system files 208 float format 192 IEEE 193 Modbus 106 flow control 50 format IEEE float 193 Modbus float 106 of counter data 191 of data 190 of data for 2 channel analog modules 193 of digital point data 192 FTP client software comparison 202 default port 76 limiting access to 76 login 77 password 77 reading filenames 207 sending files to and from I O unit or controller 202 G gain 47 73 definition 69 gateway address 14 19 21 hardware getting data about 212 help Product Support 3 PAC Manager User s Guide Legacy Edition QA troubleshooting 211 high limit alarm 134 high density digital modules reading or writing to points 177 host communication disabling 77 host name 11 I O modules configuring analog and digital 32 configuring serial modules 48 viewing 158 0 poin clearing configuration 189 configuring 39 158 features 5 68 logging data 82 mirroring 101 reading 169 reset points to defaults 187 writing to 169 1 0 racks 154 0 unit adding 36 changing IP address 195 clearing files from flash memory 208 copying between configuration files 60 deleting file 208 file system 202 getting files via FTP 206 hardware commands 185 loading
62. the MAC Address device assigned at the Opto 22 factory MAC addresses for all Opto 22 devices start with 00 A0 3D TCP IP Address TCP IP Subnet Mask TCP IP Default Gateway IP address subnet mask and default gateway for the device on the Ethernet network You assign these numbers see page 10 TCP IP Name Server Not currently used leave at 0 0 0 0 Secondary MAC Address SNAP PAC controllers only Unique hardware Media Access Con trol MAC identifier for the second Ethernet interface on the device Secondary TCP IP Address Secondary TCP IP Subnet Mask Secondary TCP IP Default Gateway IP address subnet mask and default gateway for the second Ether net interface on the device You assign these numbers see page 10 Secondary TCP IP Name Server Not currently used leave at 0 0 0 0 PAC Manager User s Guide Legacy Edition CHAPTER 5 READING AND WRITING TO SPECIFIC DEVICES Host Name E1 and E2 only The device s current host name See E1 and E2 brain boards on page 11 for more information on host names Domain Name E1 and E2 only If you are using host names the domain name for the device See E1 and E2 brain boards on page 11 Previous Command Error Code Previous Command Error Address Previous Command Source Address Previous Command Transaction Label Significant if you are writing your own applications for an I O unit See
63. the I O unit is displayed in the window 3 Inspect 1 0 Unit IP Address f 0 192 55 67 Port 2001 Timeout 1000 ms Status Serial Module area last read at 10 09 06 10 48 24 r Serial Modules Status Read Status Write Paint Config Digital Bank Digital Point Analog Bank Analog Point High Density System gt Scratch Pad gt DataLog gt PID Events gt Communications gt Other OxFFFF FOCO 0000 OxFFFF F034 7F00 OxFFFF FO34 7F02 OxFFFF F034 7FO6 OxFFFF F034 7FOA OxFFFF F034 8000 OxFFFF FOSA 8004 OxFFFF FOSA 8008 OxFFFF F034 8009 OxFFFF FO34 8004 OxFFFF F034 800C OxFFFF FOSA 8200 OxFFFF FOSA 8010 OxFFFF FOSA 8014 OxFFFF FOSA 8018 OxFFFF F034 8019 OxFFFF FO34 8014 OxFFFF FO34 801C OxFFFF FOSA 8210 Serial Module Number 0 v Module 0 is NOT a Serial Module MODULE INFORMATION Module Type Module Subtype Hardware Revision Date Loader Version Firmware Version PORTA IP Port Number Baud Rate Parity Data Bits Stop Bits Power up Test Message EOM Character List PORT B IP Port Number Baud Rate Parity Data Bits Stop Bits Power up Test Message Yes EOM Character List Ox OD040000 Close Help dee 3 Click the Serial Module Number drop down list and choose the module s position number on the rack to see the module s communication parameters To change a parameter click its value in the Value column and choose from the drop down list
64. the Inspect button Bl 3 Inthe IP Address field type the IP address of the controller or I O unit Click Status Read 4 Scroll down until you see these items Ethernet Errors Late Collisions Ethernet Errors Excessive Collisions Ethernet Errors Others PAC Manager User s Guide Legacy Edition 2 USING PAC MANAGER TO TROUBLESHOOT PROBLEMS 3 Inspect 1 0 Unit IP Address 10 192 55 67 z Port 2001 Timeout 1000 ms Status Status Read area last read at 10 11 06 12 29 17 E Status Read Status Write TCP Retransmits 5 TCP Idle Session Timeout msec 240000 g TCP Idle Session Timeout Count 0 Point Config Ethernet Errors Digital Bank Ethernet Errors Late Collisions 0 Ethernet Errors Excessive Collisions Digital Point Ethernet Errors Others 0 Analog Bank Smart Modules Present 0x000E a fanalog serial etc Analog Point PID Loops Available 32 High Density Arcnet Reconfigs Detected 2 System gt Arcnet Reconfigs Initiated by I 0 Unit 0 Arcnet Transmit Attempts Since Powerup 189029755 Scratch Pad gt Arcnet ACKs 189029742 Arcnet Timeouts 0 DataLog gt Arcnet Other node not found etc 13 PID gt Arcnet Timeout Value msec 1 Arcnet Receive Interrupts 189029739 Events gt Ethernet MAC Resets Since Powerup 0 Communications gt Dig Output Point Resets Since Powerup 0 Dig Interrupt Failures Since Powerup 0 Other gt Module 0 Times Discovered 0 All thr
65. the OptoMMP Protocol Guide Opto 22 form 1465 for error information Always BootP DHCP On Powerup Degrees F C A value of 0 the normal setting means the device sends a request a BootP or DHCP request for an IP address only if its IP address is 0 0 0 0 A value of 1 means the device sends a BootP or DHCP request every time it is turned on See page 10 for more informa tion Whether temperatures on the I O unit are handled in Farenheit or Celsius Set when you configure the I O unit page 36 Celsius is the default Comm Watchdog Time msec If the I O unit has a watchdog the watchdog timeout in millisec onds Set when you configure the I O unit page 36 Default is O no watchdog Scanner Flags Digital Scan Counter Shows scanner and control engine options Value can be any of the following or a combination of them in hex See Scanner Flags on page 152 for more information 1 Alarms are being processed in the digital scanner rather than the analog scanner 2 Analog scanner is disabled 4 Digital scanner is disabled 1 8 applies to all standalone and on the rack controllers PAC Con trol engine is stopped Shows the number of times the processor brain or on the rack con troller has scanned the digital points on the I O unit Can be used for benchmarking Analog Scan Counter 2 Shows the number of times the processor has scanned the analog points on the I O unit Can
66. the broadcast by using PAC Manager to assign a static IP address These devices must be given a fixed static IP address because you communicate with them using the IP address See steps on page 11 e E1 and E2 brain boards When installed and first turned on each E1 or E2 sends out a DHCP Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol broadcast requesting an IP address Any DHCP server on the network can respond and assign a dynamic IP address to the brain board In most cases you will need to change the E1 s or E2 s dynamic IP address to a static IP address You must give E1s and E2s static IP addresses if you are using PAC Project software PAC Control PAC Display OptoOPCServer or OptoDataLink the OptoMMP Communication Toolkit or the Optomux Driver Toolkit to communicate with them However if your application can communicate with E1s and E2s using host names and your E1s and E2s are on a network that has a DHCP server that automatically updates a DNS Dynamic Name Service server you do not have to assign a static IP address You will communicate with the brain board using its host name Whether you are using a dynamic or a static IP address for E1 and E2 brain boards see the steps on page 16 Assigning IP Addresses to SNAP PAC UIO EIO and SIO SNAP PACR series and S series controllers and SNAP PAC EB SNAP Ultimate SNAP Ethernet and SNAP Simple I O units must be assigned a unique static IP address If the network you re usin
67. the module in this 0 1 position on the rack The most significant byte is at the lowest address For module 0 point 0 for example you might receive the following data FFFF F040 0100 0001 0110 16 FFFF F040 0101 1011 1011 BB FFFF F040 0102 0001 1000 18 FFFF F040 0103 1000 0111 87 The 32 bit integer for this reading would be 16 BB 18 87 most significant byte at lowest address This hex figure correlates to the decimal value 381 360 263 PAC Manager User s Guide Legacy Edition 191 FORMATTING AND INTERPRETING DATA Remember that if you are processing this data using a Little Endian computer such as an Intel based PC you must convert the data from the Big Endian format in order to use it Little Endian format is the opposite of Big Endian Little Endian places the most significant byte at the highest address Digital Point Data 4 Channel Modules NOTE For high density digital modules see Mask Data on page 190 For consistency in starting addresses data for individual digital points has a length of four bytes However only the least significant bit contains the data you re looking for For example to read the state of point 0 on module 0 you would start with address FFFFFO800000 Data would be returned as follows To read this information Point 0 on Module 0 Point State Use these addresses FFFFF0800000 FFFFF0800001 FFFFF0800002 FFFFF0800
68. time reads and writes see Reading and Writing to the Scratch Pad Area on page 180 Scratch Pad bits are available for both standalone and on the rack controllers and for SNAP Ethernet I O units Controllers and Ultimate I O units usually use them in the same way as strings floats and integers they re just another data format but in Ethernet O units Scratch Pad bits are primarily used for tracking events and alarms PAc R Using Scratch Pad Bits for Events and Alarms When Scratch Pad bits are used to track events and alarms the 64 bits in the mask do not represent UIO EIO point numbers Instead they represent whatever you decide they should be For example you might decide that bit 1 in the Scratch Pad will indicate a temperature level in Vat 12 if the PAC Manager User s Guide Legacy Edition PAC R UIO EIO CHAPTER 4 SETTING UP EVENTS AND REACTIONS temperature reaches 48 C bit 1 is turned on Bit 2 might indicate the status of Pump A if the pump is off the bit is off ifthe pump is on the bit is on Because you can use Scratch Pad bits to keep track of digital and serial events and analog and digital alarms you can set up reactions based on a variety of digital analog and serial conditions In the example above you could set up a reaction that sends a stream packet if bit 1 is on and bit 2 is off Types of Events Alarms and Reactions NOTE Digital events and reactions are available for points
69. to a serial device choose Enabled from the drop down list Enter a mask representing the modules and ports to receive the message Information in Configuring Serial or Wiegand Events and Reactions on page 136 may be helpful PAC Manager User s Guide Legacy Edition 141 CONFIGURING EVENT MESSAGES 9 SNMP section To send an SNMP trap as the message change Disabled to Enabled Enter how often to send the trap 0 sends it only once Also enter the trap type determined by your SNMP management software If you are using SNMP with outgoing PPP and want the trap stored in the I O unit until the next communication set Priority to Low If you want the I O unit to immediately dial out and send the trap set Priority to High For information on SNMP see page 90 NOTE SNMP messages must be acknowledged You can do so in your application or in PAC Manager s Inspect window in the Message section change the State to Acknowledge and click Apply 10 Memmap Copy Destination section To copy memory map data complete this section using information from Copying Memory Map Data on page 103 11 When all fields are correct click Apply 12 Repeat from step 3 to configure additional event messages 13 For each type of message you configure make sure you also set up basic configuration Streaming page 98 Email page 93 Serial page 48 page 90 SNMP 14 When you have finished configuring all event messages and any
70. to all points on a high density digital module see page 177 1 In the PAC Manager main window click the Inspect button Ql 3 Inspect 1 0 Unit IP Address 10 192 55 67 Port 2001 Timeout 1000 ms Status Status Read area last read at 01 30 07 13 51 14 Status Read Status Write Point Contig Digital Bank Digital Point Analog Bank Analog Point High Density System gt Scratch Pad gt DataLog gt PID gt Events gt Communications gt Other Status Read OxFFFF F030 0004 OxFFFF F030 0008 OxFFFF F030 0018 OxFFFF F030 0000 OxFFFF F030 001C OxFFFF F030 0040 OxFFFF F030 OOBO OxFFFF F030 0020 OxFFFF F030 0080 OxFFFF F030 0024 OxFFFF F030 0025 OxFFFF F030 0026 OxFFFF F030 0028 OxFFFF F030 002E OxFFFF F030 0034 OxFFFF F030 0038 OxFFFF F030 003C OxFFFF F030 0040 OxFFFF FFFF F060 OxFFFF FFFF F050 OxFFFF FFFF F058 DESCRIPTION Powerup Clear Flag PUC Needed Busy Flag Loader Version Memory Map Version Firmware Version Firmware Version Date Firmware Version Time Unit Type Unit Description I 0 Unit Hardware Revision Month I 0 Unit Hardware Revision Day I O Unit Hardware Revision Year Installed Ram MAC Address TCP IP Address TCP IP Subnet Mask TCP IP Default Gateway TCP IP Name Server Secondary MAC Address Secondary TCP IP Address Secondary TCP IP Subnet Mask PUC Received 0 o Rl la if R8 0a 01 29 2007 10 45 25 ox00000074 SNAP PAC R1 1 24
71. turned on Is it correctly connected to the PC using a crossover cable or correctly connected to an Ethernet hub using a straight through cable Is the PC on the same subnet as the device See the PCS user s guide for networking information Does the device already have an IP address If you want to change the IP address you can do so using the instructions on page 195 Is the device booting to the loader rather than the firmware See its users guide for more information Does the PC have firewall software that blocks network broadcasts If so disable the software For Windows XP SP2 click Unblock at the Windows Security Alert naming PAC Manager Double click the MAC address of the device in the list CAUTION PAC Manager lists ALL Opto 22 devices sending BootP or DHCP broadcasts Assign IP addresses only to the ones you know are yours PAC Manager User s Guide Legacy Edition ASSIGNING AN IP ADDRESS The Mapping dialog box opens Add MAC To IP Mapping MAC Address 00 40 30 00 1 16 v IP Address E 0 0 Host Name Cancel 7 Enter the IP Address and the Subnet Mask for the device If it will be talking to a device on another subnet enter the Gateway router address If it will talk only on the local subnet leave the gateway address all zeros 0 0 0 0 Leave the DNS address at 0 0 0 0 and the Host Name field blank WARNING Each device on your network including computers routers controller
72. up menu E PAC Manager User s Guide Legacy Edition CHAPTER 5 READING AND WRITING TO SPECIFIC DEVICES Scratch Pad Bits The Scratch Pad bits window shows you the current state of the Scratch Pad bits as of the Status date and time and the current On and Off masks You can change any of these masks by clicking its cell in the Value column and typing in the new mask then clicking Apply Values are current as of the Status date and time Click Refresh to update values 5 Inspect 1 0 Unit IP Address 10 192 55 67 x Port 2001 Timeout 1000 ms Status Scratch Pad Bits area last read at 10 11 06 16 36 11 Scratch Pad Bits Status Read Stauswite Address Description ale DIRECT ACCESS i Apply Point Config OxFFFF FOD8 0000 Scratch Pad Bits Ox 00000000 00000000 MOMO ACCESS Digital Bank OxFFFF FOD8 0400 ON Mask Ox 00000000 00000000 OxFFFF F0D8 0408 OFF Mask Ox 00000000 00000000 Digital Point Analog Bank Analog Point High Density System gt Scratch Pad gt DataLog gt PID Events gt Communications gt Other Close Help PAC Manager User s Guide Legacy Edition 181 READING AND WRITING TO POINTS Scratch Pad Integers Floats and Strings Scratch Pad Integers is used as the example here but floats and strings are similar Current values are shown as of the Status date and time To update values click Refresh Change the value in the When all
73. 0 Click to put a check mark in the Used box Click the cell in the Value column to set initial values for either the bits in the Direct Access area or the MOMO masks in the MOMO Access area Click OK Scratch Pad Integers Floats or Strings Th an e Configure Scratch Pad Integers dialog box is shown as an example The dialog boxes for strings d floats are similar 5 Configure Scratch Pad Integers Select All OxFFFF FODS 1000 OxFFFF FOD8 1004 0 Unselect All OxFFFF FOD8 1008 Clear All o OxFFFF FODS 100C OxFFFF FODS 1010 OxFFFF FODS 1014 OxFFFF FODS 1018 OxFFFF FODS 101C OxFFFF FODS 1020 OxFFFF FODS 1024 OxFFFF FODS 1028 OxFFFF FODS 102C OxFFFF FOD8 1030 OxFFFF FODS 1034 OxFFFF FODS 1038 OxFFFF FODS 103C OxFFFF FODS 1040 Cancel ooococo coc cc cc cco coo oO PAC Manager User s Guide Legacy Edition CONFIGURING STREAMING 1 For each integer you want to use click to put a check mark in its box in the Used column Click the cell in the Value column and enter the initial value 2 Repeat for each integer When all integers have been set click OK Configuring Streaming Most communication involves the two step process of request and response A faster way of getting information from the I O unit however is by streaming data Streaming does not use TCP IP it uses the User Datagram Protocol UDP IP instead NOTE Because Modbus TCP runs on TCP not UDP streaming data via Modbus TCP is
74. 0 0018 OxFFFF F030 0000 OxFFFF F030 001C OxFFFF F030 0040 OxFFFF F030 0080 OxFFFF F030 0020 OxFFFF F030 0080 OxFFFF F030 0024 OxFFFF FO30 0025 OxFFFF F030 0026 OxFFFF F030 0028 OxFFFF F030 002E OxFFFF F030 0040 OxFFFF FFFF F060 OxFFFF FFFF F050 OxFFFF FFFF F058 Powerup Clear Flag PUC Needed Busy Flag Loader Version Memory Map Version Firmware Version Firmware Version Date Firmware Version Time Unit Type Unit Description I O Unit Hardware Revision Month I 0 Unit Hardware Revision Day I 0 Unit Hardware Revision Year Installed Ram MAC Address TCP IP Address TCP IP Subnet Mask TCP IP Default Gateway TCP IP Name Server Secondary MAC Address Secondary TCP IP Address Secondary TCP IP Subnet Mask Click to update data PUC Received 0 o Rl la E R8 0a 01 29 2007 10 45 25 0x0000007A SNAP PAC R1 24 2006 16777216 00 A0 3D 00 DB 4C 10 192 55 67 255 255 192 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 00 A0 3D 00 DB 4D 10 192 255 5 255 255 192 0 Scroll down to see all of the information Data is current as of the date and time shown in the Status field at the top right corner of the window Note that date and time are from the PC not from the I O unit To update data click the Refresh button See the next two pages for help in interpreting data PAC Manager User s Guide Legacy Edition READING BASIC DEVICE INFORMATION Interpreting Status Data The following table may help you inter
75. 0 MODULES AND POINTS The Configure 1 0 Points dialog box appears Configure 1 0 Points DER 120 Unit Freprocess Type SNAP PAC R1 analog digital Modules and Points Not Used Modify Delete Move To Expand All Collapse All Calibrate 2 Double click the number that represents the digital module s position on the rack For help see the diagrams starting on page 153 5 Add Module Digital Output Analog Input Analog Output Module SNAP IDCS5 10 32 VDC VAC SNAP IDC5 FAST 2 5 16 YDC SNAP IDC5 FAST A 18 32 VDC SNAP IDCS5D 2 5 28 VDC SNAP IDC5MA 10 32 VDCAVAC Man Auto Switch SNAP IDC5 SW Dry Contact Switch SNAP IDC5Q 4 24 VDC SNAP IDCS5G 35 75 VACAYDC SNAP IDC5 HT 15 32 VDC SNAP IDCS5 SW NC Dry Contact Switch SNAP IDC5FM 10 32 VDC SNAP IDCSDFM 2 5 28 VDC SNAP IDC 32 10 32 VDC Generic Digital Input SNAP IACS 90 140 VDC VAC SNAP IACSA 180 280 VDCAVAC SNAP IAC5MA 90 140 VDC AVAC Man Auto Switch SNAP AC5SFM 90 140 VDC AC SNAP IACSAFM 180 280 VDC AC 40 PAC Manager User s Guide Legacy Edition CHAPTER 2 CONFIGURING DEVICES 3 In the Add Module dialog box choose the module type and then the exact module part number from the lists Click OK 4 Back in the Configure I O Points dialog box click the plus sign next to the new module to expand it Notice that the module icon is color coded to reflect the t
76. 00 DB 4C 10 192 55 67 255 255 192 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 00 A40 3D 00 DB 4D 10 192 255 5 255 255 192 0 PAC Manager User s Guide Legacy Edition CONFIGURING 1 0 MODULES POINTS AND FEATURES 2 Module position number gt Poin module are shown gt Point zero is curren read here Since thi an analog point an values are grayed o To update values c numbers for this in yellow If you have used the Inspect button before the last IP address you used is shown and current Status Read information appears in the window The most recently used IP addresses are available in the drop down list In the IP Address field type the IP address of the I O unit or choose it from the drop down list Click Point Config 5 Inspect 1 0 Unit IP Address 10 192 55 67 Port 2001 Timeout 1000 ms Status Point Configuration area last read at 10 12 06 15 37 00 Point Configuration Status Read Step 1 Choose a module Status Write Module Mm 2 3 10 11 12 13 14 15 Type Dig none 0x00 Point Contig Step 2 Choose a point on the selected module 1 2 3 4 Type Digital Input 0x100 Digital Bank Feature None 0x00 Name ly being sis not alog ut ick the Refresh button To modify values change the parameters if appl and click Apply icable Digital Point Refresh Gees MM ALL POINTS 5 OxFFFF F010 0000 Module Type Dig none 0x00 Appl Analog Point OsFFFF FOI 00
77. 0000000 00000000 Ox 00000000 00000000 Ox FO400000 Yes N A 3 5 Cancel In the drop down list choose the Alarm Number you want to use by default it is the same number as the point the alarm will monitor Click Used The alarm number can be any unused number but it is best to use the point number since by default that point s memory map address and value are shown in the Value Being Alarmed field If you need to set two or more alarms on the same point however you can do so For additional alarms choose a different alarm number configure the alarm and enter the memory map address for the point in the Advanced Value Selection section A complete list of memory map addresses is in the OptoMMP Protocol Guide Find the section for the type of alarm you want to use deviation high or low In the Value column click the Enable Disable Alarm cell and choose Enabled from the drop down list Click in other cells to set deviation or alarm limits For high and low alarms also set the deadband for the limit A deadband is an allowable variation in the limit to account for signal noise If the signal fluctuates slightly the deadband limit keeps the 1 0 unit from sending out another alarm For each alarm also configure the reaction in two parts Scratch Pad bits that should be turned on Scratch Pad bits that should be turned off PAC Manager User s Guide Legacy Edition CONFIGURING SERIAL OR WIEGAND EVENTS A
78. 00001 mask door on OxFFFF FODO 0048 Digital OFF Ox 00000000 00000000 OxFFFF FODO 0060 Scratch Pad Bits ON Ox 00000000 00000000 mod 0 pt 0 is OxFFFF FODO 0068 Scratch Pad Bits OFF Ox 00000000 00000000 closed REACTION OxFFFF FODO 0050 Digital ON Ox 00000000 00000000 ee OxFFFF FODO 0058 _ Digital OFF Ox 00000000 00000020 Reaction Digital OxFFFF FOD0 0070 Scratch Pad Bits ON Ox 00000000 00000000 OFF mask turn OxFFFF FODO 0078 Scratch Pad Bits OFF Ox 00000000 00000000 off light at mod 0 pt 0 9 Click OK Both event reactions are configured 10 Configure other event reactions or return to the PAC Manager main window and click the Save button Hl to save the configuration file Configuring Alarms and Reactions PAC R EB UIO EIO A reaction can also be set up as a response to an alarm You can configure alarms for analog points or digital counters For example you could monitor the pressure in a tank and set up an alarm if it rises above a certain level or you could trigger an alarm when a specific number of boxes on a conveyor have passed through a beam sensor For each alarm you configure a suitable reaction For analog points alarms are based on the analog input value For digital points alarms are based on the counter value applies to points on 4 channel digital modules only For each point you can configure any or all of the following alarms e Deviation alarm sets a range on either side of the cur
79. 003 These bits 76543210 76543210 76543210 76543210 Contain this data binary 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000001 hex 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 l Ignore these bits Point state is ON Digital Point Data for E1s If you are using I O units with E1 brain boards remember that the memory map is based on a four point SNAP module For an E1 point data appears in the addresses that correspond to the fi of each group of four points in the memory map like this Nn ot Addresses for point state E1 module position FFFFFO800F00 FFFFFO800E00 FFFFFO800D00 FFFFFO800C00 oa A wo ye FFFFFO800B00 FFFFFO800A00 are are fo a FFFFFO800500 FFFFF0800400 Point number fo 0 0 FFFFF0800900 FFFFF0800800 0 oO fo oO w FFFFFO0800300 FFFFFO0800200 o FFFFFO800100 FFFFFO800000 Point data appears this way for all module types used with an E1 racks IEEE Float Data o o 5l l Xx olo 6 9 co S mc oe iw i we L ie L 7 6 0 0 G1 G 1 4 Quad Pak and integral For individual analog points values counts and minimum and maximum values for one point are located next to each other in the memory map All are four bytes and are IEEE 754 floats PAC Manager User s Guide Legacy Edition CHAPTER 5 READ
80. 04 Point Type Digital Input 0x100 pss High Density OsFFFF FOIOO008 Point Feature Ox 00000000 OxFFFF F010 0024 Watchdog Output Value 0 000 System gt OxFFFF F010 0028 Watchdog Enabled Disabled OxFFFF F010 0030 Point Name Scratch Pad gt ANALOG ONLY OxFFFF F010 000C Offset DataLog gt OxFFFF F010 0010 Gain OxFFFF F010 0014 Upper Scaled Units PID gt OxFFFF F010 0018 Lower Scaled Units 0 OxFFFF F010 0020 Filter Weight O disable 0 000 Events OxFFFF F010 008C Upper Clamp 0 000 E OxFFFF F010 0088 Lower Clamp 0 000 Communications gt pew Close Help Module position numbers are shown near the top of the page point numbers are shown below For more information on locating modules and points see Referencing 1 0 Points on page 153 Click the module position and the point number you want to view or configure Choose or enter the following as necessary for the point a Choose the point type from the drop down list For help see Point Type Configuration Tables on page 161 and Using 1 0 Point Features on page 68 b Configure digital input counters in the Point Feature field as shown below 0x00000000 Disables all digital point features 0x00000001 Enables and starts counter on digital input 0x00000004 Simple quadrature counter input requires SNAP quadrature input module 0x00000041 Quadrature counter input with index requires SNAP quadrature input module c For automatic reaction to analog or digital watchdogs
81. 09 14 31 38 04 F0A00300 28 412872 3 Point Config F3020014 2006 10 09 14 31 39 04 F0A00300 28 379028 Digital Bank F3020028 2006 10 09 14 31 40 04 F0A00300 28 345215 F302003C 2006 10 09 14 31 41 04 F0A00300 28 277527 Digital Point F3020050 2006 10 09 14 31 42 04 FOA00300 28 277527 F3020064 2006 10 09 14 31 43 05 F0A00300 28 226746 Analog Bank F3020078 2006 10 09 14 31 44 05 F0A00300 28 209839 Ree F302008C 2006 10 09 14 31 45 05 FOA00300 28 192932 eet F30200A0 2006 10 09 14 31 46 05 F0A00300 28 159088 pide F30200B4 2006 10 09 14 31 47 05 FOA00300 28 108307 System gt F30200C8 2006 10 09 14 31 46 05 F0A00300 28 125244 F30200DC 2006 10 09 14 31 49 05 FOA00300 28 074493 Scratch Pad gt F30200FO 2006 10 09 14 31 50 05 FOA00300 28 057556 F3020104 2006 10 09 14 31 51 05 F0A00300 28 057556 DataLog gt F3020118 2006 10 09 14 31 52 05 FOA00300 28 023712 PID gt F302012C 2006 10 09 14 31 53 05 FOA00300 28 006805 F3020140 2006 10 09 14 31 54 05 FOA00300 27 854523 Events gt F3020154 2006 10 09 14 31 55 05 FOA00300 27 922211 F3020168 2006 10 09 14 31 56 05 F0A00300 28 074493 Communications gt F302017C 2006 10 09 14 31 57 05 F0A00300 28 142151 Other F3020190 2006 10 09 14 31 58 05 F0A00300 28 209839 F3020144 2006 10 09 14 31 59 05 F0A00300 28 277527 EJ PAC Manager User s Guide Legacy Edition CHAPTER 3 CONFIGURING OPTIONAL FUNCTIONS The log includes the following information Add ess Address of the data i
82. 0c eee cece cece eee ee ene 212 Using PAC Manager to Troubleshoot Problems n n ununes 212 Getting Device and Firmware Information 0 0 00 00sec cece cece tence eee ene eens 212 TEP SEUINGS cnccehseheetehngehead cate E E OES 214 Checking Ethernet EMOS nesta ceed hes wales diaieah Aa cesge e a A salt E wie 215 WGK sc icuidetusidvedeletpieiiesedanbivianrideiesedinaiaceedsbedaness 217 PAC Manager User s Guide Legacy Edition Introduction About this Guide Welcome to PAC Manager the configuration and inspection tool for working with SNAP PAC SNAP Simple SNAP Ethernet and SNAP Ultimate I O units SNAP PAC controllers and E1 and E2 brain boards Products Covered This guide shows you how to configure and work with the following Opto 22 devices using the software tool PAC Manager e SNAP PAC S series controllers e SNAP PAC R series controllers e SNAP PAC EB brains SNAP Ultimate I O SNAP Ethernet I O e SNAP Simple I O e El and E2 units PAC Manager is on the CD that came with your hardware and it is also available for download from our website www opto22 com This Legacy Edition includes both SNAP PAC hardware and current hardware If you are using only SNAP PAC hardware use form 1704 the PAC Manager Users Guide instead of this guide NOTE PAC Manager is only for units that communicate using Ethernet To configure legacy mistic 1 0 units that communicate serially with a PAC Project con
83. 2001 Timeout 1000 ms Status Digital Point area last written and read at 10 11 06 15 22 10 r Digital Point Status Read Step 1 Choose a module StatusWite oaie 0 1 2 G74 8 6 rle 9 10 ni2 16 T5 Tye ODC32SRC EN Paint Config Step 2 Choose a point on the selected module Type Digital Output 0x180 __Point Conia Pot 0 1 2 aj 4 56 al 8 9 10MM 12 13 14 15 Peay Digital Bank 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 2 26 27 28 29 30 A Name Digital Point Read Area eee eeo vue _Revoan Current values for point 11 on this high density module Click the Refresh button to update values Change point state on an output point by clicking a button in the Write Area STATUS Analog Paint OxFFFF F180 80C0 Point State LATCHES High Density OxFFFFFI8080C8 On Latch OKFFFFF1808000 Off Latch System gt COUNTER OxFFFFF180932C Active Scratch Pad gt OxFFFFF180932C Data DataLog gt PID gt Write Area Everts gt Output State inter Site TumOn OxF180 COCO Counter On OxF180 3000 Communications gt Counter On Tum Off OxF180 COC8 Counter Off F180 9001 Click the point number you want to read or write to The current values for that point number appear in the Read Area The Status data at the top right corner of the window shows the date and time values were last read The Read Area and the Write Area change depending upon the point type To turn an output point on or off click
84. 2006 16777216 00 A0 3D 00 DB 4C 10 192 55 67 255 255 192 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 00 A0 3D 00 DB 4D 10 192 255 5 255 255 192 0 If you have used the Inspect button before the last IP address you used is shown and current Status Read information appears in the window The most recently used IP addresses are available in the drop down list 2 Inthe IP Address field type the IP address of the I O unit or choose it from the drop down list Click Digital Bank or Analog Bank PAC Manager User s Guide Legacy Edition CHAPTER 5 READING AND WRITING TO SPECIFIC DEVICES Digital Bank Window Values are current as of the Status date and time Click Refresh to update values 3 Inspect 1 0 Unit IP Address 1 0192 55 67 Port 2001 Timeout 1000 ms Status Digital Bank area last read at 10 11 06 16 10 54 r Digital Bank Read Status Read Status Write IBN ea State of Digital Points 0x00000000 00008001 Point Config State of On Latches oxo0000000 o0ooocco Digital Bank State of Off Latches Ox00000000 ooooocco Active Counters 0x00000000 00000001 Digital Point Analog Bank MODULE POINT COUNTER VALUE Analog Point OxFFFF F040 High Density OxFFFF F040 System gt Scratch Pad gt OxFFFF F040 DataLog gt OxFFFF F040 OxFFFF F040 FID OxFFFF F040 oi 1 OxFFFF F040 OxFFFF F040 Communications gt OxFFFF F040 OxFFFF F040 Other gt OxFFFF F040 OxFFFF F040 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 2 0 2 0 2 0 2 0 3
85. 21 2 Degrees C 50 0 50 0 1768 0 1768 0 SNAP AITM2 i Type S Thermocouple 23 17 21 2 Degrees C 50 0 50 0 1768 0 1768 0 SNAP AITM2 i Type T Thermocouple 18 12 21 2 Degrees C 270 0 270 0 400 0 400 0 SNAP AIV 10 10 VDC ia e e e VDC 11 0 10 0 10 0 11 0 SNAP AIV 5 5 VDC 11 BJ 12 2 VDC 5 5 5 0 5 0 5 5 SNAP AIV i 10 10 VDC 12 2 2 VDC 11 0 10 0 10 0 11 0 SNAP AIV i 5 5 VDC 11 By 23 2 VDC 5 5 5 0 5 0 5 5 SNAP AIV 4 10 10 VDC 12 C 41 4 VDC 11 0 10 0 10 0 11 0 SNAP AIV 4 5 5 VDC 11 BY 41 4 VDC 5 5 5 0 5 0 5 5 SNAP AIV 32 10 10 VDC 12 C 4E 32 VDC 11 0 10 0 10 0 11 0 SNAP AIV 32 5 5 VDC 11 B 4E 32 VDC 5 5 5 0 5 0 5 5 SNAP AIV2 i 100 100 VDC 72 48 24 2 VDC 110 0 100 0 100 0 110 0 SNAP AIV2 i 50 50 VDC 73 49 24 2 VDC 55 0 50 0 50 0 55 0 SNAP AIVRMS 0 250 VAC VDC 70 46 70 2 VAC VDC 0 0 0 0 250 0 275 0 SNAP AIVRMS i 0 250 VAC VDC 70 46 29 2 VAC VDC 0 0 0 0 250 0 275 0 SNAP AIR40K 4 0 to 40K Ohms 74 4A 43 4 Ohms 0 0 40000 0 44000 0 SNAP AIR40K 4 0 to 20K Ohms 75 4B 43 4 Ohms 0 0 20000 0 22000 0 SNAP AIR40K 4 0 to 10K Ohms 76 40 43 4 Ohms 0 0 10000 0 11000 0 SNAP AIR40K 4 0 to 5K Ohms 77 4D 43 4 Ohms 0 0 5000 0 5500 0 SNAP pH ORP 1 1 VDC 78 4E 25 2 VDC 1 1 1 0 1 0 1 1 SNAP pH ORP 0 14 pH 79 4F 25 2 pH 1 4 0 0 14 0 15 4 SNAP pH ORP 0 5 0 5 VDC 80 50 25 2 VDC 0 55
86. 55 192 0 N A 0 0 0 0 0 0 Discovered 00 40 3D 00 9E CC lt Unit has been permanently assigned an IP Address MAC To IP Address Mappings MAC Address IP Address Subnet Mask Hostname Gateway Address DNS Address 00 40 3D 00 E1 16 10 192 50 11 255 255 192 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Save List Load List Close NOTE Once a devices status becomes Assigned or Static you can no longer change its IP address information from this dialog box To change the address use Tools Change IP Settings See page 195 10 To verify that the IP address has been successfully assigned highlight the device in the upper list and click Test A DOS window opens and the IP address is automatically contacted using the PING program You should see a reply similar to the following cx C WINDOWS system32 cmd exe Pinging 16 192 56 with 32 bytes of data Reply from 16 192 time lt ims TTL 255 Reply from 14 192 z z time lt i TL 255 Reply from 16 192 z z time lt ims TTL 255 Reply from 16 192 z z time lt ims TTL 255 Ping statistics for 10 192 50 11 Packets Sent 4 Received 4 Lost 0x loss Approximate round trip times in milli seconds Minimum ms Maximum ms Average Gms Press any key to continue If you don t see a reply make sure the subnet mask you ve assigned matches the subnet mask on your PC PAC Manager User s Guide Legacy Edition ASSIGNING AN IP ADDRESS 11 For
87. 6 When all fields are correct click OK 7 Configure other optional functions or return to the PAC Manager main window and click the Save button al to save the configuration file When you are ready to upload the configuration file to the I O unit see Sending Configuration Data to the I O Unit on page 67 Copying Memory Map Data PAC R You can use memory map copying to do the following EB Copy data from one memory map location to another on the same I O unit EIO Copy data from a memory map location on one I O unit to a memory map location on another unit Copying Memory Map Data on the Same I O Unit You can copy the data in one memory map address to another address on the same O unit for example to write the value of an analog point to another analog point 1 Follow the steps in Configuring Event Messages on page 86 until you reach the Add Event Message dialog box PAC Manager User s Guide Legacy Edition COPYING MEMORY MAP DATA 5 Add Event Message 0 A Message Name B Message Text me Streaming 1 SNMP Trap Disabled a Period sec ji Disabled Ke E mail Period sec 0 Disabled X Period sec ji Trap Type i Serial Module Priority H gh Disabled v Serial Ports Mask Ox b C MemMap Copy Destination Disabled 7 MemMap Address Ox Period msec jo IP Address IP Port f 001 Cancel Help 2 Complete the fields as follows A Enter a descript
88. 85 configuring 82 183 values from memory map addresses 82 date and time configuring 111 reading 180 deadband 135 deleting configuration data from flash memory 68 file from 1 0 unit 208 deviation alarm 133 DHCP server 11 dial up networking 117 digital bank counter data format 191 reading 174 digital event reactions clearing 189 configuring 128 183 description 128 examples 129 trigger 129 digital point configuring 39 158 counter 68 71 data format 192 features 68 latching 68 70 on high density module 177 quadrature counter 69 71 reading 170 State 68 70 viewing data 158 watchdog 69 72 writing to 170 disable host communication 77 downloading see loading E edge trigger 134 email clearing configuration 189 configuring 93 185 message 86 error messages 211 Ethernet errors 215 event message configuring 86 183 plugins 89 event reaction 128 129 183 configuration steps table 126 configuring digital 128 configuring timer 138 delayed 138 Scratch Pad 124 serial 136 types 125 Wiegand 136 F features comparison chart for processors 5 file clearing from flash memory 208 deleting from file system 208 loading from flash memory to file system 208 reading filenames 207 sending from I O unit 206 sending to I O unit 204 file system on brain or controller 202 filter address 79 81 filter mask 79 81 filter weight 73 firmware for
89. AC Control counters are matically activated when configured automatic Using PAC Control digital point commands you can stop a counter if required and then start it again You can also clear a counter so it begins counting again from zero E1 Any digital input can be used as a counter Follow the steps in form 1576 O Configuration for E1 and E2 Brain Boards to configure counters before using them Quadrature Counters Digital Points I O units with the following I O processors support quadrature counters for quadrature encoder devices SNAP PAC R1 SNAP PAC EB1 SNAP UP1 ADS SNAP B3000 ENET SNAP ENET RTC A quadrature counter requires a SNAP quadrature input module which is attached to the encoder device The module sends a pulse to the processor upon each change in quadrature state and the processor counts the pulses and keeps track of the direction and rotation The counter counts up if quadrature Point A leads Point B it counts down if Point A lags behind Point B Each channel can have counts from 0 to 2 147 483 647 When you configure the points on the quadrature input module the quadrature counter feature is automatically included PAC Manager User s Guide Legacy Edition USING 1 0 POINT FEATURES Watchdog Digital and Analog Points You can set a watchdog on a memory mapped I O unit when configuring the I O unit Then when you configure a digital page 39 or analog page 42 output point
90. ADING AND WRITING TO SPECIFIC DEVICES Data Logging Data logging is normally configured in a configuration file see page 82 but you can change it in the Inspect window Remember that changes made here cannot be saved to a configuration file however To change configuration with the I O unit s IP address in the Inspect window click Data Log Data Logging Configure For help see the information in the steps on page 82 To read the data in a data log you have set up use PAC Manager s Inspect window See instructions on page 84 To clear all data from a data log see page 85 Reading or Changing PID Loops See the steps in Configuring Viewing or Changing PID Loops on page 166 Reading or Changing PID Module Settings PID module settings are normally configured in a configuration file see page 57 although you can also change them in the Inspect window To read or change settings on a PID module with the I O unit s IP address in the PAC Manager Inspect window click PID Module For help in making changes see the instructions on page 57 Reading or Changing Events and Event Messages Digital alarm serial timer and Wiegand events are normally configured in a configuration file Event messages are configured in a configuration file if you are using PAC Control otherwise they are configured in the Inspect window See Chapter 4 Setting Up Events and Reactions for configuration steps on all events and event message
91. AN 1 0 UNIT CONFIGURATION FILE Copying a Configuration to Another I O Unit If you have an Ethernet based I O unit that is exactly the configuration you want you can copy it directly to the flash memory of an I O unit This method does not create a configuration file but simply copies from one unit to another 1 If PAC Manager is not already open choose Start Programs gt Opto 22 PAC Project Software gt PAC Manager 2 In the PAC Manager main window choose Tools Import Copy O Unit 5 1 0 Unit Import Copy Image Source Existing 1 0 Unit Flash Memory Source area IP ddes 0 0 0 0 Pot 2001 Timeout 10000 Previously Saved 1 0 Unit Image File Image Destination Send Image To 1 0 Unit Flash Memory Destination area IP ddes 0 0 0 0 Pot 2001 Timeout 10000 C Save Tol O Unit Image File f 3 In the Source area of the dialog box choose an existing I O unit Enter its IP address and port Use the default of 2001 unless you have changed the port If necessary change the timeout 4 When the source is correct click Read The source is read and you see a confirmation box 5 Inthe Destination area of the dialog box choose Send Image To I O Unit Flash Memory Enter the IP address and port of the I O unit you want to copy the configuration to Use the default of 2001 unless you have changed the port Change the timeout if necessary CAUTION Make sure you have entered the correc
92. APTER 5 READING AND WRITING TO SPECIFIC DEVICES SNAP B Series Racks oe SNAP B8MC_ SNAP B8MC P SNAP UP1 ADS sNappip SNAP B12MC SNAP B12MC P SNAP B3000 ENET SNAP Big SNAP B16MC SNAP B16MC P SNAP ENET RTC NOTE SNAP B series racks and the processors compatible with them are not recommended for new development Use SNAP PAC racks and processors instead SNAP B series mounting racks can hold up to 4 8 12 or 16 Opto 22 SNAP I O modules Analog serial and high density digital modules digital modules with more than four points can be placed in any position For the larger racks 4 channel digital modules can be placed in positions 0 7 only Each module contains 1 to 32 points channels depending on the module Examples of modules are shown in the following diagram NOTE 4 channel digital modules can be placed in positions 0 7 only All other modules can be placed in any position Module position 0 4 ch digital Points 3 2 1 o Module position 6 high density digital Points 31 0 Module position 8 analog Points 3 2 1 0 Module position 12 analog Points Module position 14 serial Ports B A SNAP Digital Only Rack NOTE Digital only racks and processors are not recommended for new development Use SNAP PAC racks and processors instead The SNAP D64RS mounting rack is compatible with SNAP UP1 D64 and SNAP ENET D64 processors The rack h
93. AT LED shows solid green The SNAP Ethernet based brain s STD LED blinks twice The STAT LED on an E1 or E2 stops blinking and stays on Remember to write the IP address on the sticker or white area on the device Loading New Firmware All Ethernet based SNAP controllers and brains and SNAP serial communication modules contain firmware sometimes referred to as the kerne which is similar to an operating system If the firmware should become damaged or if a new version of the firmware is released you can load new firmware to the device using PAC Manager Loading Controller E1 E2 or SNAP Ultimate Brain Firmware These instructions apply to SNAP PAC controllers to E1 and E2 brain boards and to SNAP Ultimate brains that already have firmware version 5 0 or newer PAC Manager User s Guide Legacy Edition LOADING NEW FIRMWARE If your SNAP Ultimate brain has firmware older than version 5 0 or if you have a SNAP Ethernet or SNAP Simple I O brain see the brain user s guide for instructions 1 Make sure you have the following before beginning P address es of the controller s and or brain s that will receive the new firmware New firmware from our website at www opto22 com If you have any difficulty obtaining or loading new firmware contact Opto 22 Product Support Firmware files are named as follows E ieee SNAP PAC S1 contains S1 bin SNAP PAC R1 contains R1 bin SNA
94. Area OK Cancel Help _Sencel_ tee 5 Complete the fields as follows A To enable streaming choose Yes from the drop down list B O mirroring is a separate function It s generally not a good idea to use both streaming and mirroring on the same O unit See Mirroring I O Point Data on page 101 for more information C Enter how often in milliseconds you want the I O unit to send the streamed data If you are configuring streaming to use only as an event message set the streaming interval to 0 Zero means that the stream will be sent only once D ostream all addresses in the Streaming section of the 1 0 unit s memory map click Use Default Streaming Area See the memory map appendix in the OptoMMP Protocol Guide for more information Note that the Streaming section does not include data from high density digital modules To stream only part of the Streaming section or to stream a different part of the memory map click Specify Streaming Area Enter the starting address in the Memory Map Address field the address must be entered in hex and enter the size in bytes of the data to stream in the Size Of Data field E Enter the IP port on the PCs or devices that receive the streamed data Your application must refer to this port number Use the default of 5001 unless you know it is already being used for another purpose F Enter the IP addresses of up to eight devices to receive the streamed data 6 When all fields are corre
95. CEPTS The following table shows how to configure possible events and reactions to occur either immediately or after a delay Page references give you more detailed information for steps Now Configure Digital Events page 128 Turn digital point on off on same I O unit pike Configure Timers page 138 delay 1 Configure Digital Events set Scratch Pad bit page 128 2 Except data logging Configure Event Messages Turn digital point on off Now send message or data page 86 on different I O unit Data logging Configure Data Logging and configure page 82 If digital point is on off OR email optional page 93 Log data OR 1 Configure Timers set Scratch Pad bit page 138 Copy memory map data 2 Email message only Configure Email page 93 OR Streaming only Configure Streaming page 98 Send message After a SNMP only Configure SNMP page 90 stream e mail serial delay 3 Except data logging Configure Event Messages or SNMP trap send message or data page 86 Data logging Configure Data Logging and configure page 82 Email optional page 93 1 Configure Alarm Events high alarm or low alarm set Now Scratch Pad bit page 133 Turn digital point on off 2 Configure Digital Events turn on off point page 128 on same I O unit Aft 1 Configure Alarm Events high alarm or low alarm set ee Scratch Pad bit page 133 2 Configure Timers turn on off point page 138 1 Configure Alarm Events high al
96. Character List Apply No Yes Ox 0D040000 22507 9600 None 8 1 No Yes Ox ODOA0000 For help in understanding or changing data see Opto 22 form 1191 the SNAP Serial Communication Module User s Guide Also see Configuring Serial Communication Modules on page 48 Configuring Profibus Modules on page 53 and Configuring Wiegand Modules on page 55 To save configuration to flash memory see Saving to an I O Unit s Flash Memory on page 185 Configuring Viewing or Changing PID Loops For information about PID loops see Configuring PID Loops on page 61 PIDs are normally configured in a configuration file following the steps on page 61 However you can also configure view or change them using PAC Manager s Inspect window Remember that changes made here cannot be saved to a configuration file 166 PAC Manager User s Guide Legacy Edition CHAPTER 5 READING AND WRITING TO SPECIFIC DEVICES 1 In the PAC Manager main window click the Inspect button al 5 Inspect I O Unit IP Address 10 192 55 67 Port 2001 Timeout 1000 ms Status Status Read area last read at 01 30 07 13 51 14 Status Read Status Read Status Write Point Config Digital Bank Digital Point Analog Bank Analog Point High Density System Scratch Pad gt DataLog gt PID gt Events Communications gt Other OxFFFF FO30 0004 OxFFFF F030 0008 OxFFFF FO30 0018 OxFF
97. D4 0030 OxFFFF FOD4 0038 Digital OFF Scratch Pad Bits ON Scratch Pad Bits OFF Ox 00000000 00000000 Ox 00000000 00000000 Ox 00000000 00000000 3 In the drop down list choose the lowest unused Event Number Click Used NOTE To reduce scanning time the I O unit stops scanning timers when it reaches an unused timer number Make sure you use timer numbers in order starting with the lowest 4 Inthe Event section enter the digital event and or Scratch Pad masks that should start the timer For help in using the Scratch Pad see page 124 PAC Manager User s Guide Legacy Edition CONFIGURING EVENT MESSAGES 5 Inthe Timer section enter the length of the timer delay in milliseconds For example for a 10 second delay between the event and the reaction enter 10 000 6 In the Reaction section enter the digital reaction that should occur and or the Scratch Pad masks that should be set when the timer expires 7 Repeat from step 3 for additional timers When you have finished configuring timed events and reactions click OK 8 Click the Save button al to save the configuration file Configuring Event Messages PAC R Ifyou are using PAC Control do not use this section configure event messages in the EB configuration file as shown on page 86 ae If you are not using PAC Control you cannot configure event messages in a configuration file Instead use PAC Manager s Inspect mode and follow the steps below 1 In the
98. DULES POINTS AND FEATURES 5 Inspect 1 0 Unit F 7 IP Address 10 192 55 67 Information for this PID loop pu is shown in the window Status Read Status Write p _Rettesh_ Point Config STATUS 7 Digital Bank OxFFFF F210 0064 Current Value Of Input Apply OFFFF F210 0068 Current Value Of Setpoint Digital Point OxFFFF F210 000C Current Value Of Output 10 000000 OxFFFF F210 0008 Current Value Of Feed Forward 0 000000 Analog Bank OxFFFF F210 0000 Last Scanned Value Of Input 10 000000 OxFFFF F210 0004 Last Scanned Value Of Setpoint 5 000000 Analog Point OxFFFF F200 0028 Scan Counter 38 00000001 OxFFFF F200 002C Status Flags High Density OxFFFF F200 0030 Status Flags On Mask 00000000 OxFFFF F200 0034 Status Flags Off Mask 00000000 System gt OxFFFF F200 0000 Current Value Of Error OxFFFF F200 0004 Current Value Of P Gain Scratch Pad gt OxFFFF F200 0008 Current Value Of Integral OFFFF F200 000C Current Value Of D Derivative DataLog gt OxFFFF F200 0010 Current Value Of Integral PID TUNING OxFFFF F210 0010 Gain 1 000000 Everts gt OxFFFF F210 0014 Tune Integral 0 000000 OxFFFF F210 0018 Tune D Derivative 0 000000 Communications gt OxFFFF F210 001C Feed Forward Gain 0 000000 CONFIGURATION Other gt OxFFFF F210 0050 Algorithm Velocity OxFFFF F210 0054 Mode Automatic OxFFFF F210 0038 Scan Time seconds 1 000000 AEE AAN ANAA RET EE PE A Ee A FArAnAnA Close Help
99. Data logging interval PAC Manager User s Guide Legacy Edition USING 1 0 POINT FEATURES NOTE PID loops are saved but PID module settings are not saved when you cycle power to the I O unit and the PID module PID module settings cannot be saved to the I O unit s flash memory If you turn off power to these components you will need to reenter PID module settings using either PAC Manager or the OptoENET PID Module Tuner software 6 Click Send The configuration data is sent to the I O units whose IP addresses you chose Using PAC Manager to Clear Flash Memory You can also use PAC Manager to clear configuration data from flash memory in one or more I O units This action does not affect brain or controller firmware strategy files or files from the O unit s file system that may be stored to flash 1 With the configuration file open choose Tools Send Configuration to I O Unit 2 Inthe Send Configuration dialog box highlight the I O unit configuration and IP addresses for the I O units you want to clear 3 Click Clear Flash Configuration data in flash memory is cleared Using I O Point Features The I O point features available on SNAP Ethernet based I O units depend on the combined capabilities of the I O processor brain brain board or on the rack controller the module and in some cases the protocol used See page 5 to determine which features are available for the processor you are using Note that some
100. Digital Module Status Read Module Number M Module 0 is NOT a High Density Digital Module Status Write Description Refresh Point Config STATUS _Petesh Digital Bank OxFFFF F180 8000 Point State Mask Digital Point Analog Bank Analog Point High Density System gt Scratch Pad gt DataLog gt PID gt WoD e WNI Oo Events gt Communications gt Other gt 3 Click the module number for the point you want to read or write to PAC Manager User s Guide Legacy Edition READING AND WRITING TO POINTS SNAP High Density Digital Input For an input module the current states and latches appear both as bitmasks in hex and individually for each point Counter values appear in the Counter column 3 Inspect 1 0 Unit IP Address 10 192 55 67 Port 2001 Timeout 1000 ms Status High Density Digital Module area last read at 10 11 06 16 26 00 m High Density Digital Module Status Read Module Number 2 v Module 2 is a High Density Digital Input Module Status Write Paint Config STATUS Digital Bank OxFFFF F180 8080 cps Mask Digital Point OxFFFF F180 8088 On Latch Mask OxFFFF F180 8090 Off Latch Mask Analog Bank ea High Density 0 System gt Scratch Pad gt DataLog gt PID gt Events gt Communications gt Other soo0c0emo200000000 To clear latches for a point highlight the point number and click the Clear On Latch or Clear Off Latch button To clear
101. E INFORMATION OxFFFF FOCO 0000 Module Type Ox 00 OxFFFF F034 7F00 Module Subtype I OxFFFF F034 7F02 Hardware Revision Date OxFFFF F034 7FO6 Loader Version OxFFFF F034 7FO4 Firmware Version PORT A OxFFFF F034 8000 IP Port Number OxFFFF F034 8004 Baud Rate OxFFFF F034 8008 Parity OxFFFF F034 8009 Data Bits OxFFFF F034 8004 Stop Bits Profibus Module OxFFFF F034 8008 Hardware Flaw Control OxFFFF F034 800C Power up Test Message Yes OxFFFF F034 8200 EDM Character List Ox ODO40000 PAC Manager User s Guide Legacy Edition CHAPTER 2 CONFIGURING DEVICES 3 Inthe Number field choose the Profibus module s position from the drop down list Click to put a check mark in the Used box 4 f you need to change port numbers enter the new numbers for each port in the IP Port Number field 5 Change the Baud Rate and EOM Character List fields if necessary to match your Profibus devices Choose whether to have the module automatically send a Test Message when turned on the default is Yes 6 When data is correct repeat from step 3 for additional Profibus modules 7 When all Profibus modules are configured click OK to close the dialog box and return to configuring I O units IMPORTANT If you have changed an IP Port number you must save the change to flash and restart the 1 0 unit when you send the configuration data to the I O unit see page 67 PAC R Configuring Wiegand Modules UIO Wiegand modules are a special ty
102. E2 Brain Boards 1 In the PAC Manager main window click the Inspect button Ql 5 Inspect 1 0 Unit IP Address 10 192 55 67 x Port 2001 Timeout 1000 ms Status Status Read area last read at 01 30 07 13 51 14 Status Read Status Read Status Write Point Config Digital Bank Digital Point Analog Bank Analog Point High Density System gt Scratch Pad gt DataLog gt PID Events gt Communications gt Other gt OxFFFF F030 0004 OxFFFF F030 0008 OxFFFF F030 0018 OxFFFF F030 0000 OxFFFF F030 001C OxFFFF F030 00A0 OxFFFF F030 0080 OxFFFF F030 0020 OxFFFF F030 0080 OxFFFF F030 0024 OxFFFF F030 0025 OxFFFF F030 0026 OxFFFF F030 0028 OxFFFF F030 002E OxFFFF F030 0034 OxFFFF F030 0038 OxFFFF F030 003C OxFFFF F030 0040 OxFFFF FFFF F060 OxFFFF FFFF F050 OxFFFF FFFF F058 Close Help DESCRIPTION Powerup Clear Flag PUC Needed Busy Flag Loader Version Memory Map Version Firmware Version Firmware Version Date Firmware Version Time Unit Type Unit Description I 0 Unit Hardware Revision Month I 0 Unit Hardware Revision Day I 0 Unit Hardware Revision Year Installed Ram MAC Address TCP IP Address TCP IP Subnet Mask TCP IP Default Gateway TCP IP Name Server Secondary MAC Address Secondary TCP IP Address Secondary TCP IP Subnet Mask eee PUC Received 0 0 Rl la 1 R8 0a 01 29 2007 10 45 25 ox00000074 SNAP PAC R1L 24 2006 16777216 00 A0 3D
103. F F060 OxFFFF FFFF F050 OxFFFF FFFF F058 Close Help Port 2001 CAUTION Ifyou are using PAC Control reading and writing is normally done in the PAC Control strategy logic or in Debug mode If you use the steps in this section to write to an I O unit be very careful you do not interfere with strategy logic 1 In the PAC Manager main window click the Inspect button al Timeout 1000 ms Status Status Read area last read at 01 30 07 13 51 14 DESCRIPTION Powerup Clear Flag PUC Needed Busy Flag Loader Version Memory Map Version Firmware Version Firmware Version Date Firmware Version Time Unit Type Unit Description I 0 Unit Hardware Revision Month I 0 Unit Hardware Revision Day I 0 Unit Hardware Revision Year Installed Ram MAC Address TCP IP Address TCP IP Subnet Mask TCP IP Default Gateway TCP IP Name Server Secondary MAC Address Secondary TCP IP Address Secondary TCP IP Subnet Mask PUC Received 0 0 Rl la if R8 0a 01 29 2007 10 45 25 0x00000074 SNAP PAC R1 1 24 2006 16777216 00 A0 3D 00 DB 4C 10 192 55 67 255 255 192 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 00 A0 3D 00 DB 4D 10 192 255 5 255 255 192 0 If you have used the Inspect button before the last IP address you used is shown and current Status Read information appears in the window The most recently used IP addresses are available in the drop down list In the IP Address field type the IP address of the I O unit or choose it
104. F035 0000 Month OxFFFF F035 0000 Day OxFFFF F035 0000 Year 5 Click to put a check mark in the Used box Enter the correct time and date values in the Value column Click OK 6 Configure other optional functions or return to the PAC Manager main window and click the Save button Hl to save the configuration file When you are ready to upload the configuration file to the I O unit see Sending Configuration Data to the I O Unit on page 67 PAC Manager User s Guide Legacy Edition CHAPTER 3 CONFIGURING OPTIONAL FUNCTIONS Configuring Direct Serial Communication PAC S PAC R UIO UIO Applies to SNAP PAC and SNAP Ultimate controllers only Requires firmware version 5 1 or newer on UIO Note that this configuration cannot be saved as part of the configuration file It must be done separately using PAC Manager s Inspect window RS 232 serial connectors are located on the top of SNAP PAC and SNAP Ultimate controllers two connectors on a standalone controller and one connector on an on the rack controller These ports are sometimes used for maintenance such as loading new firmware or for Point to Point Protocol PPP communication via modem However they can also be used to send or receive data directly from a serial device such as barcode readers weigh scales or any intelligent device with a serial port Communication is done through PAC Control communication handles For more information see Communication Com
105. FF F030 0000 OxFFFF F030 001C OxFFFF F030 0040 OxFFFF F030 0080 OxFFFF F030 0020 OxFFFF F030 0080 OxFFFF F030 0024 OxFFFF F030 0025 OxFFFF F030 0026 OxFFFF F030 0028 OxFFFF F030 002E OxFFFF F030 0034 OxFFFF FO30 0038 OxFFFF F030 003C OxFFFF F030 0040 OxFFFF FFFF F060 OxFFFF FFFF F050 OxFFFF FFFF F058 DESCRIPTION Powerup Clear Flag PUC Needed Busy Flag Loader Version Memory Map Version Firmware Version Firmware Version Date Firmware Version Time Unit Type Unit Description I O Unit Hardware Revision Month I 0 Unit Hardware Revision Day I O Unit Hardware Revision Year Installed Ram MAC Address TCP IP Address TCP IP Subnet Mask TCP IP Default Gateway TCP IP Name Server Secondary MAC Address Secondary TCP IP Address Secondary TCP IP Subnet Mask PUC Received 0 0 Rl la I R8 0a 01 29 2007 10 45 25 0x00000074 SNAP PAC R1 1 24 2006 16777216 00 A0 3D 00 DB 4C 10 192 55 67 255 255 192 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 00 A0 3D 00 DB 4D 10 192 255 5 255 255 192 0 If you have used the Inspect button before the last IP address you used is shown and current Status Read information appears in the window The most recently used IP addresses are available in the drop down list In the IP Address field type the IP address of the I O unit or choose it from the drop down list Click PID and choose PID Loops from the submenu PAC Manager User s Guide Legacy Edition CONFIGURING 1 0 MO
106. FF F034 0054 Filter 6 Mask OxFFFF F03A 0058 Filter 7 Address NxFFFF FNA4 NNSA Filter 7 Mask Close Help To limit access to a specific protocol change the Port number in the Value column CAUTION If you change the Control Engine port to zero a strategy that is already in the control engine will still run but PAC Display PAC Control and other hosts will not be able to communicate with it See Protecting a PAC Control Strategy from Interference on page 77 To set up an FTP login enter the Username and Password to be required from anyone who uses FTP to access the device To limit access to specific computers set up to ten filter addresses and filter masks The filter address is the IP address that is allowed to access the controller the filter mask indicates a range of allowed addresses If only one IP address may access the controller enter 255 255 255 255 for the filter mask If a range of IP addresses may access the controller enter a mask that reflects the subnet range For example if only IP address 1 2 3 4 may access the controller enter 1 2 3 4 as the filter address and 255 255 255 255 as the filter mask If any IP address that starts with 1 2 3 may access the controller enter 1 2 3 4 or 1 2 3 1 or any address in the range as the filter address and 255 255 255 0 as the filter mask NOTE For troubleshooting purposes you can use the Broadcast Filter value to temporarily turn off incoming br
107. G RACKS anere EEEO one iw ET chu x esau ores 154 SNAP B Series RACKS sina ed see paen nese d ninn EEn EEEE EER E NY 155 SNAP DigitalkOnIV RICK rs sarile e ana raa are 155 Serial MOQUIES onirin enrian EEE EEA AEN 156 Eland E2 BraiMi BOAS orsseoseroeienssti oeeie ne a EE E E ET 157 Configuring I O Modules Points and Features 00 0 c cece ccc aera ece rreren 158 Point Types Requiring Configuration 2 cnr inrenrianas doer ieietaar eaters rererere rre 158 Point Features Requiring Configuration 00 0 ccc cece eee e cece e eee e nee ee tenn ees 159 Configuring Analog and Digital Points and Features 0 0 0 0 ccc eee e eee ee eee ees 159 Point Type Configuration Tables 0 occa kenareedtneoacddeumensd UMpageral oumeassltnns 161 Digital Input and Output Modules 50 15 can xaaiatudeeeataane eere rrr erreneren 161 Analog INPUT MOdUIES ssssririerasaernirisoyiie isernia entea 162 Analog Output Modules ieres nei ned r a S eara e a 165 PAC Manager User s Guide Legacy Edition Config Config Reading an Readin Readin A A Readin Readin S S Readin Di Di Di Analog Bank Window 45 cc cece eeacsbaas eat aakesveawsnae seat ine ceeearbbaegzabiae uring Serial Profibus and Wiegand Modules 0 0 00 c cece ee recre uring Viewing or Changing PID Loops ccc cece cece cece eee teen n ees d Wating to PON errereen a vedas E vesne weaned g and Writing to Digital PAINS ciacwietedetainidersiu
108. Guide Legacy Edition READING AND WRITING TO POINTS Analog Bank Window Values are current as of the Status date and time Click Refresh to update values 5 Inspect 1 0 Unit IP Address 10 192 55 67 Port 2001 Timeout 1000 ms Status Analog Bank area last read at 10 11 06 16 14 12 m Analog Bank Read Status Read Status Write Point Config Digital Bank Digital Point Analog Bank Analog Point High Density System Scratch Pad gt DataLog gt PID Events Communications gt Other Onan PPA RWWWWNNNNKFEFEFRFOOOD For help in interpreting analog point data see IEEE Float Data on page 192 PAC Manager User s Guide Legacy Edition CHAPTER 5 READING AND WRITING TO SPECIFIC DEVICES Reading and Writing to SNAP High Density Digital Points In PAC Manager you can read or write to points on high density digital modules in two ways one at a time using the Digital Point button see page 170 or all at once as shown below 1 To read or write to points on high density digital modules click the Inspect button Ql in the PAC Manager main window 2 In the Inspect I O Unit window type the IP address of the 1 0 unit or choose it from the drop down list Click High Density Z Inspect 1 0 Unit IP Address 10 1 92 55 67 x Port 2001 Timeout 1000 ms Status High Density Digital Module area last read at 10 11 06 16 22 19 High Density
109. H 10 1925 Enabled 0 Modify Delete Import Copy 1 0 Points PID Loops Modules gt Events Scratch Pad gt Communications gt Help Others gt 5 Continue with the next section Configuring 1 0 Modules and Points PAC Manager User s Guide Legacy Edition CHAPTER 2 CONFIGURING DEVICES Configuring I O Modules and Points NOTE To configure E1 and E2 1 0 units see Opto 22 form 1576 Technical Note I O Configuration for E1 and E2 Brain Boards 1 0 points on mistic serial I O units must be configured in PAC Control Once you have added an I O unit you can configure its modules and points See the following pages for configuration steps Digital points page 39 Analog points page 42 Serial modules page 48 Profibus modules page 53 Wiegand modules page 55 PID modules page 57 Configuring SNAP Digital Points NOTE To configure E1 and E2 1 0 units see Opto 22 form 1576 Technical Note I O Configuration for E1 and E2 Brain Boards 1 0 points on mistic serial I O units must be configured in PAC Control Use the following steps to configure digital points on all 4 channel and high density SNAP digital modules supported by the brain or on the rack controller 1 In the Configure I O Units dialog box make sure the I O unit for the point you are adding is highlighted Click the I O Points button PAC Manager User s Guide Legacy Edition CONFIGURING 1
110. ING AND WRITING TO SPECIFIC DEVICES For example individual analog point data for points 0 and 1 on module 0 appears in these addresses Scaled units FFFF F026 0000 FFFF F026 0003 Counts FFFF F026 0004 FFFF F026 0007 0 Minimum value E U FFFF F026 0008 FFFF F026 000B Maximum value E U FFFF F026 000C FFFF F026 000F i Scaled units FFFF F026 0040 FFFF F026 0043 Counts FFFF F026 0044 FFFF F026 0047 i Minimum value E U FFFF F026 0048 FFFF F026 004B Maximum value E U FFFF F026 004C FFFF F026 004F Engineering Units IEEE 754 float format is as follows 1 bit 8 bits 23 bits X XXXXXXXX XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX Sign Exponent Significand Float calculation 1 9 x 1 Significand 2 x 2 Exponent 127 Example for Opto 22 memory map At this address base address base address 1 base address 2 base address 3 This hex data 41 77 33 33 In binary O 100 0001 O 111 0111 0011 0011 0011 0011 In these bits 31 30 23 22 0 Equals in decimal 0 130 7 811 891 Representing Sign Exponent Significand Decimal 1 x 1 7 811 891 22 x 2 30 127 1x 1 931 x8 15 45 rounded to 2 decimal places Analog Bank Data Remember that the bank area of the memory map is set up for four points per module Analog modules with more than four points channels will show data for points 0 3 only If the analog modules you are using have onl
111. Initial Mode pe L Tune Fd Fwd Gain jf Scan Rate Tune D Cancel Help 4 Complete the fields as follows A Type a unique descriptive name for the PID B Optional Enter a description of the PID 64 PAC Manager User s Guide Legacy Edition CHAPTER 2 CONFIGURING DEVICES Select the type of input I O Point Host or PID Output If the PID s process variable comes from an I O point on the same unit select I O Point Choose the point from the dropdown list or type a point name to configure a new point If the PID s process variable comes from a PAC Control strategy select Host Enter an initial value for the input Ifthe PID s process variable is the output of another PID on this I O unit a cascading control loop select PID Output Choose the PID from the dropdown list Optional If you chose I O Point or PID for step C check this box if the error should be calculated based on the square root of the process variable applies to flow control systems where volumetric flow is proportional to the square root of a signal from a flow transducer Set the valid range of the process variable by entering the low range and the high range See J for optional responses to out of range input Choose the source for the setpoint O Point Host or PID Output To control the setpoint using a device such as a potentiometer select I O Point choose an I O point from the drop
112. ND REACTIONS See The Scratch Pad on page 124 6 Optional If you are setting two or more alarms on the same point use the Advanced Value Selection area to enter the memory map address for the point to monitor and indicate whether the value on that point is a float 7 Repeat from step 3 for additional alarms When you have finished configuring alarms click OK 8 Click the Save button Hl to save the configuration file Configuring Serial or Wiegand Events and Reactions PAC R fyou are using Opto 22 serial communication modules RS 232 RS 485 422 or Wiegand with EB SNAP PAC SNAP Ultimate or SNAP Ethernet I O units you can configure a serial or Wiegand event to UIO send a serial message to send an SNMP trap or to turn bits in the Scratch Pad on or off when a EIO specific string is received from one or more modules Before you configure serial events and reactions make sure you have configured the serial modules page 48 In the PAC Manager main window with a configuration file open right click the name of the I O unit on which you want to set up serial or Wiegand events and choose Configure from the pop up menu 5 Configure 1 0 Units Name Type Port Address Watchdog Ref Count Desc Add Line_1 SNAP E ETHER 10 1925 Enabled 0 Preprocess SNAP P ETHER 10 1925 Enabled 5 Modify Delete Import Copy 1 0 Points PID Loops Events Events _ Scratch Pad_ gt button Help
113. NG OPTIONAL FUNCTIONS 2 In the Open Tag Database dialog box navigate to the configuration file and double click it to open it 3 PAC Manager Main_Process SEE File Edit Tools View Help olsa xaje A Bl Main_Process SEE eines Vo units Sl Line SA Preprocess 3 In the configuration tree right click the name of the I O unit on which you want to set up streaming and choose Configure from the pop up menu 5 Configure 1 0 Units Name Type Port Line_1 SNAP E ETHER 10 192 5 Enabled wocess SNAP P ETHER 10 192 5 Enabled 5 Modify Delete Import Copy 1 0 Points PID Loops Modules gt Events Scratch Pad gt Communications gt Communications Others gt button gt 4 Make sure the correct I O unit is highlighted in the list Click the Communications button and choose Streaming from the pop up menu PAC Manager User s Guide Legacy Edition 99 CONFIGURING STREAMING Configure Streaming A Enable Streaming No Target Device Information B IP Pott 5001 E Enable 1 0 Mirroring No Stream Target 1 Source Memory Map Information Stream Target 2 3 J l Interval milliseconds 1000 Stream Target 3 a oe Stream Target 4 E Stream Target 5 gg a a Stream Target 6 oo Stream Target 7 De eee Stream Target 8 fo Use Default Streaming Area Specify Streaming
114. Others gt PAC Manager User s Guide Legacy Edition CHAPTER 4 SETTING UP EVENTS AND REACTIONS 1 Click the Events button and choose Serial Events from the pop up menu or if you are 4 5 configuring events for a Wiegand serial communication module choose Wiegand Events 5 Configure Serial Events Event Number 0 v Used EVENT Serial Ports Mask Pattern String wildcards allowed e g REACTION Resulting String plug ins allowed SNMP Trap Period seconds 0 SNMP Specific Trap Type 0 OxFFFF F154 0000 OxFFFF F154 0010 Ox 00000000 OxFFFF F154 0038 OxFFFF F154 000C OxFFFF F154 0008 OxFFFF F154 0 80 OxFFFF F154 OF 00 OxFFFF F154 0060 OxFFFF F154 0068 SNMP Trap Priority Disable SNMP Trap Scratch Pad Bits ON Scratch Pad Bits OFF High No Ox 00000000 00000000 Ox 00000000 00000000 OxFFFF F154 0070 Cancel Enable E mail Message Disabled The example above shows the Configure Serial Events dialog box the Wiegand Events dialog box is similar In the drop down list choose the lowest unused Event Number Click Used NOTE To reduce scanning time the I O unit stops scanning serial events when it reaches an unused event Make sure you use event numbers in order starting with the lowest In the Event section enter a mask in hex notation indicating the serial ports to monitor The I O unit monitors all ports set as on bits in the mask on 1 off 0 If the string i
115. OxFFFF F039 0000 Modbus 32 bit Float Format Big Endian Address Conversion Opto 22 Memory Map Address Valid range F000 0000 to F1EB FFFE To convert to Modbus address Forexample FO D8 1000 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 1 1 0 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 00 0 0 010 0 0 0 0 0 0 8 bits 16 bits 011011000 000100000000000 Convert to decimal Convert to decimal 108 2048 Add2 2 Add 1 1 Modbus UnitID 110 Register Address 2049 For applications that use Register Number instead of Register Address convert the address to a Register Number Addi 1 Modbus Unit ID 110 RegisterNumber 2050 Note Modbus Register Numbers start at 1 but the corresponding Register Addresses start at 0 For example Register Number 2050 is at Register Address 2049 Modbus Unit ID MemMap Address Ox 4 Register Address OK Cancel PAC Manager User s Guide Legacy Edition 109 CONFIGURING MODBUS OPTIONS 5 To convert an 1 0 unit memory map address to a Modbus Unit ID and Register Address type the last eight digits of the 1 0 unit s memory map address in the MemMap Address field Make sure there are no spaces in the address for example type F0300020 6 Click the right arrow button gt The equivalent Modbus address appears Note that the Modbus numbers are decimal 5 Configure Modbus Address Description le MODBUS OxFFFF F039 0000 Modbus 32 bit Float Format Big Endian m Address Conversion Opto 22 Memory Map Address Val
116. P Ethernet I O units EIO 1 With the configuration file open right click the name of the 1 0 unit the PID will be on From the pop up menu choose Configure The Configure 1 0 Units dialog box opens 3 Configure 1 0 Units Port Address Watchdog Ref Count Desc Add ETHER 10 192 5 Enabled 2 Modify Delete Import Copy 170 Points PID Loops PID Loops Modules gt button Events Scratch Pad gt 2 Communications gt Help Others gt PAC Manager User s Guide Legacy Edition CONFIGURING PID LOOPS 2 Make sure the correct I O unit is highlighted Click the PID Loops button 5 Configure PID Loops 170 Unit Type SNAP PAC R1 Name Input Setp Output Mode Enable Ref Descri Add Not gt Not Modify Not Not Delete Not v Not Not Not 3 Double click the lowest unused PID number Add PID Loop Name Description Input fio Paint 7 Flowmeter A 7 I Square Root Low Range fo High Range fro Setpoint fio Point 7 Flowmeter A z Output fio Point x 7 Lower Clamp fo Upper Clamp fo Min Change fo Max Change fo Output options for when the input is out of range I Switch to manual mode when input goes out of range I Force output when input is out of range auto mode only Output value when input is under range jo and overrange jo Algorithm Velocity v Gain Fd Fwd
117. P PAC R2 contains R2 bin SNAP PAC EB1 contains EB1 bin SNAP PAC EB2 contains EB2 bin E1 contains E1 bin E2 contains E2 bin SNAP Ultimate brains contains partial part number uio 2 Choose Start Programs gt Opto 22 PAC Project Software PAC Manager The PAC Manager main window opens PAC Manager File Tools Yiew Help njaa xaa BJ E o 198 PAC Manager User s Guide Legacy Edition CHAPTER 6 MAINTAINING DEVICES 3 Click the Maintenance button jj 5 1 0 Unit Maintenance Command Install Module Firmware Filename z IP Addresses Add Modify Restart Confirmation Interval sec 1 Port Timeout msec Clear Flash Files 2001 1000 I Synchronize to PC Time Execute 4 Make sure Install Firmware is highlighted in the Command list 5 Click the browse button B and locate the firmware file you downloaded from our website Double click the filename The path and filename appear in the Filename field 6 Ifthe IP address es of the SNAP devices you want to load firmware to appear in the IP Addresses list skip to step 8 Or if you have previously saved a list of IP addresses click Load to load the saved list If the address es you need don t appear in the list click Add E IES Add one IP Address Host Name IP Address 0 0 0 C Host Name Add a range of IP Addresses 7 Enter the address or a ran
118. PAC MANAGER USER S GUIDE LEGACY EDITION SNAP PAC R Series Controllers SNAP PAC S Series Controllers SNAP PAC Brains SNAP Simple I O SNAP Ethernet I O SNAP Ultimate I O E1 Brain Board E2 Brain Board Form 1714 070119 January 2007 OPTO 2 2 43044 Business Park Drive Temecula CA 92590 3614 Phone 800 321 OPTO 6786 or 951 695 3000 Fax 800 832 OPTO 6786 or 951 695 2712 www opto22 com Product Support Services 800 TEK OPTO 835 6786 or 951 695 3080 Fax 951 695 3017 Email support opto22 com Web support opto22 com PAC Manager User s Guide Legacy Edition Form 1714 070119 January 2007 Copyright 2003 2007 Opto 22 All rights reserved Printed in the United States of America The information in this manual has been checked carefully and is believed to be accurate however Opto 22 assumes no responsibility for possible inaccuracies or omissions Specifications are subject to change without notice Opto 22 warrants all of its products to be free from defects in material or workmanship for 30 months from the manufacturing date code This warranty is limited to the original cost of the unit only and does not cover installation labor or any other contingent costs Opto 22 1 0 modules and solid state relays with date codes of 1 96 or later are guaranteed for life This lifetime warranty excludes reed relay SNAP serial communication modules SNAP PID modules and modules that contain mechanical contacts or switc
119. PAC Manager User s Guide Legacy Edition ASSIGNING AN IP ADDRESS 8 Choose ToolsFind Opto 22 MMP Devices 5 Find Opto 22 MMP Devices MMP Port 2007 Timeout 3000 ms Devices Found 0 MAC Address IP Address 9 Click Find PAC Manager discovers all Opto 22 memory mapped devices on the network and lists their MAC addresses and IP addresses Opto 22 memory mapped devices include SNAP PAC controllers and brains SNAP Ethernet SNAP Ultimate and SNAP Simple I O units and E1 and E2 1 0 units Opto 22 M4 series controllers with Ethernet cards are not included 5 Find Opto 22 MMP Devices MMP Port 2001 Timeout 3000 ms Devices Found 52 Unit T 00 A0 3D 00 BD 91 10 192 55 106 Ox74 SNAP PAC A1 00 A0 3D 00 62 1D 10 192 55 102 0x93 SNAP UPT AC 00 40 3D 00 01 40 10 192 54 70 0 78 SNAP PAC Ra 00 40 3D 00 C2 01 10 192 54 198 0x74 SNAP PAC A1 00 40 3D 00 65 50 10 192 54 154 0 78 SNAP PAC Rz 00 40 3D 00 89 73 10 192 54 134 0x74 SNAP PAC A1 00 40 3D 00 70 9C 10 192 56 235 0 78 SNAP PAC Rz 00 40 3D 00 93 40 10 192 54 30 0x74 SNAP PAC A1 00 40 3D 00 85 7B 10 192 50 32 O0x8C SNAP UP1 ME 00 40 3D 00 75 FB 10 192 50 31 Ox8C SNAP UP1 ME 00 40 3D 00 D4 4 10 192 54 36 0x74 SNAP PAC AI AMANANANEVAR 10197RN11 Nw72 CNAP PAC AT lt coy Heo t 10 Find the device s MAC address in the left column and write down its IP address from the next column Make sure you have the correct MAC address 11 Close the dialo
120. PAC Manager main window click the Inspect button Bl 5 Inspect 1 0 Unit IP Address 10 192 55 67 Status Read Status Write Point Config Digital Bank Digital Point Analog Bank Analog Point High Density System gt Scratch Pad gt DataLog gt PID Events Communications gt Other gt x Port 2001 Status Read OxFFFF F030 0004 OxFFFF F030 0008 OxFFFF F030 0018 OxFFFF F030 0000 OxFFFF F030 001C OxFFFF F030 0040 OxFFFF F030 0080 OxFFFF F030 0020 OxFFFF F030 0080 OxFFFF F030 0026 OxFFFF F030 0028 OxFFFF F030 002E OxFFFF F030 0040 OxFFFF FFFF F060 OxFFFF FFFF F050 OxFFFF FFFF F058 Timeout 1000 ms DESCRIPTION Powerup Clear Flag PUC Needed Busy Flag Loader Version Memory Map Version Firmware Version Firmware Version Date Firmware Version Time Unit Type Unit Description I 0 Unit Hardware Revision Month I 0 Unit Hardware Revision Day I 0 Unit Hardware Revision Year Installed Ram MAC Address TCP IP Address TCP IP Subnet Mask TCP IP Default Gateway TCP IP Name Server Secondary MAC Address Secondary TCP IP Address Secondary TCP IP Subnet Mask Status Status Read area last read at 01 30 07 13 51 14 PUC Received 0 0 Rl la X R8 0a 01 29 2007 10 45 25 0x0000007A SNAP PAC R1 i 24 2006 16777216 00 A0 3D 00 DB 4C 10 192 55 67 255 255 192 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 00 A0 3D 00 DB 4D 10 192 255 5 255 255 192 0 If you have used the Ins
121. Preprocess E MainProcess DER MainProcess pasted As shown in the graphic at Original unit S pM ae y Te Pump_i_Status right the names of the pasted I O and points IE Flowmeter A unit and points are the same as the PIDs originals except with an H Memory Map values on Preprocess_1 underscore and a number added By Ports D l Pasted unit ay To paste the I O unit into a different and points Liz Si e d Ie a configuration file close the first file Pips and then open the file into which E Memory Map Values you want to paste the 1 0 unit Right click the I O Units folder in the configuration tree From the submenu choose Paste The I O unit is pasted To see it in the configuration tree you can click the plus sign to expand the folder 3 To change the name or configuration of the pasted I O unit double click it Make the changes in the Edit I O Unit dialog box and then click OK 4 To change the name or configuration of a point on the pasted unit double click the point s name Make changes in the dialog box and then click OK 60 PAC Manager User s Guide Legacy Edition CHAPTER 2 CONFIGURING DEVICES Configuring PID Loops PAC R UIO EIO NOTE This section applies only to PID loops on Ethernet based I O units SNAP PAC SNAP Ultimate and SNAP Ethernet It does not apply to PID loops on mistic brains such as the B3000 serial PID loops for mistic brains used with PAC Control must be
122. SNAP PAC S series controllers 2 Does not apply to E1 and E2 brain boards PAC Manager User s Guide Legacy Edition CHAPTER 5 READING AND WRITING TO SPECIFIC DEVICES Changing Status Data The following items in the Status Read window can be changed in PAC Manager if the device supports them Secondary TCP IP Address Secondary TCP IP Subnet Mask Secondary TCP IP Default Gateway Secondary TCP IP Name Server Always BootP DHCP on Powerup Degrees F C Comm Watchdog Time TCP Settings Max Digital Scantime Max Analog Scantime Scanner Flags Host name 1 In the PAC Manager main window click the Inspect button Bl 5 Inspect I O Unit IP Address 10 192 55 67 Port 2001 Timeout 1000 ms Status Status Read area last read at 01 30 07 13 51 14 Status Read Status Read Status Write Point Contig Digital Bank Digital Point Analog Bank Analog Point High Density OxFFFF F030 OxFFFF FO30 OxFFFF F030 OxFFFF F030 OxFFFF F030 OxFFFF F030 OxFFFF F030 OxFFFF F030 OxFFFF F030 OxFFFF FO30 OxFFFF F030 OxFFFF F030 System b Scratch Pad gt DataLog gt PID gt Events gt OxFFFF F030 Communications gt Other gt OxFFFF FFFF F060 OxFFFF FFFF F050 OxFFFF FFFF F058 DESCRIPTION Powerup Clear Flag PUC Needed Busy Flag Loader Version Memory Map Version Firmware Version Firmware Version Date Firmware Version Time Unit Type Unit Description I 0 Unit Hardware Revision Month I O Un
123. Security Alert naming PAC Manager 4 Double click the MAC address of the device in the list CAUTION PAC Manager lists ALL Opto 22 devices sending BootP or DHCP broadcasts Assign IP addresses only to the ones you know are yours Hint E1s and E2s show a host name that is OPTO plus the last six digits of the MAC address for example opto 00 9D 75 The Mapping dialog box opens 25 Add MAC To IP Mapping x MAC Address 00 40 30 00 90 75 X IP Address m 0 0 Subnet Mask 0 0 0 0 0 Gateway Address 0 0 0 0 0 DNS Address o 0 0 Host Name OPTO 00 94 75 cows _ 5 Enter the IP Address and the Subnet Mask for the device If it will be talking to a device on another subnet enter the Gateway router address If it will talk only on the local subnet leave the gateway address all zeros 0 0 0 0 Leave the DNS address at 0 0 0 0 and the Host Name field as is since you will not be communicating with the I O unit using its host name WARNING Each device on your network including computers routers controllers brains and so on must have a unique IP address Failure to assign unique IP addresses may cause catastrophic network or hardware failures If you don t know which IP addresses are safe to use check with your system administrator 6 When the IP address subnet mask and other fields are correct click OK The new IP address information appears in the upper list in the dialog box and the device s s
124. a sheet for details You can do any of the following on one or multiple devices PAC Manager User s Guide Legacy Edition CHAPTER 6 MAINTAINING DEVICES Save all files in the file system to flash memory Clear all file system files from flash memory does not affect firmware strategy files or point configuration data Load files from flash memory into the device s file system replacing all files in the file system Follow these steps 1 2 3 In the PAC Manager main window click the Maintenance button Gil In the Command list highlight the command you want to use In the following example Save Files To Flash is highlighted 5 1 0 Unit Maintenance Command Install Firmware IP Addresses Install Module Firmware F 10 192 55 67 Download File From 1 0 Unit 10 1925563 Upload File To 1 0 Unit naaa Delete File On 1 0 Unit Read Filenames On 1 0 Unit Read Files From Flash Clear Flash Files _ _ Execute In the IP Addresses list highlight the IP address es of the device s you want the command to apply to If the correct IP addresses are not shown click Add to add an address or group of addresses or if you have saved a list of IP addresses click Load to load the saved list CAUTION Make sure you have chosen the correct command and the devices you want to affect You cannot undo these commands Click Execute The command is executed and a Success message appears in the Results area PAC Manager
125. a SNAP PAC R series or SNAP Ultimate I O system do not use this chapter Instead use the flowchart logic in the PAC Control strategy to handle reactions to events The only reason you might set up event reactions that operate independently on the O side of the controller would be a need for very fast reactions Ifthat is the case be very careful that the event reactions you set up do not conflict with PAC Control logic The chapter introduces you to the Scratch Pad and other basic event reaction concepts It also shows you how to use PAC Manager to configure the following Digital event reactions see page 128 Alarm event reactions see page 133 Serial or Wiegand event reactions see page 136 Timed event reactions see page 138 Event messages see page 140 PAC Manager User s Guide Legacy Edition EVENT REACTION CONCEPTS Event Reaction Concepts The Scratch Pad SNAP PAC S series and SNAP LCE standalone controllers SNAP PAC R series and SNAP Ultimate on the rack controllers and SNAP PAC and SNAP Ethernet brains contain Scratch Pad areas within their memory maps SNAP Simple brains and E1 and E2 brain boards do not contain a Scratch Pad Scratch Pad areas can be used for two main purposes e asa place to hold data being transferred from one peer to another on the network SNAP PAC S series and R series SNAP LCE and SNAP Ultimate only e asa virtual notebook for keeping track of events and alarms SNAP PAC R series SNAP PAC bra
126. a0 3d 00 d5 ed 10 192 55 110 255 255 192 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 00 a0 3d 00 c1 48 10 192 54 115 255 255 192 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 00 a0 3d 00 c1 40 10 192 54 70 255 255 192 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 00 a0 3d 00 c7 22 10 192 54 156 255 255 192 0 0 0 0 0 00 a0 3d 00 9d c5 192 56 255 255 192 0 0 0 0 0 Listening for DHCP Discovers and BootP Requests MAC To IP Address Mappings MAC Address IP Address Subnet Mask Hostname Gateway Address DNS Address O0 a0 3d 00 d4 eb 10 192 54 37 255 255 192 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 00 a0 3d 00 9d d3 10 192 56 230 255 255 192 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 00 a0 3d 00 d5 ed 10 192 55 110 255 255 192 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 00 a0 3d 00 c1 48 10 192 54 115 255 255 192 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 00 a0 3d 00 c1 40 10 192 54 70 255 255 192 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 00 a0 3d 00 c7 22 10 192 54 156 255 255 192 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 00 a0 3d 00 9d c5 10 192 56 229 255 255 192 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 saeua ELH Load List Check the address information If anything is incorrect double click the device in the lower list and change it Click Save List to save the change to the file The change is automatically made to the upper section When all addresses are correct click Assign All PAC Manager User s Guide Legacy Edition ASSIGNING AN IP ADDRESS On DHCP devices the status changes to Assigned On BootP devices the address is saved to flash memory and the status changes to Static IP 8 If any E1s and E2s are in the list click Set All Static IPs
127. ace the file Product Categories txt into the folder Products you would type Products Product Categories txt Ifthe folder does not exist it is created If the IP address es of the device s you want to load the file to appear in the IP Addresses list skip to step 7 Or if you have previously saved a list of IP addresses click Load to load the saved list If the address es you need don t appear in the list click Add 5 Add IP Address Add one IP Address Host Name IP Address 0 0 0 C Host Name Add a range of IP Addresses Enter the address or a range of consecutive addresses then click OK The address es you entered appear in the I O Unit Maintenance dialog box Highlight the IP addresses to load the file to Click Execute PAC Manager User s Guide Legacy Edition 2a MAINTAINING FILES The file is loaded to the I O units and a Success message appears in the Results area 5 1 0 Unit Maintenance Command Install Firmware File to upload source Highlighted IP addresses Path and filename on f heii will receive file 1 0 unit s IP Addresses Add Install Module Firmware Download File From 1 0 Unit Delete File On 1 0 Unit Read Filenames On 1 0 Unit Save Files To Flash Read Files From Flash Clear Flash Files Results Upload File Tol O Unit 10 192 55 6 Succes 10 192 55 67 Des top Product Categories txt fa 10 192 55 63 Destination Modify Del
128. ads and writes using the steps in this chapter are sent directly to the controller or I O unit the device you are reading from or writing to must be on the same network as your PC CAUTION If you are using PAC Control When you read and write to specific devices using the instructions in this chapter the reads and writes occur independently of PAC Control strategy logic If you are using PAC Control you normally use the flowchart logic in the PAC Control strategy to read and write to the O unit It s not a problem to read directly but if you use the instructions in this chapter to write to an I O unit be very careful that your actions do not conflict with PAC Control logic As you use PAC Manager s Inspect window you ll notice that the starting memory map address for each item is shown This can be a handy way to determine addresses you need for programming or configuration You can also highlight an address and right click it to copy it then you can paste it where you are using it You can also copy and paste part or all of the data you read in the Inspect window Just highlight the 3 A data you want to copy and use standard Microsoft Windows commands such as cTRL c to copy the data and paste it into a text email or other file PAC Manager User s Guide Legacy Edition READING BASIC DEVICE INFORMATION Reading Basic Device Information 1 If PAC Manager is not already open choose Start Programs gt Opto 22 PAC Pro
129. al event or a Scratch Pad bit pattern or both waits the length of time you set and then sets off a digital reaction and or sets a different Scratch Pad pattern Digital events apply to points on 4 channel modules not on high density modules Follow these steps to configure a timer PAC Manager User s Guide Legacy Edition CHAPTER 4 SETTING UP EVENTS AND REACTIONS 1 In the PAC Manager main window with a configuration file open right click the name of the I O unit on which you want to set up timed events and choose Configure from the pop up menu 5 Configure 1 0 Units Type Port Address Watchdog Ref Count Desc Add SNAP E ETHER 10 192 5 Enabled 0 SNAP P ETHER 10 192 5 Enabled 5 Modify Delete Import Copy 1 0 Points Events Events Scratch Pad button 2 Click the Events button and choose Timer Events from the pop up menu Configure Timers r Event Number fo M Used Address Description ae O EVENT OxFFFF F0D4 0000 Digital ON OxFFFF F0D4 0008 Digital OFF OxFFFF FOD4 0010 Scratch Pad Bits ON OxFFFF FOD4 0018 Scratch Pad Bits OFF Ox 00000000 o0000000 Ox 00000000 00000000 Ox 00000000 00000000 Ox 00000000 o0000000 TIMER OxFFFF FOD4 0040 Length of Delay milliseconds 0 OxFFFF FOD4 0048 Time Remaining milliseconds N A OxFFFF FOD4 004C Timer State N A REACTION OxFFFF FOD 4 0020 Digital ON Ox 00000000 00000000 OxFFFF FOD4 0028 OxFFFF FO
130. alculate Set Offset Offset Ensure that the Analog Input for this point is at its minimum value Close Gain Ensure that the Analog Input for this point is at its maximum value NOTE You must set the Offset first More gt gt PAC Manager User s Guide Legacy Edition CONFIGURING 1 0 MODULES AND POINTS 3 To have the offset and gain calculated for you do the following a Use a calibrator to input minimum scale on the analog input point for example 0 degrees F or C for a temperature input Click Offset then click the Set Offset button NOTE On a bipolar module for example 10 VDC to 10 VDC the minimum scale is always zero not a negative number b Use the calibrator to input maximum scale on the analog input Click Gain then click the Set Gain button 4 To manually set offset and gain do the following a Click the More button 5 Calibrate Analog Input Module 1 Point 0 Close NOTE You must set the Offset first lt lt Less Manually Set Offset 0 Gain 0 b Enter the Offset value Click the Set Offset button c Enter the Gain value Click the Set Gain button 5 When you have finished calibrating the point close the dialog box to return to configuring 1 0 points NOTE To store offset and gain values permanently you must save the change to flash when you send the configuration data to the I O unit see page 67 Configuring Serial Communication Modules Serial
131. alue check Force output and type the output values NOTE If both boxes are checked forced output and manual mode the output will be forced and the PID put into manual mode but if the PID is already in manual mode the output will not be forced Choose algorithm Velocity ISA Parallel Interacting See page 62 Choose Mode Auto activates the PID Manual requires that PAC Control logic or an operator control the PID output Enter a scan rate to determine how often the input is scanned and the controller output is calculated Minimum value is 0 001 1 millisecond Scan time should be greater than PAC Manager User s Guide Legacy Edition CONFIGURING PID LOOPS system lag the time it takes for the controller output to have a measurable effect on the system Also consider other PIDs and tasks on the 1 0 unit competing for processing power Enter a positive or negative value for Gain Heating systems usually require a negative value and cooling systems a positive value NOTE Gain is usually refined during the tuning process Optional Enter Feed Forward Initial and Feed Forward Gain values if you need to offset the controller output in your application These values are constants that are multiplied and added to the controller output often they are not used in PIDs Optional Enter Integral and Derivative settings if you know the desirable settings However Integral and Derivative are not essential to basic configuration and are be
132. ams Opto 22 gt PAC Project Software gt PAC Manager The PAC Manager main window opens Choose Tools Assign IP Address The following dialog box opens Any Opto 22 Ethernet based devices without IP addresses that are on the PC s network segment appear in the list of units requesting IP addresses 5 Assign IP Address Units Requesting IP Addresses Status MAC Address IP Address Subnet Mask Hostname Gateway Address DNS Discovered 00 40 3D 00 9D 75 OPTO 00 9d 75 lt gt Unit has been Discovered Add a Mapping for this Unit MAC To IP Address Mappings MAC Address IP Address Subnet Mask Hostname Gateway Address DNS Address Load List Close Help NOTE Ifno MAC address appears check the following Is the Opto 22 device turned on PAC Manager User s Guide Legacy Edition CHAPTER 2 CONFIGURING DEVICES Is it correctly connected to the PC using a crossover cable or correctly connected to an Ethernet hub using a straight through cable Is the PC on the same subnet as the device See its users guide for networking information Does the device already have an IP address If you want to change the IP address you can do so using the instructions on page 195 Is the device booting to the loader rather than the firmware See its user s guide for more information Does the PC have firewall software that blocks network broadcasts If so disable the software For Windows XP SP2 click Unblock at the Windows
133. ands to the Device 20 cceiaccecscceaectseceatcereceseceeeeteeterssereees Using Hardware Commands 5q c6a0tdrandedndensd evdasidatrieand ee etiiadebarah ids Saving to an 1 Unit s Flash Memory d lt succiaeveaticlnewandeiatueeeieelaeweetetaens Restarting the DEVIC Cs inn Gatinbempekannechoveeutiesssniwacwesartenakseomsoraeeed Resetting Points to Defaults sc 2044 iad ntavddadngevbavadaaeed Grd ea tueaniadawaand eds Sending a Powerup Clear lt sci garcia svowadudq perenne danedulaternoaniewwaeiwieaca Clearin Formatting g COMMCUIANGING essene E E E EEEE and Interpreting Data saavieaewaeausndeineedekawsranacerreaeivrawaenercawanne MaK DAI aae eera an E A E E OO A EA E ANRA M M ask Data for SNAP cc ic 2cenesvid on tte uate tncevne te tadengetdmimbaweadedarawidnads ASK Datan OFE TS reee tls Sat artelllie tec td Se leas ue oaea Unsigned 32 bit Integer Data 00 cece cece eee e eens tenet errare Digital Point Data 4 Channel Modules 0 0c c cc cececcccceeeceeeveeeeeeueeeeenees Digital Point Data for EIS 1 41 iacveddeapeseaecededendvennexaayesprveabosaaenaeeess 65 66 69 70 70 71 72 72 73 74 75 76 71 78 79 80 80 81 82 83 83 83 83 85 85 85 85 86 87 88 89 90 90 90 90 91 92 92 PAC Manager User s Guide Legacy Edition RW JEEEFlOdt Date a bannd nee ata e fees Ganed nena tana hosed bak fae 192 Analog Bank Datan ee eee ee ec eee 193 Chapter 6 Maintaini
134. ange of IP addresses may access the 1 0 unit enter a mask that reflects the subnet range For example if only IP address 1 2 3 4 may access the I O unit enter 1 2 3 4 as the filter address and 255 255 255 255 as the filter mask If any IP address that starts with 1 2 3 may access the I O unit enter 1 2 3 4 or 1 2 3 1 or any address in the range as the filter address and 255 255 255 0 as the filter mask PAC Manager User s Guide Legacy Edition SETTING UP SECURITY NOTE For troubleshooting purposes you can use the Broadcast Filter value to temporarily turn off incoming broadcasts to the 1 0 unit Normally you would NOT want to do this a BootP response for example is an incoming broadcast 9 When you have finished configuring security click OK 10 Configure other optional functions or return to the PAC Manager main window and click the Save button Hl to save the configuration file When you are ready to upload the configuration file to the I O unit see Sending Configuration Data to the I O Unit on page 67 Configuring Security on a Standalone Controller Since this procedure sends the configuration directly to the controller the controller must be on the same network as your PC 1 In the PAC Manager main window click the Inspect button Ql 5 Inspect 1 0 Unit IP Address 10 192 54 88 gt Port 2001 Timeout 1000 ms Status Status Read area last read at 10 09 06 15 02 38 Status Write Point Config
135. are and Nokia 31 GSM Connectivity Terminal are trademarks or registered trademarks of Nokia Corporation Sony is a trademark of Sony Corporation Ericsson is a trademark of Telefonaktiebolaget LM Ericsson All other brand or product names are trademarks or registered trademarks of their respective companies or organizations i PAC Manager User s Guide Legacy Edition Table of Contents Chapter 1 IntroGuctiont 6i6is406 44s iivisiees lt isstawieieussiadsiadeionaseas 1 PIOUS GUNE esee a E E uterus canara kor esedaa Genova bance 1 Produce covered ereak td Ver e ra a araa e a ced es 1 CON E E E E 2 normato KEY lt a 5 cic oadetadeladutmateiddutadedadubaduadddutetedaaulaetetddetetetaauins 2 Related Documentation s n ang ete dina aciiedtet isan nirre errereen rnnr rerne 3 PET tN dc eat a E E E A 3 Ethernet Based O Processor Comparison Catt cicasdcagaVeens aereenniadinta tie aeveenniadets 5 Chapter 2 Configuring Devices ssssssesssssssossecseseescesesee 9 Modu eee eee aa a e r a A N 9 When to Use PAC Manager and PAC Control cciscccccersacareuetsaeeeceraiactonenaaenaeenene 9 Config nng VO eierniie etnia EE E A OA E RA 10 Assigning DW IP Address simsimas a e aaa 10 About IP Addresses l tad Rig Mute rerrsrsrrrrrrrrrererrrrrrerreerrrene 10 Assigning IP Addresses to SNAP PAC UIO EIO and SIO onanan 11 Assigning IP Addresses to E1 and E2 0 Units n acckickeveada bade yadersie eer debe xaeerten 16 Discov
136. arm events o e Serial events 3 3 e Timed events 3 e Event messages o Data logging in the brain o I O point data mirroring 3 e J e Memory map data copying 6 PAC Manager User s Guide Legacy Edition CHAPTER 1 INTRODUCTION Scratch Pad area peer to peer communication Bits e e e o e e e e e Floats e e o e e e e Integers e e o e e e e Strings J J o e J J Realtime clock RTC o o oe o e o 1 Available with 4 channel SNAP digital modules not with high density digital modules 2 Available when used with PAC Control Professional 3 Available when used with PAC Control Professional and a SNAP PAC R or S series controller 4 Limited compatibility as an I O unit with PAC Control 5 Converts OptoControl strategies to PAC Control when used with PAC Control Professional 6 FTP client provided by PAC Control strategy 7 Applies to SNAP ENET RTC not to SNAP B3000 ENET PAC Manager User s Guide Legacy Edition ETHERNET BASED 1 0 PROCESSOR COMPARISON CHART Ei PAC Manager User s Guide Legacy Edition Configuring Devices Introduction Follow the steps in this chapter to assign an IP address to a SNAP PAC controller or to an Ethernet based I O unit SNAP PAC R series SNAP Ultimate SNAP Ethernet SNAP Simple E1 or E2 This chapter also includes steps for configuring O unit points and features The IP address is required for communication o
137. arm or low alarm set If analog point value Scratch Pad bit page 133 Engineering Units Now 2 Except data logging Configure Event Messages goes above or below a send message or data page 86 specified value Turn digital point on off Data logging Configure Data Logging and page 82 OR on different I O unit configure Email optional page 93 If digital counter OR reaches a specified Copy memory map data 1 Configure Alarm Events high alarm or low alarm set value OR Scratch Pad bit page 133 Log data 2 Configure Timers set time delay and set a Scratch Pad OR bit after timer expires page 138 Send message Aft 3 Email message only Configure Email page 93 a era stream email serial or delay Streaming only Configure Streaming page 98 SNMP trap SNMP only Configure SNMP page 90 4 Except data logging Configure Event Messages send message or data based on timer expired bit page 86 Data logging Configure Data Logging based on page 82 timer expired bit and configure Email optional page 93 PAC Manager User s Guide Legacy Edition CHAPTER 4 SETTING UP EVENTS AND REACTIONS 1 Configure Alarm Events deviation alarm set Scratch Now Pad bit page 133 Turn digital point on off 2 Configure Digital Events turn on off point page 128 on same I O unit 1 Configure Alarm Events deviation alarm set Scratch After a delay Pad bit page 133 2 Configure Tim
138. ation to I O Unit The Send Configuration dialog box appears Send Configuration to 1 0 Unit Name Description Address List Send 10 192 55 67 Bas Clear Flash Close Help MV Save to Flash Timeout msec l Restart 1 0 Unit 10000 The list on the left shows all the I O units in this configuration file When you click a unit the Address List shows the IP addresses for all I O units associated with the highlighted unit This is the address list you set up in the Add I O Unit dialog box shown on page 36 2 Highlight the 1 0 unit configuration s you want to send 3 Highlight the IP addresses to receive the I O unit configuration If you don t highlight any addresses the configuration will be sent to the entire list NOTE If you highlighted more than one unit configuration each unit configuration will automatically be sent to all the IP addresses associated with it 4 f necessary change the Timeout field The timeout field shows how long in milliseconds PAC Manager will try to communicate with the I O unit before returning a timeout error 5 To save the configuration file to flash memory as well as to RAM check Save to Flash To also restart the unit check Restart I O Unit IMPORTANT For the following configurations you must save to flash and restart the unit in order for configuration to take effect Changes in IP port for serial modules SNMP configuration Email configuration PPP configuration
139. be used for benchmarking Milliseconds Since Powerup2 Milliseconds since the last time the device was turned on TCP Minimum RTO msec TGP Initial RTO msec TCP Retransmits TCP Idle Session Timeout msec TCP communication settings see page 214 TCP Idle Session Timeout Count Number of times the device closed the session because it was idle Ethernet Errors Late Collisions Ethernet Errors Excessive Collisions Ethernet Errors Others Values other than 0 may indicate network problems See page 215 PAC Manager User s Guide Legacy Edition READING BASIC DEVICE INFORMATION Smart Modules Present PID Loops available Mask in hex showing location of analog serial high density digital and PID modules on the rack Module 15 is in bit position 15 mod ule 0 is in bit position 0 For help in understanding masks see Mask Data on page 190 PAC R PAC EB brains UIO and EIO only Maximum number of PID loops possible on the device 96 on PAC R 32 on PAC EB brains UIO 16 on ElO See page 61 Arcnet Reconfigs Detected Indicates that a smart module has been added removed or reset ARCNET is used on the rack for communication between the pro cessor and analog serial high density digital or PID modules NOTE If the rack contains only 4 channel digital modules ignore this value Arcnet Reconfigs Initiated by I O Unit 2 Error on t
140. bled from the drop down list Enter how often in seconds to send the email 0 sends it only once To send a message through a serial module to a serial device choose Enabled from the drop down list Enter a mask representing the modules and ports to receive the message To copy memory map data see page 103 To send an SNMP trap as the message choose Enabled from the drop down list Enter how often to send the trap 0 sends it only once Also enter the trap type determined by your SNMP management software If you are using SNMP with outgoing PPP and want the trap stored in the I O unit until the next communication set Priority to Low If you want the 1 0 unit to immediately dial out and send the trap set Priority to High NOTE SNMP messages must be acknowledged If the Period is set to more than zero the alarm will continue to be sent until the trap is acknowledged and the Scratch Pad trigger is reset to zero In PAC Control you can use the command Set I O Unit Event Message State to build the acknowledgment into the flowchart logic PAC Manager User s Guide Legacy Edition CHAPTER 3 CONFIGURING OPTIONAL FUNCTIONS In PAC Manager you can acknowledge the trap and reset the Scratch Pad by using Inspect Events Event Messages change State to Acknowledged and reset Scratch Pad bits 7 When all fields are correct click OK 8 When you have configured all event messages click Close 9 For each type of message you configure
141. bnet enter the Gateway router address If it will talk only on the local subnet leave the gateway address all zeros 0 0 0 0 Leave the DNS address at 0 0 0 0 When everything is correct click Change IP Settings PAC Manager User s Guide Legacy Edition 19 ASSIGNING AN IP ADDRESS After you confirm the change a message appears stating that the change was successful and that the I O unit will restart Restarting may take 10 to 20 seconds to finish Do not disturb the E1 or E2 while its STATUS LED is blinking When the STATUS LED stops blinking and stays on the device is ready for use with its new static IP address For future reference write the IP address on the white area on the brain board just below the MAC address Assigning a Static IP Address These steps assume that you have already tried to discover the E1 or E2 s IP address see page 16 and have not been able to find it out This situation indicates that there is no active DHCP server on the network and therefore the device does not yet have an IP address assigned 1 Make sure you know the MAC address of each device and the static IP address number and subnet mask to assign to it The MAC address is printed on a white area on the brain board Work with your network administrator to determine static IP addresses Make sure that PAC Manager software is installed on a PC on the same network as the brain board If PAC Manager is not open choose Start Progr
142. built in firewall in Windows XP is disabled before you try to work with files Firewalls in a router should not be a problem however Keep the following limitations in mind as you work with files on controllers 1 0 units Maximum length for filenames and directory names 127 characters Filename characters allowed All ASCII characters except null and Note some FTP client software may not allow spaces or specific characters Path name component separator Maximum number of files and directories that can be open simultaneously 16 Maximum directory depth Limited only by available memory Note PAC Manager reads only the root names files within folders are not listed Maximum number of files Limited only by available memory Each file uses 516 bytes of overhead plus its number of bytes rounded up to the nearest multiple of 516 bytes Maximum number of directories Limited only by available memory Each directory uses 516 bytes Maximum amount of memory available in the device s file system Approximately 2 5MB on a SNAP PAC S1 or 2 MB on a SNAP PAC R series or EB brain or Ultimate brain varies slightly depending on the device s firm ware version When using the SNAP device as an FTP server for example with an FTP client such as CuteFTP you can use an anonymous login The device ignores any user ID or password CAUTION Make sure you save files to flash memor
143. clamping Analog I O points Filter weight Watchdog timer Ramping SNAP high density digital modules wo SNAP analog modules with more than 4 channels Serial communication modules Ethernet network o o o Two independent Ethernet interfaces two IP addresses Two switched Ethernet interfaces one IP address Serial network RS 485 422 PAC Manager User s Guide Legacy Edition ETHERNET BASED I O PROCESSOR COMPARISON CHART Serial ports RS 232 for PPP or serial devices OptoMMP protocol over Ethernet Optomux protocol over Ethernet or serial Modbus TCP 3 3 e Runs PAC Control strategies Compatible with PAC Control using SNAP PAC 4 4 4 controller Runs ioControl strategies e o e Compatible with ioControl through SNAP 9 9 PAC SNAP LCE or SNAP Ultimate con e z troller running ioControl P Compatible with OptoControl through Opto 22 controller with Ethernet card UDP Streaming o o e e SNMP network management of I O amp variables e o o o J PPP dial up and radio modems e e e FTP server and client e e Email SMTP client o o e e e e OPC driver o o o o e o Security IP filtering port access o J PID logic on the brain o o o o e Number of PIDs available 96 96 16 32 32 Digital events o e e e Al
144. communication modules do not require configuration unless you need to change communication parameters such as port numbers or baud rates Because serial modules require no configuration they do not appear in the Configure 1 0 Points dialog box in PAC Manager you have to remember which positions on the I O unit are filled with serial modules For more information on serial modules see form 1191 the SNAP Serial Communication Module User s Guide NOTE For information on connecting a Windows serial application to a remote serial device through a SNAP Ethernet based system see the SNAP Serial Communication Module Users Guide Default port numbers are shown on page 155 Default communication parameters are e 1 start bit not configurable e 9600 baud 48 PAC Manager User s Guide Legacy Edition CHAPTER 2 CONFIGURING DEVICES No parity 8 data bits 1 stop bit No handshaking Send a test message when the module is turned on SNAP SCM 232 No flow control SNAP SCM 485 422 2 wire mode Port numbers and all parameters except the last two flow control and 2 or 4 wire mode can be changed in the I O unit s configuration file using the following steps For flow control and 2 or 4 wire mode see the steps on page 50 1 With the configuration file open right click the name of the I O unit the serial module is on From the pop up menu choose Configure The Configure I O Units dialog box opens Configure 1 0 Units Name
145. configuration file When you are ready to upload the configuration file to the I O unit see Sending Configuration Data to the I O Unit on page 67 See the SNAP Ethernet Based I O Units User s Guide or the SNAP PAC R Series Controller Users Guide for information on attaching the modem to the system and setting up Windows dial up networking or remote access server on the PC PAC Manager User s Guide Legacy Edition Setting Up Events and Reactions Introduction PAC R EB UIO EIO Events and reactions are automatic responses to conditions monitored by SNAP PAC SNAP Ultimate and SNAP Ethernet 1 0 units E1 E2 and SNAP Simple 1 0 units do not support this feature The monitored conditions called events and the responses to them called reactions can be simple or complex An example of a simple event reaction is turning on a fan in response to a rise in temperature Complex event reactions may involve multiple events and multiple reactions with a time delay in between For example you could set up a temperature limit as an event that triggers a warning light and a higher temperature limit as an event that sets off an audible alarm and sends an email message CAUTION Event reactions you set up using these instructions in this chapter operate on the I O side ofa SNAP PAC R series or SNAP Ultimate controller independently of any PAC Control strategy running on the processor s control side If you are using PAC Control with
146. configured in PAC Control What is a PID PID loops or simply PIDs are used to drive an input process variable toward a particular value the setpoint and keep the input very close to that value by controlling an output For example consider temperature control where the input is a measurement of ambient temperature the setpoint is the desired temperature and the output is a heater A PID will use a mathematical formula a gorithm that controls the output to maintain a desired temperature efficiently adjust to changes in setpoint and compensate for changes in load such as the influx of cold air In this example a temperature sensor analog input a thermostat analog input and a heater control analog output are components of one system controlled by a PID loop This guide assumes that you are already familiar with using PIDs PID calculations are complex and the physical qualities of systems suitable for PID control differ greatly This guide includes only basic information for configuring PIDs on SNAP Ethernet based I O units SNAP PAC R series I O units support 96 PID loops per I O unit SNAP PAC EB I O units support 32 PID loops per I O unit Analog digital SNAP Ultimate I O units support 32 PID loops per I O unit and SNAP Ethernet I O units support 16 SNAP Simple I O units do not have PID capability These PIDs can control isolated systems or be part of cascaded systems where one loop controls the setpoints or input variabl
147. ct click OK 7 Configure other optional functions or return to the PAC Manager main window and click the Save button Hl to save the configuration file When you are ready to upload the configuration file to the I O unit see Sending Configuration Data to the I O Unit on page 67 100 PAC Manager User s Guide Legacy Edition CHAPTER 3 CONFIGURING OPTIONAL FUNCTIONS Mirroring I O Point Data PAC R _ Mirroring I O point data is a way to automatically change all the points on one 1 0 unit to match all EB UIO EIO the points on another I O unit A simple example of mirroring is controlling whether lights in one facility are on or off by having them mirror the on or off status of switches in another facility Mirroring reads the current analog bank values in Engineering Units and the current digital bank status 4 channel digital modules only not high density digital modules of the points on a system and writes the data to the same point numbers on a second system The reading and writing occurs as often as you specify In our lighting system example the status of switches in Facility A could be read every minute and automatically written to the lights in Facility B When someone turns on the switches in Facility A the lights in Facility B would automatically be turned on within a minute It s generally not a good idea to use both mirroring and streaming on the same 1 0 unit If you do use both streaming target 1 will rec
148. d lower clamp are set in engineering units Use the PAC Manager Inspect window to set clamp values see Configuring I O Modules Points and Features on page 158 Average Filter Weight Analog Points SNAP Ethernet based I O units can use a filter weight to smooth analog input signals that are erratic or change suddenly The formula used for filtering is Y X Y W Y where Y is the filtered value PAC Manager User s Guide Legacy Edition USING 1 0 POINT FEATURES X is the new unfiltered value and W is the filter weight The following graph shows the effect of filter weights W 2 5 and 10 ona step input signal Y X Y W Y Filter Response for Different values of W As this graph shows the larger the filter weight W you use the smoother the analog signal Input 2 4 5 x 10 A filter weight of zero turns off the calculation Values less than or equal to 0 5 are changed to zero since those values would cause an unstable signal Filtering is applied to values that are in engineering units including minimum and maximum values Filtering does not apply to values that are in counts Set filter weight when configuring the analog point Use the PAC Manager Inspect window to set filter weight see Configuring I O Modules Points and Features on page 158 If you are using PAC Control you can also set filter weight in your control strategy u
149. ddress and the subnet mask B Enter the maximum number of times a login password combination can be retried C Ifyou want outgoing PPP to always be connected so there is no need for the I O unit to dial out check this box D Change the modem initialization string and modem hangup string if necessary Make sure you use the setting to ignore DTR signal in the modem initialization string The default modem initialization string is atspo m Consult the command reference that came with your modem to determine the correct initialization command strings A sample modem initialization string might look like this AT amp F M AT amp DO amp KO M AT amp WO M AT amp Y0 M The amp F command sets the modem back to factory defaults The M tells the Ethernet I O unit to insert a carriage return The tells it to insert a 500ms pause The amp WO writes the current settings to NVRAM profile 0 on the modem The amp Y0 instructs the modem to use NVRAM profile 0 after resetting This initialization string is just a sample command strings for your modem may differ E Ifthe I O unit will send outgoing calls complete the Outgoing PPP section Choose Enabled from the drop down list PAC Manager User s Guide Legacy Edition CHAPTER 3 CONFIGURING OPTIONAL FUNCTIONS In the Use Local IP Address field choose Yes to have the I O unit use the Local IP Address you entered for the PPP link choose No to have the remote device assign the 1 0 u
150. ddress information from this dialog box To change the address use Tools Change IP Settings See page 195 8 Now click Set Static IP to make the IP address static The address information is saved to flash memory and the status changes to Static IP PAC Manager User s Guide Legacy Edition CHAPTER 2 CONFIGURING DEVICES 9 To verify that the IP address has been successfully assigned highlight the device in the upper list and click Test A DOS window opens and the IP address is automatically contacted using the PING program You should see a reply similar to the following cx C WINDOWS system32 cmd exe Pinging 18 192 55 68 with 32 bytes of data Reply from 10 192 55 60 bytes 32 time ims TTL 64 Reply from 10 192 55 60 bytes 32 time lt ims TTL 64 Reply from 10 192 55 60 bytes 32 time lt ims TTL 64 Reply from 10 192 55 60 bytes 32 time lt ims TTL 64 Ping statistics for 10 192 55 60 Packets Sent 4 Received 4 Lost lt loss Approximate round trip times in milli seconds Minimum ms Maximum ims Average ms Press any key to continue If you don t see a reply make sure the subnet mask you ve assigned matches the subnet mask on your PC 10 For future reference write the IP address in the white space on the brain board The E1 or E2 brain board is now ready for use with a static IP address 11 Repeat steps 4 through 10 for any other brain boards in the list that you are responsib
151. down list or type a new point name To control setpoint using PAC Control or PAC Display select Host and enter an initial value If another PID loop will control the setpoint select PID Output and choose the PID from the dropdown list Choose the destination for the PID output 1 0 Point or Host To use the output for controlling the setpoint or input of another PID choose Host Enter upper and lower clamp values to prevent the output from exceeding a desirable range These values should equal the range of the output point if used Or choose values to make sure that the output device doesn t shut off for example keeping a circulation pump running regardless of the PID output or that the output never reaches a destructively high setting for example keeping a motor below maximum Optional Enter minimum and maximum change values The output won t respond until the minimum change is reached for example you may not want a heater to turn on to correct a 1 degree error Maximum change prevents too drastic a change in output for example you could limit the increase in a pump s output to prevent pipe breakage The default for both minimum and maximum is zero which disables the feature Choose how the PID should respond if the input goes out of range If no boxes are checked the PID will freeze output at the current value To have PAC Control logic or an operator respond check Switch to manual mode To force the output to a specific v
152. e Max Digital Scantime msec Max Analog Scantime msec Scanner Flags Secondary IP Address Secondary Subnet Mask Operation Commands None Send powerup clear Send Command r Reset to defaults and Restart 1 0 Unit ms Status Status Write area last read at 10 11 06 10 35 45 Refresh Apply No Degrees C 0 250 3000 5 240000 1000 1000 Ox 00000000 10 192 255 5 255 255 192 0 Store configuration to flash Erase configuration from flash Restart 170 Unit from powerup Switch to loader mode Clear digital event configuration Clear alarm configuration Clear PPP configuration Clear e mail configuration DataLog gt PID gt Events gt Communications gt Clear timer configuration Clear PID configuration Clear datalog 4 Click Send Command The configuration data is stored to flash memory and a Success message appears Restarting the Device Restarting the device is just like turning the power off and then turning it back on again This command can be used for both 1 0 units and controllers For an I O unit if configuration data has not been saved to flash memory restarting resets points to their defaults For some configurations to take effect the device must be restarted A SNAP PAC controller must be restarted after you configure its secondary IP address for example For an I O unit if you are using a configuration file as in most of Chapters 2 3 and 4 you can choose to resta
153. e TCP Minimum Retransmission Timeout msec TCP Initial Retransmission Timeout msec TCP Retransmission Attempts TCP Idle Session Timeout msec 0 Disable Max Digital Scantime msec Max Analog Scantime msec Scanner Flags Secondary IP Address Secondary Subnet Mask Operation Commands Send Command Reset to defaults and Restart 1 0 Unit Store configuration to flash Erase configuration from flash Restart 1 0 Unit from powerup Switch to loader mode Clear digital event configuration Clear alarm configuration Clear PPP configuration Clear e mail configuration Clear timer configuration Clear PID configuration ms Status Status Write area last read at 01 30 07 12 41 59 Refresh No Degrees C Apply 0 250 3000 5 240000 0 0 Ox 00000000 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 5 Click Send Command The port configuration data is stored to flash memory and a Success message appears Configuring PPP Use this section only if you have SNAP PAC SNAP Ultimate or SNAP Ethernet I O units installed at remote locations or in other places where an Ethernet network is not available and you are using modems to communicate between the device and a PC You can set up communication so that the PAC R EB UIO EIO device can dial in to a PC so that PCs can dial into the device or both NOTE Ifyou are using PPP with a SNAP PAC S series controller see instructions in the controller user s guide PAC Manager User s Guide
154. e 103 for details Digital Point and Scratch Pad Masks Both events and reactions are in the form of a mask Digital point masks represent the 64 possible digital I O points on a 16 module rack of 4 channel digital modules Scratch Pad masks represent whatever you decide each bit should be For each digital event reaction you set up eight masks four for the event and four for the reaction For the event e Digital points that must be on e Digital points that must be off e Scratch Pad bits that must be on Scratch Pad bits that must be off For the reaction e Digital points that should be turned on e Digital points that should be turned off e Scratch Pad bits that should be turned on Scratch Pad bits that should be turned off PAC Manager User s Guide Legacy Edition CHAPTER 4 SETTING UP EVENTS AND REACTIONS The masks work as a group All the event masks must be a match for the I O unit to send the reaction If it doesn t matter whether a specific point or bit is on or off leave its value at zero in both the on mask and the off mask When you configure events and reactions the masks are in hex notation If you are setting up a Digital On mask for points 0 7 for example you might do so as follows Module position 1 0 Point number 3 2 1 0 3 2 1 0 State On On On On Binary notation 1 0 1 1 0 0 0 1 Hex notation B 1 For m
155. e 80 for instructions to limit protocol access Requiring a Password for FTP You can configure security so that anyone who wants to access the device using FTP is required to enter a username and password See instructions in Configuring Security on an I O Unit on page 77 or Configuring Security on a Standalone Controller on page 80 Protecting a PAC Control Strategy from Interference You can set up a standalone or on the rack controller to run a stable strategy without the possibility of interference from a host This means that no one can alter or stop the strategy using PAC Control or PAC Terminal but it also means that PAC Display cannot communicate with the control engine To protect a PAC Control strategy from interference finalize the strategy download it save it to flash memory and set the autorun flag see the PAC Control User s Guide for steps Then follow steps in the next section to change the Control Engine port number from the default of 22001 to zero and save that setting to flash as well The strategy will automatically run when power is turned on but a host cannot communicate with it If you need to change the Control Engine port number back to 22001 you can do so in PAC Manager because PAC Manager uses the OptoMMP protocol to communicate with the controller Configuring Security on an I O Unit Use these steps for an I O unit For a SNAP PAC S series standalone controller use the steps on page 80 1 I
156. e click it to open it 3 PAC Manager Main_Process SEE File Edit Tools View Help oala xaje B wl of EE Main_Process SEE etree Ey YO units Sl Line mA Preprocess PAC Manager User s Guide Legacy Edition CHAPTER 3 CONFIGURING OPTIONAL FUNCTIONS 3 In the configuration tree right click the name of the I O unit on which you want to set up data logging and choose Configure from the pop up menu 3 Configure 1 0 Units Name Type Pot Address Watchdog Ref Count Desc Add Line_1 SNAP E ETHER Enabled 0 Preprocess SNAP P ETHER 10 1925 Enabled 5 Modify Delete Import Copy 170 Points PID Loops Modules gt Events Scratch Pad gt gt Communications gt Others Hep Others gt button 4 Click the Others button and choose Data Logging from the pop up menu 5 Configure Data Logging Log Point Number fo M Used Since emails Address Description vawe A include values E MAIL from all memory OxFFFF F300 0700 E mail Enabled for all data logging map addresses OxFFFF F300 0704 Number of Datalog entries per E mail P d TRIGGER set up for data OxFFFF F300 0000 Trigger ON Ox 0000000 oo000000 logging entries in OxFFFF F300 0008 Trigger OFF Ox 00000000 oo000000 LOGGING this section apply OxFFFF F300 0010 Address of value to log Ox F0A00000 toall datalogging OxFFFF F300 0014 Data Format Float 0
157. e configured click OK to close the dialog box and return to configuring I O units IMPORTANT If you have changed an IP Port number you must save the change to flash and restart the 1 0 unit when you send the configuration data to the I O unit see page 67 PAC R Configuring PID Modules T NOTE This section is for PID modules These modules are not recommended for new development EIO Instead use the PID loops provided on the I O unit itself SNAP PAC R series I O units provide 96 PID loops SNAP Ultimate I O units provide 32 SNAP Ethernet I O units provide 16 See page 61 To configure PID modules you will also need Opto 22 form 1263 the SNAP PID Module User s Guide available on our Web site at www opto22 com 1 In the Configure 1 0 Points dialog box double click the number that represents the PID module s position on the rack 2 In the Add Module dialog box choose Analog Input as the type and then choose SNAP PID V as the module Click OK The module appears in the Configure I O Points dialog box 3 Close the Configure 1 0 Points dialog box and return to the Configure 1 0 Units dialog box Choose one of the following ways to enter PID values and set parameters for a SNAP PID V module Ifyou want to iteratively tune a PID loop use OptoENET PID Module Tuner This software includes graphing features and is available free from the Opto 22 Web site See the PID module user s guide for instructions do NOT continue with t
158. e to that value by controlling an output PID loops are often used in temperature control page 61 Average filter weight analog inputs A filter weight smooths analog input signals that are erratic or change suddenly page 73 PAC Manager User s Guide Legacy Edition 69 USING 1 0 POINT FEATURES I O point features are discussed in the following sections States Digital Points You can read the ON or OFF state of a digital input point or write to a digital output point to turn it on or off For E1 brain boards each point on the unit is treated like the first point on a SNAP module that is only the first of every four points contains data For more information on interpreting data formats see page 45 Latches Digital Points SNAP Latching is available on both 4 channel and high density digital points It is automatic and needs no configuration Using PAC Control digital point commands you can read the on latch or off latch state of a digital point and you can clear latches E1 Latching is available on all modules used with the E1 Note that latching is different on an E1 depending on the protocol used with the brain board When the E1 is used with the Optomux protocol only one latch is available and you must configure it to be an on to off latch or an off to on latch When you use an E1 with PAC Control or OptoMMP however both types of latches are automatically available for each po
159. ears Sending a Powerup Clear The powerup clear command clears a flag that indicates the 1 0 unit has lost and then regained power Normally a powerup clear command is automatically sent so normally you won t need to use this command If you receive a powerup clear error message however you can use PAC Manager to send the command Note that a power loss means that any configuration data not stored to the I O unit s flash memory has been lost 1 In the PAC Manager main window click the Inspect button Ql 2 Inthe IP Address field type the IP address of the I O unit Click Status Write 3 In the Operation Command list highlight Send powerup clear 4 Click Send Command The powerup clear is sent and a Success message appears PAC Manager User s Guide Legacy Edition CHAPTER 5 READING AND WRITING TO SPECIFIC DEVICES Clearing Configurations You can use PAC Manager to clear the following configurations I O point features digital events alarm events timers email PID loops and PPP Note that some of these features do not apply to some devices See the feature chart on page 5 1 In the PAC Manager main window click the Inspect button al 2 Inthe IP Address field type the IP address of the I O unit Click Status Write 3 Inspect 1 0 Unit IP Address fi 0 192 55 67 Status Write Status Read Status Write Point Config Digital Bank Digital Point Analog Bank Analog Point OxFFFF F038 0004 OxFFFF
160. ecalculates the RTO based on recent network traffic If the network becomes busier for example the stack automatically adjusts the RTO to a higher value Ifthe TCP IP stack times out while trying to transmit data it doubles the current RTO and tries again This process continues for five retries after that the device stops trying and sends a timeout message If you are receiving frequent timeout messages from the device you can change the TCP parameters in PAC Manager 1 Choose Start Programs Opto 22 PAC Project Software gt PAC Manager 2 In the PAC Manager main window click the Inspect icon Ql 3 Inthe IP Address field type the IP address of the controller or I O unit Click Status Write 3 Inspect 1 0 Unit IP Address 10 192 55 67 r Status Write Status Read w Port 2001 Timeout 1000 ms Status Status Write area last read at 10 11 06 12 26 56 Description z Address __ Status Wite eine OsFFFF F038 0004 Point Config Digital Bank Digital Point Analog Bank Analog Point High Density OxFFFF F038 0008 OxFFFF F038 0010 OxFFFF F038 0014 OxFFFF F038 0018 OxFFFF F038 001C OxFFFF F038 0020 OxFFFF F038 004C OxFFFF F038 0050 OxFFFF F038 0054 OxFFFF FFFF F050 OxFFFF FFFF F058 Always BootP DHCP On Powerup Degrees F C Comm Watchdog Time msec 0 Disable TCP Minimum Retransmission Timeout msec TCP Initial Retransmission Timeout msec TCP Retransmission Attempts TCP Idle Session Ti
161. ed because the default for that module is 100 Ohm Platinum 3 wire RTDs 200 to 850 C Point types for analog modules are shown in the tables beginning on page 162 Default point types are indicated PAC Manager User s Guide Legacy Edition CHAPTER 5 READING AND WRITING TO SPECIFIC DEVICES Digital only SNAP Ethernet based brains and E1 brain boards The brain or brain board assumes that all points are digital input points You must configure all digital output points with point type 180 E2 brain boards You must configure point types for all points on the rack Follow the instructions in Opto 22 form 1576 1 0 Configuration for E1 and E2 Brain Boards If points are not configured following the steps in form 1576 points on E2s will return only nan nota value Point types are shown in the tables beginning on page 162 Point Features Requiring Configuration Point features vary based on the processor and the module The following point features are not automatic and must be configured for each point that uses them e High speed digital input counters and quadrature counters e Digital and analog watchdogs e Analog scaling clamping offset and gain and average filter weight See Using I O Point Features on page 68 for a description of features Configuring Analog and Digital Points and Features NOTE To configure E1 and E2 1 0 units see Opto 22 form 1576 Technical Note I O Configuration for E1 and
162. ed to a serial device do the following a Inthe Control Function for Communication Port value field choose None from the drop down list b In the Logging for Communication Port field leave the value field set to Disabled This log file is used for PPP or M2M troubleshooting When the control function is set to None the log file logs only characters received by the PAC Control strategy Since PAC Control is handling the data you don t need the log file 3 When you have finished configuring the ports click Apply Configuration data is sent to the controller gg PAC Manager User s Guide Legacy Edition CHAPTER 3 CONFIGURING OPTIONAL FUNCTIONS 4 Click the Status Write button on the left side of the Inspect window In the Operation Command list highlight Store configuration to flash 3 Inspect 1 0 Unit IP Address 10 192 56 241 Status Write Status Read ewe Point Config Digital Bank Digital Point Analog Bank Analog Point High Density System Scratch Pad gt DataLog gt PID Events gt Communications gt Other gt OKFFFF F038 0004 OxFFFF F038 0008 OxFFFF F038 0010 OvFFFF F038 0014 OxFFFF F038 0018 OxFFFF F038 001C OxFFFF F038 0020 OxFFFF F038 004C OxFFFF F038 0050 OxFFFF F038 0054 OxFFFF FFFF F050 OxFFFF FFFF F058 None Clear datalog w Port 2001 Timeout 1000 Send powerup clear Always BootP DHCP On Powerup Degrees F C Comm Watchdog Time msec 0 Disabl
163. ee of these items should have a value of zero If any of these items has a value other than zero you may have a network problem PAC Manager User s Guide Legacy Edition Index A accessing data log 84 address assigning IP address 10 to multiple devices 23 alarm clearing configuration 189 configuring 134 183 description 133 trigger 134 types 133 algorithms for PIDs 62 analog bank data format 192 reading 174 analog module data format 193 analog point average filter weight 69 73 bipolar 72 calibrating 47 clamping 69 73 configuring 42 158 features 72 gain 69 maximum value 69 minimum value 69 minimum maximum value 73 offset 69 offset and gain 47 73 reading 172 scaling 45 69 72 unipolar 72 viewing data 158 watchdog 69 72 PAC Manager User s Guide Legacy Edition writing to 172 assigning IP address 10 23 average filter weight 69 73 C calibrating analog point 47 69 changing I O points automatically 101 IP address 195 clamping analog output point 69 73 clearing configuration 189 configuration data from flash memory 68 data log 85 file from 1 0 unit 208 files from flash memory 208 resetting points to defaults 187 communicating with 1 0 unit assigning IP address 10 monitoring communication 72 communicating with processor IP address 10 communication dial up 117 modem 117 PPP 117 community groups 90 configuration file 32 adding
164. egies PAC Control Command Reference 1701 PAC Control Commands Quick Reference Card 1703 Serial communication modules SNAP Serial Communication Module User s Guide 1191 High density digital modules SNAP High Density Digital Module User s Guide 1547 Legacy Hardware and Software E1 and E2 User s Guide 1563 E1 or E2 brain board Optomux Protocol Guide 1572 OptoMMP Protocol Guide 1465 ee SNAP Ethernet Based I O Units User s Guide 1460 SNAP Ethernet I O OptoMMP Protocol Guide 1465 SNAP Simple I O P ioControl User s Guide 1300 ioControl strategies ioControl Command Reference 1301 ioControl Commands Quick Reference Card 1314 Some of this documentation is on the CD that came with your hardware all forms are available on our website www opto22 com for downloading The easiest way to find one is to search on the form number If you have problems installing or using PAC Manager and cannot find the help you need in this guide or on our website contact Opto 22 Product Support PAC Manager User s Guide Legacy Edition FOR HELP Phone 800 TEK OPTO 835 6786 951 695 3080 NOTE Email messages and Hours are Monday through Friday phone calls to Opto 22 7 a m to 5 p m Pacific Time Product Support are grouped together and Fax 951 695 3017 answered in the order Email support opto22 com eae Opto 22 website www opto22 com When calling for technical support be prepared to provide the following information about your sy
165. egy can also FTP files to one or more other I O units or controllers e PAC Manager s main advantage for file management over other commercially available FTP client software is that it can work with multiple devices at once for example sending data via FTP to ten I O units at the same time or deleting the same file from multiple 1 0 units PAC Manager User s Guide Legacy Edition CHAPTER 6 MAINTAINING DEVICES simultaneously Although PAC Manager can read the names of only the folders and files at the root of the device s file system not the names of files within folders it can do most operations on any file within the file system For example it can delete a file within a folder Newer versions of Windows Explorer can be used for FTP operations with a single controller or I O unit It s easy to drag and drop files and folders to the device and you can see the complete file structure You may find that data isn t always refreshed correctly Other FTP software products you can download may be more reliable than Windows Explorer they also may give you extra features like communication details which are useful for debugging Some may not support filenames with spaces or other specific characters They work with one device at a time You can also use a command prompt for FTP again with one device at a time e Note that FIP cannot be used through a firewall in the PC Make sure any firewall in the computer such as the
166. eive both mirroring and streaming packets the streaming packets are ignored but they unnecessarily add to network traffic NOTE Due to the size limit of the mirroring packet mirroring for digital points occurs on the first 32 points of the I O unit only points on the modules in positions 0 7 Mirroring cannot be used with high density digital modules Follow these steps to set up I O point data mirroring 1 In the PAC Manager main window click the Open button or choose File Open 2 In the Open Tag Database dialog box navigate to the configuration file and double click it to open it 3 PAC Manager Main_Process Sle File Edit Tools view Help ielaj xaa A Bi of Main_Process BAR YO units aAA Line oo Preprocess PAC Manager User s Guide Legacy Edition 101 MIRRORING I O POINT DATA 3 In the configuration tree right click the name of the I O unit on which you want to set up mirroring and choose Configure from the pop up menu 3 Configure 1 0 Units Type Port Address Watchdog Ref Count Desc Add SNAP E ETHER 10 192 5 Enabled 0 SNAP P ETHER 10 192 5 Enabled 5 Modify Delete Import Copy 170 Points PID Loops Modules gt Events Scratch Pad gt gt Communications gt Communications Help Others button 4 Make sure the correct I O unit is highlighted in the list Click the Communications button and ch
167. em Configure EIO the event message in the source system the one you are copying from but make sure that any points you are affecting on the destination system are configured to accept the data 1 Follow the steps in Configuring Event Messages on page 86 until you reach the Add Event Message dialog box 5 Add Event Message 40 A Message Name B Message Text me Streaming SNMP Trap Disabled n Period sec Disabled ai E mail Period sec Disabled v Period sec Trap Type fo Serial Module Priority o v Disabled v Serial Ports Mask Ox Cc MemMap Copy Destination Disabled v MemMap Address Ox Period msec IP ddress IP Port Cancel Help 2 Complete the fields as follows A Enter a descriptive name for the message In the Message Text section enter a plugin containing the memory map address you are writing from the source address in the following format B_F0B00000_ ri Ta Data a indicates the start of the plugin format Address _ indicates the end of the plugin PAC Manager User s Guide Legacy Edition CONFIGURING MODBUS OPTIONS B The data format indicator in the plugin can be any of the following but B is typically used for memory map copying D Integer B Binary F Float S String C Inthe MemMap Copy Destination area choose Enabled from the drop down list Enter the Memory Map Address you are copying to the destination address as an eig
168. emory Map Addresses 0c cccc cece cece ireren rnnr 82 Configuring Data Logging S 2 cacici cancaeaesdavin ataaaawie noackiae eiasces Racghakinkens 82 Reading the Data logs 5 an0a qd eeenciaarnenbaund enrieteladeiered Ho tideadateuei sae 84 Clearing All Data from the Log usrcauraacewihisarenanw here dwwnw dain xaewieaekundadeke satoedaaesd 85 Configuring Event Messages peeresegeectrei perre ania e a Garou nee rane eeeeS 86 USIMGS reeni e e a a a a aa a ea 1 89 Examples Including Data from Memory Map Addresses 0 0 cccscecceeeeeeeee eeu 89 Sending Binary Data in Event Messages cccccesceceeeseseeensecenseeeseuatess 90 COMI GUNG SNMP 4 wnt icumtasineeeteuatoneeh event erie e O feverernese 90 SNMP ITAS EE AE EE E AEA ae oa E E abies oe 90 SNMP Access PIVIGURS 20 nares evanddanioesaalcio anur neran rrur rennir rnern rnn 90 Configuring the SNMP ROCs sncecntceedinneaneedoeraervede dons ganteeiebeneiareinace 91 COMIC UNG Sea et casas doe ctl te eee e acer dMcs anand bea aatdl it son aed bema neal 93 Setting Up Initial Values in the Scratch Pad Area 00 ccc cece cece cece eens ee eeeeeeennnes 95 Serate Pad BII es aeaiia o a a A AAAA AAE A AA 97 Scratch Pad Integers Floats or Stings ocnisnccrntepeaceniepixpiecversndereakingavenaes 97 Configuring Streaming 7 4 onus waeinaie iedawscaapelnbinal invaatnandeaeanaeaeddwacandedwanning 98 Mirroring 1 0 POMC eG a geleres mice dup iving te iyeie cnan said adresse etd teehee E E
169. en it 3 PAC Manager Main_Process SEE File Edit Tools View Help ajaja xaa BJ E o Main_Process ABR Yo units HAN Line aAA Preprocess In the configuration tree right click the name of the I O unit on which you want to set up SNMP and choose Configure from the pop up menu For a SNAP PAC S series controller if it does not already appear in the list add it as an I O unit of the type Generic OptoMMP Device 5 Configure 1 0 Units Name Ref Count Desc Add Line_1 SNAP E ETHER 10 1925 Enabled 0 mocess SNAP P ETHER 10 1925 Enabled 5 Modify Delete Import Copy 1 0 Points PID Loops Modules gt Events Scratch Pad gt L2 Communications gt Communications Others gt button PAC Manager User s Guide Legacy Edition 91 CONFIGURING SNMP 4 Make sure the correct I O unit is highlighted in the list Click the Communications button and choose SNMP from the pop up menu 5 Configure SNMP Agent System Traps Ssa O O vesim vt Trap F SysLocation SS Destination Port 162 G P Authentication Trap H SysContact Cold Start Trap o AU D Community Groups l Sting Pead Write Tap Community Sting Host IP Address Cancel Help 5 Complete the fields as follows A A G Enter the name assigned to the I O unit as a managed node within the SNMP management
170. er go below this value Initial RTO sets the RTO for the first communication try Be careful since all future tries are based on this value if you set it too low for network conditions a connection will never be made TCP Retransmits sets the number of times the device retries communication Larger busier networks need a higher number of retransmits than smaller networks with less traffic TCP idle session timeout sets how long in milliseconds the device allows a session to remain open without any activity After this time the device checks the session to make sure it is still good and closes it if it is not The default is 240 000 milliseconds or four minutes 5 Click the Apply button to write your changes to the controller or I O unit 6 In the Operation Commands list highlight Store configuration to flash Click Send Command 7 Inthe Operation Commands list highlight Restart brain from powerup Click Send Command The new TCP parameters are set Checking Ethernet Errors If you are having problems communicating with the controller or I O unit follow troubleshooting suggestions in the user s guide for the device You can use PAC Manager to check Ethernet errors reported by the SNAP device not E1 and E2 1 0 units These errors indicate network problems You will need to know the device s IP address 1 Choose Start gt Programs Opto 22 4PAC Project Software gt PAC Manager 2 In the PAC Manager main window click
171. ering the IP Address 3 ccuindrc sh acts mea pacawneaegmokinhcpeaneitacumekianens 16 Changing the IP Address to a Static IP lt a sscsswectiaeedideiaiesietiieaeimienaeta 19 Assigning a Static IP Address o n rererere 20 Assigning IP Addresses to Multiple Devices 2 20 0 0ccccc cece cence esse eee enaeenneees 23 Creating the Map File sori ssi canny dante end s tita Tan eg A aan eee asadied 23 Assigning Addresses from the Map File n 27 Assigning a Secondary IP Address SNAP PAC Controller Only 0 0 0c eee eee ee 28 Creating an 1 0 Unit Configuration File 22 civseiacedcsnecandsianawnebearacakesd sagnnckwanned 32 Creating a New Configuration File lt 2s wutnauncawinntsiaenscadntawioa sateiineeeouwinee ys 33 Copying a Configuration to Another I O Unit n 34 PAC Manager User s Guide Legacy Edition ii Creating a Configuration File from Another Strategy 00 00 ccc ece cece eee cece e eens 35 Adding ai UIC 2 Sn pcgenwemsacqumahovaeinneeertunundoieniuaterew EEA 36 Configuring 1 0 Modules and Points cre itd ee cect ecree aed Rees oxedleomeatee nen petal eae 39 Configuring SNAP Digital Points y5 40ciimedreqdangeradediadseqieedraeieaicdaimadts 39 Configuring Analog PONG sesssesirnierosieteinsei ininde e ia 42 Using Custom Scaling ais na ae a anA 45 Calibrating Offsetand Gain 34 4152ceracatierauaxndcawataracaieend aaa watniaraieun 47 Configuring Serial Communication Modules
172. ers turn on off point page 138 1 Configure Alarm Events deviation alarm set Scratch Pad bit page 133 2 Except data logging Configure Event Messages If analog point value Now oa message or data page 86 Engineering Units or Turn digital point on off Data logging Configure Data Logging and configure page 82 quadrature counter on different I O unit Email optional page 93 goes outside an allow OR able range Copy memory map data 1 Configure Alarm Events deviation alarm set Scratch OR Pad bit page 133 Log data 2 Configure Timers set time delay and set a Scratch Pad OR bit after timer expires page 138 Send message Aftera 3 Email message only Configure Email page 93 stream email serial or delay Streaming only Configure Streaming page 98 SNMP trap SNMP only Configure SNMP page 90 4 Except data logging Configure Event Messages send message or data based on timer expired bit page 86 Data logging Configure Data Logging based on page 82 timer expired bit and configure Email optional page 93 Now 1 Configure Serial Events set Scratch Pad bit page 136 Turn digital point on off 2 Configure Digital Events turn on off point page 128 on same I O unit Aftera 1 Configure Serial Events set Scratch Pad bit page 136 delay 2 Configure Timers turn on off point page 138 1 Configure Serial Events send SNMP trap Now 2 Configure SNMP page 126 1 Configure Serial Events set Scratch Pad bit page 136 Se
173. es of others NOTE On SNAP PAC R series and SNAP Ultimate PID loops run on the I O side independent of any PAC Control strategy Once it starts running a PID continues running until the I O unit loses power or the PID is set to Manual Ifyou subsequently download a different strategy to the control engine you ll receive an error message 700 reminding you that a PID loop is still running and that it may conflict with the new stragegy To turn off the PID loop use Inspect mode in PAC Manager to change the PIDs algorithm to None Each PID must be configured with essential parameters and then individually tuned for efficiency You can configure PIDs through either PAC Manager or PAC Control For tuning PIDs it s easier to use the graphic tuning tools in PAC Control see Opto 22 form 1700 the PAC Control User Guide NOTE PID capabilities in SNAP Ethernet I O units are compatible with PAC Control but not with OptoControl If you are not using PAC Control it is possible to configure and tune PIDs through the I O unit s memory map The memory map is in form 1465 the OptoMMP Protocol Guide For additional help with PIDs see Opto 22 form 1641 Opto Tutorial SNAP PAC PID PAC Manager User s Guide Legacy Edition 61 CONFIGURING PID LOOPS Algorithm Choices Four algorithms are available to choose from when configuring a PID loop for a SNAP Ethernet based I O unit e Velocity e ISA e Parallel e Interacting T
174. ete Save Load Products Product Categories txt Select All Clear Completed Results Moving Files from the SNAP Controller or I O Unit To move files from the SNAP controller or I O unit use any standard FTP client software or PAC Manager or use the FTP communication handle in a PAC Control strategy In PAC Control a maximum of 16 communication handles can be used simultaneously to FTP files See Communication Commands in Chapter 10 of the PAC Control User s Guide for more information Here s how to move files from the device using PAC Manager 1 In the PAC Manager main window click the Maintenance button PAC Manager User s Guide Legacy Edition CHAPTER 6 MAINTAINING DEVICES 2 In the Command list highlight Download File From 1 0 Unit 5 1 0 Unit Maintenance Command Install Firmware a Filename IP ddresses Install Module Firmware 10 192 55 67 10 192 55 63 Upload File To 1 0 Unit Destination Delete File On 1 0 Unit 7 Read Filenames On 1 0 Unit Save Files To Flash Read Files From Flash Clear Flash Files Execute 3 In the Filename field enter the filename and path if any of the file on the controller or I O unit For example Products Product Categories txt 4 Inthe Destination field enter the path and filename where you want the file to go or click the browse button s to locate the path then type in the filename The filename can be the same or different f
175. f you want the I O unit to use the device calling the I O unit as the default gateway for all communication choose Yes for Set As Default Gateway The default is No Change the Inactivity Timeout if necessary The default is 30 Enter the Login and Password the I O unit should accept for incoming calls In the Remote IP Address field enter the IP address the I O unit should give to devices that dial into the I O unit and ask for an address This address must be on the same subnet as the local IP address Enter a modem listen string to make sure the modem automatically answers calls The default modem listen string is arso 1 m which instructs the modem to answer any incoming calls on the first ring Again refer to your modem s command reference for the correct listen string 6 When all fields are correct click OK IMPORTANT For the configuration to take effect you must upload the configuration file to the I O unit save it to flash memory and restart the I O unit PAC Manager User s Guide Legacy Edition di CONFIGURING PPP NOTE On a SNAP PAC R series or SNAP Ultimate I O unit ifthe serial port you are using for PPP was previously used for a direct connection with a serial device you must use PAC Manager s Inspect window to reset the port configuration from None to PPP See page 113 for more information 7 Configure other optional functions or return to the PAC Manager main window and click the Save button Hl to save the
176. features such as ramping and pulsing are currently available only through PAC Control not through PAC Manager These features are not shown in the list below See the PAC Control User s Guide for more information The following table defines the features See the referenced pages for more information digital input and output A digital point is either on or off You can read the states current state of a digital input or write an on off state to a digital output page 70 digital input When the value of a digital input point changes from off to on an on latch is automatically set While the value of the point may return to off the Latches on latch remains set as a record of the change until you clear it Similarly an page 70 off latch is set when the value of a digital point changes from on to off and it remains set until cleared digital input A counter keeps track of the number of times a digital input changes from off to on The count accumulates until it reaches the maximum count available in the I O unit or until you reset the counter to zero For exam ple to count the number of widgets produced per shift you would clear the counter at the start of each shift and read it at the end of each shift For points on a 4 channel module the speed of the counter depends upon the brain or controller s capabilities and the speed of the module used For points on a high density module counting is done in the module
177. files from flash memory 208 reading basic information 146 restarting 186 saving files to flash memory 208 sending files via FTP 204 IEEE float 193 initializing Scratch Pad values 95 interacting algorithm for PID 62 IP address assigning 10 assigning secondary IP 28 assigning to multiple devices 23 changing 195 mapping 23 n P PAC Manager User s Guide Legacy Edition ISA algorithm for PID 62 K kernel see firmware L latch 70 definition 68 level trigger 129 loading configuration file 67 files from flash memory 208 new firmware to I O unit or controller 197 new firmware to serial module 201 logging data 82 login for FIP 77 low limit alarm 134 M MAC address 10 management hosts 90 map file 23 mapping IP addresses 23 mask data format 190 digital point 128 Scratch Pad 128 maximum value 69 73 memory saving configuration to 185 saving files 208 memory map copying data 103 logging data from 82 message 86 plugins 89 minimum value 69 73 mirroring I O point data 101 mistic I O units 10 Modbus TCP changing float format 106 configuring 185 default port 76 limiting access to 76 memory map address conversion 108 modem 117 MOMO 128 mounting rack 154 B series 155 M series 154 moving files from 1 0 unit 206 files to I O unit 204 0 point in configuration file 59 must on must off 128 O off 70 off latch 68
178. g box 12 Continue with the next section Changing the IP Address to a Static IP 18 PAC Manager User s Guide Legacy Edition CHAPTER 2 CONFIGURING DEVICES Changing the IP Address to a Static IP 1 4 Make sure you know the current IP address of each device as well as the static IP address number and subnet mask to assign to it You should already know the current IP address from steps in the previous section Discovering the IP Address on page 16 Work with your network administrator to determine the static IP addresses to use for your Ethernet network If PAC Manager is not open choose Start Programs Opto 22 PAC Project Software gt PAC Manager The PAC Manager main window opens Choose Tools Change IP Settings 5 Change IP Settings Curent IP Address Read Curent Settings Port 2001 Timeout msec j 0000 New IP Address mg Subnet Mask i Gateway Address DNS Address 3 i Enter the current IP address and click Read Current Settings to see the current subnet mask gateway address and DNS address Change IP Settings Current IP Address 10 192 50 34 Read Current Settings Port 2001 Timeout msec ft 0000 New IP Address i hang Subnet Mask 255 255 192 0 Gateway Address 0 0 0 0 DNS Address 0 0 0 0 Enter the new IP address and subnet mask If the brain board will be talking to a device on another su
179. g has a Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol DHCP server either assign a static IP address before connecting the device to the network preferred or disable the server These servers may respond to BootP requests and assign a dynamic address CAUTION To make sure the controller or 1 0 unit is not on a network with a DHCP server we recommend you use a crossover cable with a direct connection to assign IP addresses If you are adding an I O segment to an existing Ethernet network your network administrator must provide static IP addresses and subnet masks for the I O units If you are creating an independent dedicated Ethernet network just for I O you can choose your own addresses NOTE Boot broadcasts cannot get through a firewall in the PC where PAC Manager is running Make sure any firewall in the computer such as the built in firewall in Windows XP is disabled before you try to assign IP addresses Firewalls in a router should not be a problem 1 Make sure that the Opto 22 hardware is installed according to directions in its user s guide and that the PAC Manager software is installed on the PC 2 Make sure you know the MAC address of each device that will receive an IP address The MAC address is on a label on the side of the controller or brain PAC Manager User s Guide Legacy Edition 11 ASSIGNING AN IP ADDRESS NOTE SNAP PAC S series and R series controllers each have two separate Ethernet network interfaces each
180. ge of consecutive addresses then click OK Or if you are communicating with the device using its host name instead of its IP address click Host Name and enter the name PAC Manager User s Guide Legacy Edition 199 LOADING NEW FIRMWARE The address es you entered appear in the I O Unit Maintenance dialog box 8 In the I O Unit Maintenance dialog box highlight the IP addresses to send firmware to Firmware file to load IP addresses of brains to receive firmware file 5 1 0 Unit Maintenance r Command v Filename J Engineers Only __Firmware ioCo Ea Upload File To 1 0 Unit Restart Confirmation Interval sec Delete File On 1 0 Unit 1 Install Module Firmware Download File From 1 0 Unit Port Timeout msec Clear Flash Files 2001 1000 I Synchronize to PC Time Execute CAUTION If you enter the wrong IP address you will erase the current firmware in that device You cannot undo the erase Make certain you have the correct IP addresses and that you want to download new firmware 9 Ifyou have changed the OptoMMP port see page 76 enter the correct port number You can also change the number of seconds PAC Manager will wait before verifying that devices have restarted 10 When everything is correct click Execute The file is loaded to the SNAP devices and progress is shown in the Results area When the file is loaded and the devices are restarted a Success message appears NOTE If the do
181. gt button gt Communications Help Others gt 4 Click the Events button and choose Event Messages from the pop up menu 5 Configure Event Messages Message Name Message Text k Modify wo 5 Highlight an empty message number in the list and click Modify PAC Manager User s Guide Legacy Edition CONFIGURING EVENT MESSAGES 5 Add Event Message 0 Message Name Message Text Streaming SNMP Trap G Disabled X Period sec Disabled z E mail Period sec Disabled 7 Period sec ji Trap Type i Serial Module Priority ah soy Disabled v Serial Ports Mask Ox Zar Dony i MemMap Copy Destination Disabled v MemMap Address 0x Period msec pooo IP Address IP Port on Cancel Help 6 Complete the fields as follows A B Enter a name for the message Foran email or serial message and optionally for an SNMP message enter the message text Message text is not sent in the streaming packet Message text is limited to 127 characters You can place data from the I O unit s memory map into the message by using a plugin see page 89 If you are sending a serial message make sure the text is formatted so the serial device that receives it will understand it To send a stream of data as the message choose Enabled from the drop down list Enter how often in seconds to send the stream 0 sends it only once To send an email message choose Ena
182. h as the built in firewall in Windows XP is disabled before you try to assign IP addresses Firewalls in a router should not be a problem 1 6 7 IMPORTANT Disable all DHCP servers on the Ethernet network you are using to assign IP addresses Ifa DHCP server is enabled on the network it may assign IP addresses before PAC Manager has a chance to do so If that happens turn off power to the devices disable all DHCP servers and turn the devices back on They should broadcast again Make sure that each Opto 22 device is installed according to directions in its user s guide Make sure the PC you use is on the same network segment as the devices Turn on all the Opto 22 devices If PAC Manager is not already running open it Choose File gt Assign IP Address If the map file you want does not appear in the lower section of the Assign IP Address dialog box click Load List locate the file and open it The Opto 22 devices begin to appear in the upper section of the dialog box IP address information from the map file is copied to the corresponding MAC address in the upper section and the status of each device changes to Mapped Status changes to Mapped IP address information is filled in 5 Assign IP Address Units Requesting IP Addresses ra MAC Address P Subnet Mask Hostname Gateway Address D 00 a0 3d 00 d4 eb 10 192 54 37 255 255 192 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 00 a0 3d 00 9d d3 10 192 56 230 255 255 192 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 00
183. he I O You are using an Ethernet network for unit in addition to strategy logic communications Exception Use PAC Manager for e You are using OPC to communicate with I O units E1 or E2 I O units You are not using PAC Control The strategy handles all logic you are not also configuring events and reactions on I O units Whichever tool you use for configuring 1 0 be aware of the impact if you later change configuration For example if you configure I O in PAC Manager download the configuration file to I O units and then later add a point in PAC Control remember that your configuration file doesn t contain that point Assigning an IP Address About IP Addresses Each Ethernet based device controller brain board or brain ships from the factory with a unique hardware Media Access Control MAC address and with a default IP address of 0 0 0 0 which is invalid Each device must have a valid IP address and subnet mask so that it can communicate on the network 10 PAC Manager User s Guide Legacy Edition YN TIP For multiple devices see page 23 CHAPTER 2 CONFIGURING DEVICES Opto 22 Ethernet based hardware falls into two categories that differ in the way IP addresses are assigned e SNAP PAC controllers and brains SNAP Ultimate SNAP Ethernet and SNAP Simple O When installed and first turned on each of these devices sends out a BootP broadcast requesting an IP address You respond to
184. he ISA Parallel and Interacting algorithms are functionally equivalent the only difference is the way the tuning constants are factored The identical and differing equations for all algorithms are shown in the following sections Key to Terms Used in Equations By Process variable the input to the Derivative wring parameter in units PID TuneD of seconds Increasing magnitude increases influence on output SP Setpoint Output Output from the PID InLo i Range of the input Err_1 The Error PV SP from the previ InHi ous scan OutLo Integrator Anti windup is applied o ene Range of the output Integral after the output is determined to be TERE within bounds i Proportional tuning parameter PvIn_1 PV from the previous scan and the Gain Unitless May be negative PvIn_2 scan before that Integral tuning parameter In units Actual scan time time since previ Tunel of 1 seconds Increasing magni ScanTime ous scan tude increases influence on output Equations Common to All Algorithms Err PV SP Span OutHi OutLo InHi InLo Output Output FeedForward TuneFF Velocity Algorithm The velocity algorithm is similar to the algorithm used in legacy software OptoControl for mistic 1 0 except that the derivative does not act on setpoint changes TermP Err Err_1 TermI Tunel ScanTime Err TermD TuneD ScanTime PviIn 2 PvIn_1 Pv
185. he following steps Ifyou have previously calculated PID values and parameters use PAC Manager PAC Manager does not provide visual feedback of changes to PID values You must first calculate optimal PID values for your application using the PID velocity algorithm and the PID variable formulas described in the PID module user s guide After calculating these values continue with step 4 PAC Manager User s Guide Legacy Edition CONFIGURING 1 0 MODULES AND POINTS 4 In the Configure 1 0 Units dialog box click the Modules button and choose PID Modules from the pop up menu 5 Configure PID Modules gt PID Module Number 0 v J Used Address Description ae O OxFFFF F400 0000 Control word Ox 00000000 OxFFFF F400 0004 Status Flags N A OxFFFF F400 0008 Scantime Base 9 OxFFFF F400 000C Scantime Multiplier 99 OxFFFF F400 0010 TPO Period Multiplier 3 OxFFFF F400 0014 Output 0 OxFFFF F400 0018 Tune Proportional 256 OxFFFF F400 001C Tune Integral Ratio 1024 OxFFFF F400 0020 Tune Derivative Ratio 0 OxFFFF F400 0024 Setpoint 0 OxFFFF F400 0028 Process Variable 0 ACPE PASA NAD Tiha Da posent of i From the Number drop down list choose the number of the PID module on the rack Click to place a check mark in the Used box For each item you want to set click its cell in the Value column and change the value For descriptions of items see the PID module user s guide Repeat for each PID module you want to co
186. he rack s ARCNET bus Not a concern unless it happens frequently Arcnet Transmit Attempts Since Powerup Arcnet ACKs 2 Arcnet Timeouts Arcnet Other node not found etc Arcnet Timeout Value msec Arcnet Receive Interrupts Refers to the ARCNET bus on the rack May be useful in trouble shooting communication to analog serial high density digital and PID modules Ethernet MAC Resets Since Powerup Dig Output Point Resets Since Powerup 2 Caused by EMI RFI or other electrical noise Dig Interrupt Failures Since Powerup Related to digital counters May have missed counts Contact Opto 22 Product Support MilliSeconds Per Analog Scan Average length of time the processor takes to scan all analog and high density digital points on the rack Based on the last 100 scans last 50 scans for points on high density digital modules as they are included in every second scan A value of 1 means the scanner is not running MilliSeconds Per Digital Scan Average length of time the processor takes to scan all 4 channel digital points on the rack based on the last 100 scans A value of 1 means the scanner is not running Module X Times Discovered 2 How many times the processor has rediscovered a smart module analog serial high density digital Normal value is zero values over 1 may indicate that a module is resetting 1 Does not apply to
187. hes Opto 22 does not warrant any product components or parts not manufactured by Opto 22 for these items the warranty from the original manufacturer applies These products include but are not limited to OptoTerminal G70 OptoTerminal G75 and Sony Ericsson GT 48 see the product data sheet for specific warranty information Refer to Opto 22 form number 1042 for complete warranty information Cyrano Opto 22 FactoryFloor Optomux and Pamux are registered trademarks of Opto 22 Generation 4 ioControl ioDisplay ioManager ioProject ioUtilities mistic Nvio Nvio net Web Portal OptoConnect OptoControl OptoDataLink OptoDisplay OptoOPCServer OptoScript OptoServer OptoTerminal OptoUtilities PAC Control PAC Display PAC Manager PAC Project SNAP Ethernet 1 0 SNAP 1 0 SNAP OEM 1 0 SNAP PAC SNAP Simple 1 0 SNAP Ultimate 1 0 and SNAP Wireless LAN 1 0 are trademarks of Opto 22 ActiveX JScript Microsoft MS DOS VBScript Visual Basic Visual C and Windows are either registered trademarks or trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the United States and other countries Linux is a registered trademark of Linus Torvalds Unicenter is a registered trademark of Computer Associates International Inc ARCNET is a registered trademark of Datapoint Corporation Modbus is a registered trademark of Schneider Electric Wiegand is a registered trademark of Sensor Engineering Corporation Nokia Nokia M2M Platform Nokia M2M Gateway Softw
188. high density modules 177 filenames on file system 207 I O points 169 0 unit information 146 Scratch Pad 180 system date and time 180 registered management hosts 90 reset points to defaults 187 Restart I O Unit from powerup 186 retransmit timeout RTO 214 S saving configuration to flash memory 67 185 file system files to flash memory 208 scaling analog point 45 description 69 72 scanner flags 152 Scratch Pad 124 masks 128 reading 180 setting initial values 95 writing to 180 secondary IP address assigning 28 security 76 185 FTP login 77 send powerup clear 188 serial event reactions 136 183 message 86 ports on brain or controller configuring 113 serial modules 2 wire or 4 wire mode 50 configuring 48 165 flow control 50 loading firmware 201 port numbers 156 Profibus 53 Wiegand 55 setting offset and gain 47 SNAP PAC controller assigning IP address primary 11 PAC Manager User s Guide Legacy Edition secondary 28 file system 202 AP PAC racks 154 AP B3000 ENET referencing points on the rac SNAP ENET RTC referencing points on the rac SNAP ENET S64 referencing points on the rac SNAP PAC EB1 referencing points on the rac SNAP PAC EB2 referencing points on the rac SNAP PAC R1 referencing points on the rac SNAP PAC R2 referencing points on the rac SNAP UP1 ADS referencing points on the rac SNAP UP1 M64 referencing points on the rac SNMP access privileges 90 age
189. hoose a different range or a scalable module from the drop down list Units and scaling for this module See Using Custom Scaling on page 45 Scalable modules only To return the units zero scale value and full scale value to the defaults for the module click Default 44 PAC Manager User s Guide Legacy Edition CHAPTER 2 CONFIGURING DEVICES F Scalable modules only To assign custom units and values to the module click Custom For example you could scale the voltage range of a 10 to 10 VDC module to be interpreted as engineering units of liters per second instead of volts See Using Custom Scaling on page 45 G Outputs only To configure a value this point should be set to if the Watchdog timer on this I O unit expires click Yes and enter the value 6 When you have completed the fields click OK The new point is added Configure 1 0 Points 170 Unit Preprocess Type SNAP PAC AT analog digital Modules and Points Type Features Subty La 00 SNA4P IDCS 10 32 VDC AVAC Digital Input Modity Delete ay ya 0 Pump_1_Status Counter Modin e ed Move To _ N Move To E E 01 SNAP AIV i Analog Input 2 rr ae eee Expand All Collapse All ba ES Calibrate Point types and features are shown in the Features Subtype column 7 To add more analog points repeat the steps To add digital points see page 39 Using Custom Scaling Scalable analog modu
190. ht digit hex number the last eight digits of the address for example roB00040 In the Period field enter how often to send the data in milliseconds Also enter the IP Address and IP Port for the I O unit whose point you are copying to the destination system IP port is usually 2001 3 When all fields are correct click OK 4 Configure other optional functions or return to the PAC Manager main window and click the Save button Hl to save the configuration file When you are ready to upload the configuration file to the I O unit see Sending Configuration Data to the I O Unit on page 67 Configuring Modbus Options If you are using Modbus TCP to communicate with a SNAP device see the Modbus TCP Protocol Guide form 1678 Using PAC Manager you can change the Modbus float format In addition if you need to read or write data in areas of the device s memory map that are not included in the Modbus memory map shown in the protocol guide you can use PAC Manager to determine the Modbus Unit ID and Register Address that are equivalent to the memory map address you want to use Changing Modbus Float Format 1 In the PAC Manager main window click the Open button 5 or choose File Open 106 PAC Manager User s Guide Legacy Edition CHAPTER 3 CONFIGURING OPTIONAL FUNCTIONS 2 In the Open Tag Database dialog box navigate to the configuration file and double click it to open it 3 PAC Manager Main_Process SEE
191. iIn_2 Aoutput Span Gain Atermp Atermt AtTermD Non velocity Algorithms These equations were derived from the article A Comparison of PID Control Algorithms by John P Gerry in Control Engineering March 1987 These three equations are the same except for the tuning coefficients converting from one equation to another is merely a matter of converting the tuning coefficients PAC Manager User s Guide Legacy Edition CHAPTER 2 CONFIGURING DEVICES Equations common to all but the velocity algorithm Integral Err TermP Err TermI TuneI ScanTime Integral TermD TuneD ScanTime PviIn PviIn_1 Ideal or ISA Algorithm Output Span Gain TermP TermI TermD Parallel Algorithm Output Span Gain TermP TermI TermD Interacting Algorithm Output Span Gain TermP TermI 1 TermD NOTE In SNAP Ethernet based PIDs the derivative is applied only to the process variable the input and not to the setpoint This means you can change the setpoint without causing spikes in the derivative term These PIDs also prevent integral windup by back calculating the integral without the derivative term The feed forward term bias is added before output clamping and has a tuning factor PAC R Steps for Configuring PIDs UIO NOTE This section applies only to PIDs on SNAP PAC SNAP Ultimate and SNA
192. id range F000 0000 to F1EB FFFE To convert to Modbus address Forexample FO D8 1000 141 1 1 0 0 0 0 1 1 0 1 1 0 0 0 0 010 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 8 bits 16 bits 011011000 000100000000000 Convert to decimal Convert to decimal 108 2048 Add2 2 Addi 1 Modbus UnitID 110 Register Address 2049 For applications that use Register Number instead of Register Address convert the address to a Register Number Addi 1 Modbu UnitID 110 IsterNumber 2050 Memory map i i m address in hex Note Modbus Register Numbers start at 1 but the correspond g Register A start at 0 For example Register Number 2050 is at Regist Modbus Unit ID 5 i Ce Address Ox F00763E4 gt Equivalent egister Address 45555 Modbus address decimal Basic 7 To convert from Modbus to a memory map address type the Unit ID and Register Address and click the left arrow button The equivalent memory map address appears 110 PAC Manager User s Guide Legacy Edition CHAPTER 3 CONFIGURING OPTIONAL FUNCTIONS Setting Up System Date and Time PAC R SNAP PAC devices and SNAP Ultimate controllers and SNAP ENET RTC Ethernet brains have a built in EB clock Other SNAP Ethernet based brains do not have this feature The clock is set at the factory UIO before the device is shipped to you If necessary you can set the date and time on an 1 0 unit by EIO following these steps For a SNAP PAC S series controller see Reading Syste
193. iedeiedwiontursteiedelatea gital Input Points s3 ciceahoptnegecaoadameetouteuetciunmakortsiovetoniacuekouts gital Output Points 2a sae aca ice ears otic eo ce g and Writing to Analog Points susc2veraese denne oeeusaanioderenndaenanioaes nalog NPUCROIDTS tek oat odavorectiotenesthoeenasaetedanontiorsveresteianautiedes aE GRO is a PON Soeren ee e ea a a A E g Analog and Digital Banks iciicecssicicestavedriecreiarereiiesiancaiisdeeeds gitakbank WINGOW ccr sseeeneen ietro e e e A e g and Writing to SNAP High Density Digital Points 0 0 ccc cece cece aes AP High Density Digital Input 02 0rscarvervavarenun tecexeewiaverrduatacereneses AP High Density Digital Output cicseccaciseneaestaracetneneneenesenenseeees g System Date and Time cccccsscceccssctcsouctsssereeesenrecenneeeeeuees Readin g and Writing to the Scratch Pad Area ccccsececsesenaeeceaseseuseeeeenaes SA Pad Be aaee aae a a a ea a a aaa a Scratch Pad Integers Floats and Strings 4i014 sesessanacdevades sin diaececieaddenas Data LOGGING siipeni e reie baka wh kaw saree sca ete EER Sanne ET E Readin Readin Readin Readin g or changing PID LOOPS srcsimireoneiner ee EEEE ET EEA g or Changing PID Module Settings cccaccscneceserencseensssunteeseunes g or Changing Events and Event Messages 0c cece e cece usecase eens g or Changing Communications and Other Data 0 0 iiaae Writing Comm
194. iegand Modules 3 Choose the module s position number from the drop down list PAC Manager User s Guide Legacy Edition CONFIGURING 1 0 MODULES POINTS AND FEATURES Data for this module is shown in the window PAC R EB UIO EIO 5 Inspect 1 0 Unit IP Address 10 192 55 67 w Port 2001 Timeout 1000 ms Status Serial Module area last read at 10 11 06 14 45 04 Serial Modules erial Module Number 3 v Module 3 is a Serial Module Status Read Status Write Point Config Digital Bank Digital Point Analog Bank Analog Point High Density System gt Scratch Pad gt DataLog gt PID gt Events gt Communications gt Other gt Address Description OxFFFF FOCO 0300 OxFFFF FO34 7F30 OxFFFF FO34 7F32 OxFFFF FOSA 7F36 OxFFFF FOSA 7F34 OxFFFF FO34 8060 OxFFFF FO34 8064 OxFFFF FOSA 8068 OxFFFF F034 8069 OxFFFF FOSA 8064 OxFFFF F034 8068 OxFFFF FOSA 806C OxFFFF FO3A 8260 OxFFFF F034 8070 OxFFFF FOSA 8074 OxFFFF F034 8078 OxFFFF F034 8079 OxFFFF FO34 8074 OxFFFF F034 8078 OxFFFF F034 807C OxFFFF FOSA 8270 Close Help MODULE INFORMATION Module Type Module Subtype Hardware Revision Date Loader Version Firmware Version PORT IP Port Number Baud Rate Parity Data Bits Stop Bits Hardware Flow Control Power up Test Message EOM Character List PORT B IP Port Number Baud Rate Parity Data Bits Stop Bits Hardware Flow Control Power up Test Message EOM
195. ile and double click it to open it 73 PAC Manager Main_Process File Edit Tools View Help olaja xaa m o TEL T E Yo units iy Line_1 25 Preprocess 3 Ifyou are using a SNAP PAC S series controller configure an 1 0 unit to represent the controller for Scratch Pad purposes Configure this 1 0 unit as a Generic OptoMMP Device using the IP address for the controller Do not add any points or configure other features 4 In the configuration tree right click the name of the 1 0 unit on which you want to configure the Scratch Pad and choose Configure from the pop up menu 3 Configure 1 0 Units SNAP E ETHER 10 1925 Enabled 0 process SNAP P ETHER 10 1925 Enabled 5 Modify Delete Import Copy 1 0 Points PID Loops Modules gt Events ScratchPad gt Scratch Pad gt Communications button Hep Others gt 96 PAC Manager User s Guide Legacy Edition 5 CHAPTER 3 CONFIGURING OPTIONAL FUNCTIONS Make sure the correct I O unit is highlighted in the list Click the Scratch Pad button and choose Bits Integers Floats or Strings from the pop up menu Scratch Pad Bits Configure Scratch Pad Bits Address Description ee O DIRECT ACCESS OxFFFFFODS 0000 Scratch Pad Bits Ox 00000000 00000000 MOMO ACCESS OxFFFF FOD8 0400 ON Mask Ox 00000000 00000000 OxFFFF FOD8 0408 OFF Mask Ox 00000000 0000000
196. ins SNAP Ultimate and SNAP Ethernet only The Scratch Pad is user defined meaning that you define and use its addresses to fit your needs and you can redefine them whenever necessary The Scratch Pad area includes up to four sections depending on device type to accommodate different types of data bits strings floats and integers e The Scratch Pad bits section is a 64 bit mask e The Scratch Pad strings section is a table of 64 elements Each element can hold 128 characters or 128 bytes of binary data e The Scratch Pad float section is a table of 10 240 elements each float is four bytes e The Scratch Pad integer section is also a table of 10 240 four byte elements NOTE Scratch Pad string float and integer tables are not made up of contiguous addresses in the memory map each table is in two address sections You won t notice this ifyou are using PAC Control but if you are addressing these tables in another application check the memory map appendix in the OptoMMP Protocol Guide to make sure you have the correct addresses for the table elements you want Scratch Pad strings floats and integers are available for SNAP PAC R series S series and SNAP Ultimate I O and are primarily used to transfer data from one peer to another on the network For more information on using the Scratch Pad in this way see Communication Commands in Chapter 10 of the PAC Control User s Guide You can also use PAC Manager for one
197. int and no configuration is required To read and or clear latches use PAC Control digital point commandsmemory map values Remember that each point on an E1 is treated like the first point on a SNAP module For example to read latches for modules in positions 0 1 2 and 3 using the Digital Point Read area of the memory map read the following addresses This module position on E1 0 1 2 3 Is like this module point on SNAP 0 0 1 0 2 0 3 0 Address for on latch state F080 0004 F0800104 F080 0204 F080 0304 Address for off latch state F080 0008 F080 0108 F080 0208 F080 0308 PAC Manager User s Guide Legacy Edition PAC R PAC R UIO EIO CHAPTER 2 CONFIGURING DEVICES Counters Digital Points SNAP Any SNAP digital input can be used as a counter Note the differences in counting between 4 channel and high density digital modules SNAP PAC R1 SNAP PAC R2 SNAP PAC R1 SNAP PAC EB1 SNAP PAC EB1 SNAP PAC EB2 Processor compatibility SNAP B3000 ENET SNAP B3000 ENET SNAP ENET RTC SNAP ENET RTC SNAP UP1 ADS SNAP ENET S64 SNAP UP1 ADS SNAP UP1 M64 Counting is done on the brain the module High speed depends on speed of mod Counting speed ule modules available up to 20 KHz Low speed around 50 Hz Each point to be used as a counter Configure points if using PAC Control Configuration must be configured counters are auto If not using P
198. interface has a separate MAC address and therefore takes a separate IP address Only ENET1 sends a BootP request Once you have assigned this primary IP address you can assign the secondary address following the steps on page 28 On SNAP PAC brains however the two Ethernet network interfaces act as an Ethernet switch and share the same IP address It doesn t matter which interface is attached to the network since the BootP broadcast comes through both 3 Turn on the Opto 22 device s 4 On the PC choose Start Programs gt Opto 22 PAC Project Software gt PAC Manager The PAC Manager main window opens 3 PAC Manager File Tools View Help daa xaa A ai of 5 From the Tools menu choose Assign IP Address PAC Manager User s Guide Legacy Edition CHAPTER 2 CONFIGURING DEVICES The following dialog box opens Any Opto 22 Ethernet based devices without IP addresses that are on the PC s network segment appear in the list of units requesting IP addresses 5 Assign IP Address Units Requesting IP Addresses Status MAC Address IP Address Subnet Mask Hostname Gateway Address DNS Discovered 00 40 3D 00 E1 16 Discovered 00 40 3D 00 9E CC Unit has been Discovered Add a Mapping for this Unit MAC To IP Address Mappings Test MAC Address IP Address Subnet Mask Hostname Gateway Address DNS Address Add Load List NOTE If no MAC address appears check the following Is the Opto 22 device
199. it Hardware Revision Day I O Unit Hardware Revision Year Installed Ram MAC Address TCP IP Address TCP IP Subnet Mask TCP IP Default Gateway TCP IP Name Server Secondary MAC Address Secondary TCP IP Address Secondary TCP IP Subnet Mask PUC Received 0 0 Rl la J R8 0a 01 29 2007 10 45 25 0x00000074 SNAP PAC R1 1 24 2006 16777216 00 A0 3D 00 DB 4C 10 192 55 67 255 255 192 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 00 A0 3D 00 DB 4D 10 192 255 5 255 255 192 0 If you have used the Inspect button before the last IP address you used is shown and current Status Read information appears in the window The most recently used IP addresses are available in the drop down list 2 Inthe IP Address field type the IP address of the device or choose it from the drop down list 3 Click Status Write PAC Manager User s Guide Legacy Edition E READING BASIC DEVICE INFORMATION 3 Inspect I 0 Unit IP Address 10 192 55 67 x Port 2001 Timeout 1000 ms Status Status Write area last read at 10 11 06 12 26 56 Status Write Status Read jno i Status Write Address Description a OxFFFF F038 0004 Always BootP DHCP On Powerup A 3 OxFFFF F038 0008 Degrees F C Degrees C Apply Foint Config OxFFFF F038 0010 Comm Watchdog Time msec 0 Disable 0 Digital Bank OxFFFF F038 0014 TCP Minimum Retransmission Timeout msec 250 Jer ae OxFFFF F038 0018 TCP Initial Retransmission Timeout msec 3000 OxFFFF F038 001C TCP Retran
200. ive name for the message In the Message Text section enter a plugin containing the memory map address you are writing from the source address in the following format B_F0B00000_ fr Ta Data Lindi indicates the start of the plugin format Address _ indicates the end of the plugin B The data format indicator in the plugin can be any of the following but B is typically used for memory map copying D Integer B Binary F Float S String C In the MemMap Copy Destination area choose Enabled from the drop down list Enter the Memory Map Address you are copying to the destination address as an eight digit hex number the last eight digits of the address for example F0B00040 In the Period field enter how often to send the data in milliseconds Since the points you are copying to are on the same I O unit enter 0 0 0 0 for the IP Address and ignore the IP Port field 3 When all fields are correct click OK 104 PAC Manager User s Guide Legacy Edition CHAPTER 3 CONFIGURING OPTIONAL FUNCTIONS 4 Configure other optional functions or return to the PAC Manager main window and click the Save button lal to save the configuration file When you are ready to upload the configuration file to the 1 0 unit see Sending Configuration Data to the I O Unit on page 67 PAC R Copying Memory Map Data to a Different I O Unit uUlo You can also copy the data in a memory map address to an address on a different syst
201. ject Software gt PAC Manager The PAC Manager main window opens 3 PAC Manager SEE File Tools View Help naja xaa BJ E o 5 Inspect 1 0 Unit IP Address m Port 200 Timeout 1000 ms Status SESS SST Status Read Status Write Point Config Digital Bank Digital Point Analog Bank Analog Point High Density System gt Scratch Pad gt DataLog gt PID Events gt Communications gt Other Close Help PAC Manager User s Guide Legacy Edition CHAPTER 5 READING AND WRITING TO SPECIFIC DEVICES If this is the first time you have used the Inspect window the IP address will show 0 0 0 0 as shown above If you have used the Inspect window before the last IP address you used is shown and the most recently used IP addresses are available in the drop down list In the IP Address field type the IP address of the controller or I O unit or choose it from the drop down list Click Status Read Information from the device is displayed in the window Date and time data was last read 5 Inspect 1 0 Unit IP Address fio 92 55 67 x Port 2001 Status Read Status Read Status Write Point Config Digital Bank Digital Point Analog Bank Analog Point High Density System gt Scratch Pad gt DataLog gt PID gt Events gt Communications gt Other gt OxFFFF F030 0004 OxFFFF F030 0008 OxFFFF F03
202. ld be 0x00000008 Host name E1s and E2s only The 1 0 unit s host name can be changed here The host name can include letters numbers and minus signs hyphens The first character must be a letter and the last letter must be a letter or a number Host names are not case sensitive and can be from two to 63 characters long See E1 and E2 brain boards on page 11 for more information on host names Secondary IP Address information SNAP PAC controllers only See Assigning a Secondary IP Address SNAP PAC Controller Only on page 28 for information When you have finished entering changes click Apply Most changes take effect immediately If you change the Scanner Flags or secondary IP address information however you must store the configuration to flash and then restart the controller or brain Also see Assigning a Secondary IP Address SNAP PAC Controller Only on page 28 Referencing I O Points The following sections show input and output point numbers for O units For SNAP serial communication modules see page 155 You will also need Opto 22 form 1191 SNAP Serial Communication Module Users Guide CAUTION Make certain you are using the correct rack for the processor Using an incompatible rack can cause severe damage to the brain or controller To reference I O points see the section for the rack you are using SNAP PAC rack SNAP PAC RCK4 SNAP PAC R1 see page 154 SNAP PAC RCK8 etc SNAP PAC R2
203. le for 12 To save for future reference the list of IP address and MAC address mappings the lower list in the dialog box click the Save List button Navigate to the folder where you want to save the file enter a filename and click Save The address information is saved You can load this information into PAC Manager later if you need to see it 13 To configure points on E1 and E2 I O units see Opto 22 form 1576 Technical Note I O Configuration for E1 and E2 Brain Boards Assigning IP Addresses to Multiple Devices If you are an OEM integrator or customer who has a large number of Opto 22 devices to work with at once you may find it easier to first create a file of MAC to IP address mappings and then assign IP addresses from the file This method works for SNAP Ethernet based controllers brains and brain boards Creating the Map File 1 Make sure you have the MAC addresses for all Opto 22 devices in front of you Also make sure you know what IP addresses and subnet masks you are going to use for them PAC Manager User s Guide Legacy Edition ASSIGNING AN IP ADDRESS The MAC address for each device appears on a white sticker or space on the device itself To determine the IP addresses and subnet masks to use work with the network administrator for the Ethernet network on which the devices will be used NOTE On a SNAP PAC controller you can assign only the primary IP address using these steps To assign the seco
204. les can be set to show something other than the actual inputs or outputs For example you could scale the readings of a 10 to 10 VDC input point to measure its input as zero liters per second when the real world reading is zero VDC and 1000 liters per second when the real world reading is five VDC NOTE Custom scaling has no effect on the resolution or accuracy of the module 1 Inthe Add Analog Point dialog box click the Custom button in the Scaling area to open the Scale Analog Readings dialog box PAC Manager User s Guide Legacy Edition CONFIGURING 1 0 MODULES AND POINTS Scale Analog Readings A Scaled Units Liters per second Lower Value B Actual 0 VDC Cc Scaled 0 Liters per seco Upper Value D Actual 5 VDC E Scaled 1000 Liters per seco OK Cancel Help _ ceed Hee 2 Complete the fields as follows A Enter new engineering units for the module The example uses liters per second B Enter the actual real world lower value that the scaled lower value corresponds to Note that inputs typically have under range capability which means you can specify a lower actual value that is less than the zero scale value Outputs do not have under range capability C Enter the new scaled lower value This value can be any floating point value D Enter the actual real world upper value that the scaled upper value corresponds to For inputs you can specify an upper actual value greater than the full scale value
205. librator to the module s zero scale value PID gt 0 00 Step 2 Click this button to calculate and set the offset Events Jutout f ir j Calc and Set Offset y P Step 3 Set the calibrator to the module s full scale value si nce pol nt 0 is an in put Step 4 Click this button to calculate and set the gain point you can clear Cale and Set Gain minimum and maximu values or set offset and gain 1 Click the point number you want to read or write to The current values for that point number appear in the Read Area 2 To clear minimum and maximum values click the buttons in the Clear area see page 73 for information 3 To set offset and gain follow the steps in the Offset and Gain area see page 73 Your changes are immediately sent to the I O unit and the window is updated to reflect your changes PAC Manager User s Guide Legacy Edition CHAPTER 5 READING AND WRITING TO SPECIFIC DEVICES Analog Output Points The following example shows an analog output point 3 Inspect 1 0 Unit IP Address 10 192 55 67 w Port 2001 Timeout 1000 ms Status Analog Point area last read at 10 12 06 16 01 13 Status Read Status Write Point Config Digital Bank Digital Point Mi Analog Bank r Analog Point Step 1 Choose a aod Module 0 1 3 4 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 Type Step 2 Choose a point on the EE TAR ADV2 0x47 Type 10 VDC Dual 0x47 Feat
206. ll turn on a fan if the temperature goes over 70 As soon as the alarm state occurs the temperature goes over 70 the I O unit sends the reaction turns on the bit to turn on the fan If the temperature remains above 70 the I O unit does not continue to turn on the fan bit the bit just stays on When the temperature falls back below the high limit 70 minus whatever deadband you have set the I O unit automatically reverses the reaction by turning the Scratch Pad bit off To turn the fan off you would have to set up a reaction for the off bit turning the fan off Notice that the reaction and its reversal are absolute they do not depend on the pre alarm condition For example if the bit to turn on the fan was already on at the time the temperature rose above 70 the reaction would turn the bit on even though it was already on When the temperature fell back below 70 the I O unit would not return the fan bit to its pre alarm condition on it would turn the bit off Example Alarms Event Reaction 1 In the PAC Manager main window with a configuration file open right click the name of the I O unit on which you want to set up alarm events and choose Configure from the pop up menu 5 Configure 1 0 Units Port Address Watchdog Ref Count Desc Add ETHER 10 192 5 Enabled 0 Preprocess__SNAP P ETHER 10 1925 Enabled 5 Modify Delete Import Copy 1 0 Points PID Loops Modules gt
207. lowchart monitors the event and triggers the message using the command Set Event Message State Messages must be configured before they can be used in PAC Control Ifyou are NOT using a PAC Control strategy you cannot configure event messages in a configuration file You must configure them using Inspect mode See page 140 Follow these steps to configure up to 128 event messages for use with a PAC Control strategy 1 In the PAC Manager main window click the Open button a or choose File Open 2 In the Open Tag Database dialog box navigate to the configuration file and double click it to open it 3 PAC Manager Main_Process File Edit Tools view Help ielaj xaa A Bi of Main_Process BAR 5 6 Yo Units AN Line_1 E on Preprocess 3 In the configuration tree right click the name of the I O unit on which you want to set up event messages and choose Configure from the pop up menu EI PAC Manager User s Guide Legacy Edition CHAPTER 3 CONFIGURING OPTIONAL FUNCTIONS For a SNAP PAC S series controller if it does not already appear in the list add it as an I O unit of the type Generic OptoMMP Device 3 Configure 1 0 Units Name Type Port Address Watchdog Ref Count Desc Add Line_1 SNAP E ETHER 10 192 5 Enabled 0 Preprocess _SNAP P ETHER 10 192 5 Enabled 5 Modify Delete Import Copy 1 0 Points PID Loops Modules gt Events gt Events Scratch Pad
208. m Date and Time on page 180 NOTE If you are using PAC Control and want to synchronize the I O unit s time with your PCS time don t use these steps instead follow instructions in Opto 22 form 1700 the PAC Control User s Guide 1 In the PAC Manager main window click the Open button a or choose File Open 2 In the Open Tag Database dialog box navigate to the configuration file and double click it to open it 73 PAC Manager Main_Process File Edit Tools View Help ielaj xaa R ai of EE Main_Process BR YO units Sol Line oo Preprocess PAC Manager User s Guide Legacy Edition 111 SETTING UP SYSTEM DATE AND TIME 3 In the configuration tree right click the name of the I O unit on which you want to set the time and date and choose Configure from the pop up menu 5 Configure 1 0 Units Type Port Address Watchdog Ref Count Desc Add SNAP E ETHER 10 192 5 Enabled 0 SNAP P ETHER 10 192 5 Enabled 5 Modify Delete Import Copy 170 Points PID Loops Modules gt Events Scratch Pad gt gt Communications gt Others Hep Others gt button 4 Click the Others button and choose Date and Time from the pop up menu Configure Date And Time Address Description ae TIME OxFFFF F035 0000 Hours OxFFFF F035 0000 Minutes OxFFFF F035 0000 Seconds OxFFFF F035 0000 Hundredths of a Second DATE OxFFFF
209. make sure you also set up basic configuration Streaming page 98 Email page 93 Serial page 48 SNMP page 90 10 Configure other optional functions or return to the PAC Manager main window and click the Save button all to save the configuration file When you are ready to upload the configuration file to the I O unit see Sending Configuration Data to the I O Unit on page 67 Using Plugins PAC R Several plugins are available for use in event messages and memory map copying The following EB table guides you in using them UIO Include the pattern string from a serial commu Ch str Serial messages page 86 nication module Show which serial port sent the pattern string _port_ Serial messages page 86 Include data from a memory map address X type of data S string D integer F float P IP address B 4 binary bytes S X_YYYYYYYY_ aaron etic in S h YYYYYYYY memory map address see y map copying d examples below Number emails with a sequence ID _seqid_ Email messages page 86 Turn digital points on or off using a bit mask amp x00000000_ Memory map copying page 103 NOTE For email messages message text including plugins must be 127 bytes characters or less The message length after all plugins have been expanded into their data values must be 255 bytes or less Examples Including Data from Memory Map Addresses See the appendix in the OptoMMP Protocol Guide for the complete lis
210. mand The SNAP PAC is restarted Check to make sure the controller is back on line by clicking Status Read again Click OK at the message Scroll down a little to see all the secondary IP address information 5 Inspect 1 0 Unit IP Address 10 192 55 67 gt Port 2001 Timeout 1000 ms Status Status Read area last read at 10 06 06 14 31 14 r Status Read Status Read Status Write OxFFFF F030 0004 OxFFFF F030 0008 Point Config Digital Bank Digital Point Analog Bank Analog Point High Density System gt ScratchPad gt DataLog gt OxFFFF F030 0018 OxFFFF F030 0000 OxFFFF F030 001C OxFFFF F030 0040 OxFFFF F030 0080 OxFFFF F030 0020 OxFFFF F030 0080 OxFFFF F030 0024 OxFFFF F030 0025 OxFFFF F030 0026 OxFFFF F030 0028 OxFFFF F030 002E OxFFFF F030 0034 Secondary IP address information 9 OxFFFF F030 0038 OxFFFF F030 003C OxFFFF F030 0040 OxFFFF FFFF F060 OxFFFF FFFF F050 OxFFFF FFFF FOS OxFFFF FFFF F068 OxFFFF FFFF F070 PID Events gt Communications gt Powerup Clear Flag PUC Needed Busy Flag Loader Version Memory Map Version Firmware Version Firmware Version Date Firmware Version Time Unit Type Unit Description I 0 Unit Hardware Revision Month I 0 Unit Hardware Revision Day I O Unit Hardware Revision Year Installed Ram MAC Address TCP IP Address TCP IP Subnet Mask TCP IP Default Gateway CP IP Name Server Secondary MAC Address Secondary
211. mands in Chapter 10 of the PAC Control User s Guide NOTE This section shows you how to configure the controller to talk serially with devices directly connected to it Serial devices attached to an I O unit through serial communication modules on the rack are configured differently See page 48 Follow steps in the next section for on the rack controllers see page 114 for standalone controllers On the Rack Controller Use these steps for SNAP PAC R series and SNAP Ultimate 1 0 1 Ifyou are using a SNAP Ultimate brain make sure it has firmware version 5 1 or newer New firmware can be downloaded from our website www opto22 com 2 In the PAC Manager main window click the Open button a or choose File Open 3 In the Open Tag Database dialog box navigate to the configuration file and double click it to open it 4 In the configuration tree right click the name of the I O unit on which you want to configure direct serial communications and choose Configure from the pop up menu Configure 1 0 Units Name Type Port Address Watchdog Ref Count Desc Add Line_1 SNAP E ETHER 10 192 5 Enabled 0 ETHER 10 192 5 Enabled 5 Modify Delete Import Copy 120 Points PID Loops Modules gt Events gt Scratch Pad gt amp gt Communications gt Communications Help Others gt button PAC Manager User s Guide Legacy Edition CONFIGURING DIRECT SERIAL COMMUNICATION 5 8
212. meout 1000 ms Status Status Write area last read at 10 12 06 09 42 55 Status Write Status Read Status Wiite Description a Refresh OxFFFF F038 0004 Always BootP DHCP On Powerup No n 5 OxFFFF F038 0008 Degrees F C Degrees C Apply Point Config OxFFFF F038 0010 Comm Watchdog Time msec 0 Disable 1000 Digital Bank OxFFFF F038 0014 TCP Minimum Retransmission Timeout msec 250 Z OxFFFF F038 0018 TCP Initial Retransmission Timeout msec 3000 Digital Point OxFFFF F038 001C TCP Retransmission Attempts 5 OxFFFF F038 0020 TCP Idle Session Timeout msec 0 Disable 240000 Analog Bank OxFFFF F038 004C Max Digital Scantime msec 1000 OxFFFF F038 0050 Max Analog Scantime msec 1000 Analog Point OxFFFF F038 0054 Scanner Flags Ox 00000000 OxFFFF FFFF F050 Secondary IP Address 10 192 255 5 High Density OxFFFF FFFF F058 Secondary Subnet Mask 255 255 192 0 System gt Operation Commands Send Command Scratch Pad gt Reset to defaults and Restart 1 0 Unit DataLog gt Store configuration to flash Erase configuration from flash PID gt Restart 1 0 Unit from powerup Switch to loader mode Events gt Clear digital event configuration Clear alarm configuration Communications gt Clear PPP configuration Clear e mail configuration Other gt Clear timer configuration Clear PID configuration Clear datalog Close Help 4 Click Send Command The O unit is set to defaults and restarted A Success message app
213. meout msec 0 Disable Max Digital Scantime msec Max Analog Scantime msec Scanner Flags Secondary IP Address Secondary Subnet Mask No Degrees C 0 250 3000 5 240000 1000 1000 Ox 00000000 10 192 255 5 255 255 192 0 System gt r Operation Commands Scratch Pad gt Send powerup clear Reset to defaults and Restart 1 0 Unit DataLog gt Store configuration to flash Erase configuration from flash PID gt Restart 1 0 Unit from powerup Switch to loader mode Events gt Communications gt Other Send Command Clear digital event configuration Clear alarm configuration Clear PPP configuration Clear e mail configuration Clear timer configuration Clear PID configuration Clear datalog CAUTION Note the following recommended settings TCP Minimum Retransmission Timeout msec 250 TCP Initial Retransmission Timeout msec 3000 TCP Retransmission Attempts J TCP Idle Session Timeout msec 240 000 PAC Manager User s Guide Legacy Edition CHAPTER 7 TROUBLESHOOTING Ifyou set these fields too low you may not be able to communicate with the device at all even through PAC Manager to fix the settings Then you would have to reset the controller or I O unit to factory defaults see the device user guide for instructions 4 Change these four fields as necessary Minimum RTO sets an absolute minimum value for the RTO The device s calculated RTO will nev
214. mmunicate with SNMP based enterprise management software SNAP PAC SNAP Ultimate and SNAP Ethernet I O units only For security purposes you can hide or disable one or more of the protocols by changing the port number from its default The following table shows the default ports Protocols for Default Ports FTP PCs for file exchange 21 SNMP enterprise management system 161 Modbus TCP Modbus TCP software and hardware 502 OptoMMP PAC Manager and most other tools 2001 PAC Manager User s Guide Legacy Edition CHAPTER 3 CONFIGURING OPTIONAL FUNCTIONS Preventing Access For example suppose you want to prevent any device from accessing a controller using FTP To do so you would change the port number for the FTP protocol from the default of 21 to zero Since zero is an invalid port no device could access the controller using FTP Limiting Access If you wanted to limit FTP access you could change the port number from 21 to another number between 1 and 65 535 If you change the number anyone or any application that needs to access the controller using FTP can do so by adding the changed port number to the controller s IP address For example if the controller s IP address is 10 22 56 3 and the port number is changed to 85 you would enter the following to access the controller 10 22 56 3 85 See Configuring Security on an 1 0 Unit on page 77 or Configuring Security on a Standalone Controller on pag
215. mple the offset and gain can be calculated so that values will appear accurately when read Offset and gain values affect engineering units For a temperature input engineering units are in degrees C or F depending on how the O unit is configured You can manually set offset and gain or have them automatically calculated and set for you IMPORTANT To calibrate the point the I O unit must be turned on and attached to the network and you must have access to it to use the calibrator Save the configuration to flash so that it will not be lost when power is turned off Since each calibration is for a specific point on a specific 1 0 unit the result cannot be saved to the configuration file and cannot be sent to any other I O unit Calculate offset first and then calculate gain The offset must be calculated at the point s low scale and the gain must be calculated at the point s high scale 1 In the Configure 1 0 Points dialog box highlight the analog input point you want to calibrate Configure 1 0 Points DEAR 120 Unit Preprocess Type SNAP PAC AT analog digital Modules and Points E La 00 SNAP IDCS 10 32 VDCAVAC Digital Input E 01 SNAP AIY i Analog Input 2 rs ee ee re Delete Bi Move To Eoman Expand All Collapse All inf Help Calibrate 2 Click the Calibrate button in the lower right corner of the dialog box 5 Calibrate Analog Input Module 1 Point 0 Automatically C
216. n PORT A IP Port Number Format Data Length Site Position Site Length Badge Position Badge Length Parity Check Even Parity Position Odd Parity Position PORT B IP Port Number Format Data Length Site Position Site Length Badge Position Badge Length Parity Check Even Parity Position Odd Parity Position Cancel In the Number field choose the Wiegand module s position from the drop down list Click to put a check mark in the Used box If you need to change port numbers enter the new numbers for each port in the IP Port Number fields Click the Format Value cell and from the drop down list choose a standard data format shown by its total data length or choose C for custom NOTE O is the 37 bit Opto 22 format used in a sample PAC Control strategy available for use with Wiegand modules See the Serial Communication Module User s Guide for more information Change the following fields if necessary to match your Wiegand hardware device Data Length total length of data in the transmission Site Position first bit of the site code Site Length length of the site code in bits Badge Position first bit of the badge code should be the next bit after the site code Badge Length length of the badge code in bits When data for both ports is correct repeat from step 3 for additional Wiegand modules PAC Manager User s Guide Legacy Edition CHAPTER 2 CONFIGURING DEVICES 8 When all Wiegand modules ar
217. n the Ethernet network and I O points on an I O unit must be configured before you can read or write to them This chapter assumes that you have already installed the hardware and software according to steps in the device s user s guide See Related Documentation on page 3 If you are using a modem connection or if you are using event messages email streaming the Scratch Pad area for peer to peer communication or SNMP for communicating with enterprise management systems also see Chapter 3 which shows you how to set up these optional functions All this information goes in the configuration file that PAC Manager uploads to I O units When to Use PAC Manager and PAC Control If you will be running a PAC Control strategy on a SNAP PAC or SNAP Ultimate I O system to control I O units you may be wondering when to use PAC Manager versus when to use PAC Control These two tools serve different purposes but some of their functionality overlaps uae Manager Tasks l PAC Control Tasks Assign and change Configure I O Configure control Program and Pathos m V O Unit engine so PC running debug control E AA IO Station 1 PAC Control can logic TE communicate with the controller Load firmware Configure communications and events aA Points PAC Manager User s Guide Legacy Edition E ASSIGNING AN IP ADDRESS Configuring I O I O units and points must be configured to match the PAC Control strategy you will run
218. n the PAC Manager main window click the Open button or choose File Open PAC Manager User s Guide Legacy Edition SETTING UP SECURITY 2 In the Open Tag Database dialog box navigate to the configuration file and double click it to open it J PAC Manager Main_Process File Edit Tools View Help laja xaje Bl Hil E Main_Process E Yo units aAA Line a Preprocess 3 In the configuration tree right click the name of the I O unit on which you want to set up security and choose Configure from the pop up menu 5 Configure 1 0 Units Name Type Port Address Wi Line_1 SNAP E ETHER 10 192 5 Enabled Preprocess SNAP P ETHER 10 192 5 Enabled 5 Modify Delete Import Copy 1 0 Points PID Loops Modules gt Events Scratch Pad gt 2 Communications gt Communications button gt PAC Manager User s Guide Legacy Edition 4 5 6 CHAPTER 3 CONFIGURING OPTIONAL FUNCTIONS Click the Communications button and choose Network Security from the pop up menu 5 Configure Network Security Address Description ae PORTS OxFFFF F034 0004 OptoMMP OxFFFF F034 0008 Modbus OxFFFF F034 0000 SNMP OxFFFF F034 0010 FTP OxFFFF F034 0074 Control Engine FTP LOGIN OxFFFF FO3D 0000 FTP Username OxFFFF FO3D 0040 FTP Password BROADCAST FILTER OxFFFF F034 0070 Stop incoming broadcasts IP FILTERS OxFFFF F034 0020 Filter 0
219. n the strategy that contains the 1 0 units whose configurations you want to export In the configuration tree right click the I O Units folder and choose Export from the pop up menu In the Export I O Units to an Opto Tag Database dialog box navigate to the location where you want to save the configuration file Enter a name for the file and click Save If PAC Manager is not already open choose Start gt Programs gt Opto 22 PAC Project Software gt PAC Manager In the PAC Manager main window click the Open button a or choose File Open In the Open Tag Database dialog box locate the file you just saved and open it 5 PAC Manager Main_Process Fie Edit Tools View Help aaja xaa R B el RE Main_Process DEAR PAC Manager User s Guide Legacy Edition ADDING AN 1 0 UNIT 7 Expand the I O units folder in the configuration tree to see the units and points that are already configured 8 Continue with the next section to add or change I O units Adding an I O Unit NOTE To configure E1 and E2 1 0 units see Opto 22 form 1576 Technical Note I O Configuration for E1 and E2 Brain Boards Mistic serial I O units used with a SNAP PAC S series controller must be configured in PAC Control An I O unit consists of a SNAP I O mounting rack plus the I O processor brain or on the rack controller and I O modules mounted on it Racks used with SNAP Ethernet based 1 0 units can hold up to 16 modules Dependi
220. naA 01 Copying Memon Nada Se a cs aarns ac pasitnaenddwth Gia wea aa E haan ae 03 Copying Memory Map Data on the Same I O Unit 0 00 c cece cee eee eee eee 03 Copying Memory Map Data to a Different I O Unit 0 0 0 0 ccc cece cece cece eee e eens 05 Configuring Modbus Options ite ccaddle ee eacai xy ast ieunpakdlkeanay eek wengadeeneaes das 06 Changing Modbus Float Format 0 0 0 ccc ccc cece eee eee e teen ee ene eee e enna 06 Determining Modbus Unit ID and Register Address 00 0 cece cece e cece e eee eee ees 08 Setting Up System Date and Time ccccecccotneceseceesenereevaarectaesestnesesens 11 Configuring Direct Serial Communication 0 ec eee e eee eee errre 13 On the Rack Controller wrews wishes pvancdeiase careless award sen Sawelaaenaanivasiowerened 13 Standalone SNAP PAC S Series Controller cccccccececcceeesesveneevnnesesenats 4 ConnguUnnd PEE senie a E tones eoruiaus ba ORera aes tens 7 Configuring PPP on the WO Unit 4 1cjteseticianandaiidetstiaianeiideidaietietinetaen 18 PAC Manager User s Guide Legacy Edition Chapter 4 Setting Up Events and Reactions cece eeeeee eee 123 alciol atc eae ER Re ee ee eee TENT Tae E Reve Ny cre tee 123 EVEN RAGIN CONCEDE t ausra e ellen meatal A eee aeaa a tic ea aai 124 MIMS Scratch Pad 4s tren degnadsundaiaa ateanatintaianiniassaeenndeserieetsacied 124 Using Scratch Pad Bits for Events and Alarms
221. nd SNMP trap 2 Configure Timers set time delay and set a Scratch Pad After a bit after timer expires page 138 delay 3 Configure SNMP page 90 4 Configure Event Messages send trap based on timer expired bit page 86 If a specific string is i i 1 Configure Serial Events send email received by a serial Send one time email Now 2 Configure Email page 136 module 1 Configure Serial Events set Scratch Pad bit page 136 2 Except data logging Configure Event Messages Turn digital point on off Now send message or data page 86 on different I O unit Data logging Configure Data Logging and configure page 82 OR Email optional page 93 Copy memory map data 1 Configure Serial Events set Scratch Pad bit page 136 OR 2 Configure Timers set time delay and set a Scratch Pad Log data bit after timer expires page 138 OR 3 Email message only Configure Email page 93 Send message stream After a Streaming only Configure Streaming page 98 serial or multiple delay 4 Except data logging Configure Event Messages emails send message or data based on timer expired bit page 86 Data logging Configure Data Logging based on page 82 timer expired bit and configure Email optional page 93 PAC Manager User s Guide Legacy Edition CONFIGURING DIGITAL EVENTS AND REACTIONS Configuring Digital Events and Reactions PAC R nadigital event the 1 0 unit monitors one or more inputs and outputs for a match to a specific EB pattern
222. nd worked and you need to assign a static IP address write down the IP address from the ping reply Continue with Changing the IP Address to a Static IP on page 19 Ifthe ping command worked and you will communicate with the device using only its host name rather than its IP address the device is ready to use Stop here You can change the host name if necessary See Changing Status Data on page 151 Ifthe ping command did not return a reply continue with the next step CAUTION You may have problems continuing with the next step if your network includes old Opto 22 SNAP Ethernet brains with firmware version R1 3m or earlier or controllers with MASENET 100 adapter cards at firmware version R1 3k or earlier These brains and adapter cards may have to be rebooted if you use the discovery feature in the next steps To avoid this problem either update the older devices to newer firmware before continuing or ask your network administrator to provide you with the dynamic IP address currently assigned to the E1 or E2 and then skip to Changing the IP Address to a Static IP on page 19 If the ping command did not return a reply make sure that PAC Manager software is installed ona PC on the same network as the brain board On the PC choose Start gt Programs Opto 22 PAC Project Software gt PAC Manager The PAC Manager main window opens 3 PAC Manager File Tools View Help ajajaj xoja BJ E o
223. ndary IP address follow steps on page 28 2 Before installing the Opto 22 devices open PAC Manager Start gt Programs Opto 22 PAC Project Software gt PAC Manager 3 PAC Manager File Tools View Help Haa xaa Bl ai of 3 From the Tools menu choose Assign IP Address The Assign IP Address dialog box opens 5 Assign IP Address Units Requesting IP Addresses Upper section is used for live MAC Address Gateway Address DNS Assign assignment to devices Set Static IP Assign All Set All Static IPs cal iiih gt Listening for DHCP Discovers and BootP Requests Test MAC To IP Address Mappings Lower section shows contents MAC Address IP Address DNS Address Add of a file containing lists of Mov addresses These addresses as may or may not be actual assignments Load List PAC Manager User s Guide Legacy Edition CHAPTER 2 CONFIGURING DEVICES The upper section of this dialog box lists all Opto 22 devices on the same network that send a BootP or DHCP broadcast while the dialog box is open When you are ready to assign IP addresses this is where you do so For now ignore anything that appears here The lower section shows the contents of a mapping file you create either while assigning actual addresses or in advance of assigning them This file can be saved changed and reloaded at a later time for reference or to quickly assign addresses using the upper section but the ac
224. nfigure When you have finished configuring PID modules click OK to close the dialog box and return to configuring 1 0 units When you are ready to send all configuration data to the I O unit see page 67 PAC Manager User s Guide Legacy Edition CHAPTER 2 CONFIGURING DEVICES Moving a Configured I O Point You can move a configured O point to an empty point on the same I O unit or on a different unit 1 In the Configure 1 0 Unit dialog box highlight the unit the point is on and click I O Points The Configure 1 0 Points dialog box opens 2 If necessary expand the modules by clicking Expand All 3 Highlight the point you want to move and click Move To E Move Point To 140 Units Not Used Not Used Not Used Not Used Not Used Not Used Not Used Not Used Not Used Not Used 4 Inthe Points area of the Move Point To dialog box highlight the location you are moving the point to Then click OK You return to the Configure 1 0 Points dialog box and the point has been moved PAC Manager User s Guide Legacy Edition COPYING AND PASTING 1 0 UNITS Copying and Pasting I O Units configuration file 1 In the configuration tree right click the name of the I O unit From the submenu choose Copy 2 Choose one of the following To paste the O unit into the same configuration file right click the I O Units folder and choose Paste from 5 6 the submenu The I O unit is Gr
225. ng Devices cece cece eee cece cece e eens 195 IROCHON seatrooa enue wend tuitvenaenedyaeesuntade deena E inva leeds destoebindeas 195 Changing IP Addresses cs toe ereew herd circa ae sean eeeace eeuceatiet ead eaaedeawenak Guawseneneln 195 Controllers Brain Boards and Brains with Firmware Version 5 0 or Newer 195 Loading GWOT IMIG lt ack cnc dunenitnae cea Se eabaaneamey E AE T AEO EE 197 Loading Controller E1 E2 or SNAP Ultimate Brain Firmware 0 0 c cece eee 197 Loading Serial Module Firmware oc ccssccisaeseeveestectantanes sevens seaevinncgees 201 M intaining ISS rc Gin Wig na teehee he cache a EE ERE NEO ed 202 Moving Files to the SNAP Controller or I O Unit 00 0 0 cece eee cece e eee eee 204 Moving Files from the SNAP Controller or I O Unit 0 0 0 cece cece eee eee eee ees 206 Reading Filenames cat chneniaiedunatianehiaeepedandetevadsaermadesdeinabadesnes 207 Deleting a File from a SNAP Controller or I O Unit 0 00 00 cece eee eee eee ees 208 Using Flash Memory with the File System icracendevanenevevesrceadayauseetekeeiseetaeens 208 Chapter 7 Troubleshooting 4 465 s0 lt 0es5e lt dawn sansnuadsdacavanssanee es 211 INOQUE Os ceuesawwenaranenereee x E sate bedeanrenus dew sane bade aouetentu Gees 211 PAC Manager Error Messages n nnn nunnan nunn paaanmnabenaheras houthoushorenmenapontaews 211 Trouble Connecting to the 1 0 Unit or Controller 00
226. ng on the I O processor model and type of rack the rack may include only 4 channel digital modules or all types of modules analog and digital modules with any number of points plus serial modules You must add an 1 0 unit before you can configure its modules and points 1 Make sure the configuration file is open On the configuration tree double click the 1 0 Units folder to open the Configure 1 0 Units dialog box Configure 1 0 Units Name Type Port Address Watchdog Ref Count Description vo 2 To configure a new I O unit click Add or double click anywhere in the box below any listed units The Add I O Unit dialog box appears PAC Manager User s Guide Legacy Edition ao gt Onm on Address List area CHAPTER 2 CONFIGURING DEVICES Add 1 0 Unit Name Description Type SNAP PAC R1 analog digital Temp Fahrenheit C Celsius Pott 2001 Address 0 0 0 0 Secondary Address List Add Hoy Dee Watchdog No C Yes Cancel Help 3 Complete the fields as follows A mons Ti Enter a name for the I O unit The name must start with a letter and may contain letters numbers and underscores Spaces are converted to underscores Optional Enter a description of the unit Select the type of 1 0 unit from the drop down list Choose whether temperatures will be handled in Fahrenheit or Celsius Specify the communication port to use 2001 unless you have changed i
227. nit an IP address for the PPP link The default is No If you want the I O unit to use the device the I O unit is calling as the default gateway for all communication choose Yes for Set As Default Gateway The default is No Enter the Login and Password the I O unit should use for authentication when it calls the remote device In the Phone number field enter the number the modem should dial for outgoing calls from the I O unit Change the following fields if necessary Inactivity Timeout lf the I O unit sends no packets and receives no packets for this number of seconds after the PPP session is negotiated the modem will hang up The default is 30 Max Connect Time The maximum amount of time in seconds an outgoing PPP connection can stay connected after successful negotiation Default is zero which disables the timer Max Dial Retries The number of times the 1 0 unit will redial if the first attempt fails Default is zero Retry Interval The number of seconds the I O unit will wait before trying to redial after the first attempt fails Default is zero Disable Time tf the maximum connect time or maximum number of retries has been reached the outgoing PPP dialer waits this number of seconds before doing anything Default is zero F Ifthe I O unit will receive incoming calls via modem complete the Incoming PPP section Choose Enabled from the drop down list so the modem will listen for incoming calls I
228. not possible However you can stream to a non Modbus host at the same time you are using the Modbus TCP protocol for another purpose Streaming is a fast way to get continuous data from the I O unit and is ideal for data acquisition applications When it streams the system sends data at regular intervals to specified IP addresses You set up the interval the IP addresses to receive the data and optionally the port number The system sends the data at the specified interval The communication is one way the system does not wait for a response CAUTION Ifyou stream to multiple IP addresses and one or more of the streaming targets is either offline or not running the application that receives the stream delays may occur If a target is offline the I O system will stop streaming while it tries to resolve the IP address If the application is not running on the PC that receives the stream the PC will send the I O system an error message if the stream occurs frequently the additional error messages can slow down the network Streaming involves two steps setting up parameters on the 1 0 unit for streaming and receiving data in your application Follow the steps in this section to set up the parameters For information on receiving data in your application see the OptoMMP Protocol Guide 1 In the PAC Manager main window click the Open button i or choose File Open 98 PAC Manager User s Guide Legacy Edition CHAPTER 3 CONFIGURI
229. nt 91 community groups 90 configuring 90 185 default port 76 limiting access to 76 management hosts 90 message 86 trap types 90 state of digital point 68 70 Status Read information 148 store configuration to flash 185 S S S NN rategy protecting 77 reaming data 86 98 185 ubnet mask 10 7 TCP IP settings 214 stack 214 technical support 3 time system 111 180 timeout 214 K K K K K K K K K 55 55 54 54 54 54 54 55 54 timer configuring 138 189 traps 90 troubleshooting 211 Ethernet errors 215 getting device and firmware data 212 Product Support 3 Status Read data 148 TCP settings 214 U UDP and streaming data 98 V valley 69 velocity algorithm for PID 62 viewing module and point data 158 W watchdog 72 definition 69 Wiegand configuring modules 55 165 event reactions 136 183 writing o analog point 172 o digital point 170 o digital points on high density modules 177 01 0 points 169 o Scratch Pad 180 PAC Manager User s Guide Legacy Edition zg v7 PAC Manager User s Guide Legacy Edition
230. nt OxFFFF F038 004C Max Digital Scantime msec OxFFFF F038 0050 Max Analog Scantime msec Analog Bank Os 038 0054 annerHiag UxFFFF FFFF F050 Secondary IP Address Analog Point OxFFFF FFFF F058 Secondary Subnet Mask OxFFFF FFFF F068 Secondary Default Gateway High Density QgFFFF FFFF F070 Secondary Name Server Secondary IP address fields System gt Operation Commands Send Command Scratch Pad gt Send powerup clear Reset to defaults and Restart 1 0 Unit Restart command Switch to loader mode Events Clear digital event configuration Clear alarm configuration Communications gt Clear PPP configuration Clear e mail configuration Other gt Clear timer configuration Clear PID configuration Clear datalog DataLog gt Store configuration to flash pt0 rf Be eru Close Help Dowe 5 Click the Value field for Secondary IP address and type in the IP address for ENET2 Enter the Secondary Subnet Mask the same way If necessary change the Gateway Leave the Name Server as is 6 When all the secondary IP address fields are correct click Apply PAC Manager User s Guide Legacy Edition IP address for primary interface Primary IP address information CHAPTER 2 CONFIGURING DEVICES The information is sent to the SNAP PAC but it cannot communicate on the secondary interface until it is restarted In the Operation Commands section highlight Restart 1 0 Unit from powerup Then click Send Com
231. nt system in the form of SNMP traps The device can send three kinds of traps e Authentication trap sent when a host requests data that is outside its access permissions e Cold start trap sent whenever the O unit is turned on e Exception trap sent in reaction to an event an exception trap is a type of event message Authentication and cold start traps can be enabled using the steps in this section To configure exception traps see Configuring Event Messages on page 86 SNMP Access Privileges Community groups control access to SNMP information from the controller or I O unit When you set up a community group you determine its privileges to read write to and receive traps from the system In order to receive traps a host must be a registered management host and be part of a community group that has access privileges for traps Once a registered management host becomes part of a community group that group is no longer available to non registered hosts It includes only the hosts registered to it To set up community groups follow the steps in this section You can define up to eight community groups EJ PAC Manager User s Guide Legacy Edition CHAPTER 3 CONFIGURING OPTIONAL FUNCTIONS Configuring the SNMP Agent 1 In the PAC Manager main window click the Open button a or choose File Open 2 3 In the Open Tag Database dialog box navigate to the configuration file and double click it to op
232. oadcasts to the controller Normally you would NOT want to do this a BootP response for example is an incoming broadcast When all the values are correct click Apply to send the configuration to the controller PAC Manager User s Guide Legacy Edition El LOGGING DATA FROM MEMORY MAP ADDRESSES Logging Data from Memory Map Addresses PAC R You can use a SNAP PAC R series SNAP Ultimate or SNAP Ethernet I O unit to log data from up to 64 EB memory map addresses The data from all addresses goes into the same data log file which you can UIO view from PAC Manager Data from this composite file can also be emailed to someone at a time EIO interval you set For a complete list of memory map addresses see the OptoMMP Protocol Guide form 1465 NOTE SNAP PAC R series and SNAP Ultimate on the rack controllers have a greater memory capacity than SNAP Ethernet brains and can store multiple files for data logging or other purposes If you are using SNAP PAC R or SNAP Ultimate especially with PAC Control you may prefer to log data in a different way See page 202 and the PAC Control User s Guide for more information about the controller s file system Note that SNAP PAC and SNAP Ethernet brains cannot save logged data if power to the unit is cycled Configuring Data Logging 1 In the PAC Manager main window click the Open button or choose File Open 2 In the Open Tag Database dialog box navigate to the configuration file and doubl
233. od 0 Pt 0 Door is OFF Open Reaction 0 THEN Turn Mod 1 Pt 1 Light ON Event 1 IF Mod 0 Pt 0 Door is ON Closed Reaction 1 THEN Turn Mod 1 Pt 1 Light OFF Since this example is a simple one to one correspondence it is pretty easy to set up PAC Manager User s Guide Legacy Edition CONFIGURING DIGITAL EVENTS AND REACTIONS If PAC Manager is not already open choose Start gt Programs gt Opto 22 PAC Project Software gt PAC Manager The PAC Manager main window opens J PAC Manager File Tools view Help Haaj xaa Bl ai of 2 Click the Open button Gl or choose File Open 3 In the Open Tag Database dialog box navigate to the configuration file and double click it to open it 3 PAC Manager Main_Process SEE File Edit Tools View Help O as ta ae A Bil el E Main_Process E Yo units Fp Line_t Sl Preprocess PAC Manager User s Guide Legacy Edition CHAPTER 4 SETTING UP EVENTS AND REACTIONS 4 In the configuration tree right click the name of the 1 0 unit on which you want to set up digital events and choose Configure from the pop up menu 3 Configure 1 0 Units Name Type Port Address Watchdog Ref Count Desc Add Line_1 SNAP E ETHER 10 192 5 Enabled 0 Preprocess SNAP P ETHER 10 1925 Enabled 5 Modify Delete Import Copy 1 0 Points PID Loops Modules gt Events
234. olds up to16 4 channel SNAP digital I O modules Analog serial and high density digital modules are not supported Module position 0 is the position closest to the processor PAC Manager User s Guide Legacy Edition REFERENCING I O POINTS Serial Modules The following table applies to these I O units only SNAP PAC R1 SNAP ENET S64 SNAP PAC R2 SNAP UP1 ADS SNAP PAC EB1 SNAP UP1 M64 SNAP PAC EB2 SNAP ENET RTC SNAP B3000 ENET SNAP SCM 232 SNAP SCM 485 SNAP SCM 485 422 and SNAP SCM W2 modules each have two serial ports A and B Profibus modules SNAP SCM PROFI have one serial port To establish an Ethernet connection between the I O unit and a serial module you use the IP address of the I O unit the module is on plus the IP port number for the module s serial port The following table shows default port numbers for each port in each position on the largest rack For a Profibus module use the Port A port number A 22500 A 22516 0 8 B 22501 B 22517 A 22502 A 22518 1 9 B 22503 B 22519 A 22504 A 22520 2 10 B 22505 B 22521 A 22506 A 22522 3 11 B 22507 B 22523 A 22508 A 22524 4 12 B 22509 B 22525 A 22510 A 22526 5 13 B 22511 B 22527 A 22512 A 22528 6 14 B 22513 B 22529 A 22514 A 22530 7 15 B 22515 B 22531 These port numbers can be changed if necessary See page 48 for instruction
235. on instead see Opto 22 form 1576 Technical Note I O Configuration for E1 and E2 Brain Boards NOTE This section applies only to Ethernet based I O units not to serial mistic I O units Mistic I O units must be configured in PAC Control Before you create a control strategy using PAC Control or before you read or write to I O units you need to configure the I O points and features the strategy or other application will use You can use PAC Manager to copy a configuration or to configure all points save the configuration to a file and then upload the configuration to one I O unit or to several at once You do not need to be attached to the I 0 unit while you are creating the configuration file and configuring its points NOTE If you are using OPC to communicate with the I O unit you can use the configuration file tag file that PAC Manager produces as an easy way to reference points for OPC See Opto 22 form 1439 the OptoOPC Server User s Guide for more information about using OPC You can start configuration in one of three ways If this is a new configuration you can create a new configuration file page 33 PAC Manager User s Guide Legacy Edition Configuration tree CHAPTER 2 CONFIGURING DEVICES If an existing I O unit has the exact configuration you want you can copy it directly to another 0 unit page 34 If you have a PAC Control or OptoControl or ioControl strategy with similar I O units config
236. on 4 channel digital modules not for points on high density digital modules You can configure the I O unit to recognize one or a combination of the following as an event e The on or off state of a digital point on a 4 channel digital module e A specific high or low value of an analog point in Engineering Units e A specific number on a digital counter or a high or low number on a quadrature counter e An analog point value or a quadrature counter that is outside an allowable range e The state of a bit in the Scratch Pad on or off e A specific string received by a serial module You can also set up the I O unit to react automatically to an event in any or all of the following ways Turning on or off digital points on a 4 channel digital module on the same 1 0 unit e Turning on or off digital points on a 4 channel digital module on a different I O unit Copying data from one memory map location to another on the same or a different I O unit e Logging data e Turning a bit in the Scratch Pad on or off Sending a stream packet Sending an email message e Sending a string through a serial module to a serial device Sending an SNMP trap In addition you can use a timer to set up a delay between when the event occurs and the reaction takes place NOTE At present it is not possible to set up an automatic analog reaction PAC Manager User s Guide Legacy Edition EVENT REACTION CON
237. ons or return to the PAC Manager main window and click the Save button Hl to save the configuration file When you are ready to upload the configuration file to the I O unit see Sending Configuration Data to the I O Unit on page 67 Determining Modbus Unit ID and Register Address If you need to read or write data to the device s memory map in areas not included in the Modbus memory map see the Modbus TCP Protocol Guide form 1678 you can use PAC Manager to convert memory map addresses to Modbus Unit ID and Register Addresses or vice versa 1 Determine the device s memory map address or the Modbus Unit ID and Register Address you want to convert To find out the memory map address you can use the memory map appendix in the OptoMMP Protocol Guide or copy and paste the address from the Inspect dialog box in PAC Manager 2 In the PAC Manager main window with a configuration file open right click an 1 0 unit and choose Configure from the pop up menu 108 PAC Manager User s Guide Legacy Edition CHAPTER 3 CONFIGURING OPTIONAL FUNCTIONS 3 In the Configure I O Units dialog box click the Communications button and choose Modbus from the pop up menu Configure Modbus Address Description Ve MODBUS OxFFFF F039 0000 Modbus 32 bit Float Format Big Endian Cancel Advanced 4 Click the Advanced button to see the rest of the dialog box 5 Configure Modbus Address Description Ve MODBUS
238. oose Streaming from the pop up menu 5 Configure Streaming A Enable Streaming m Target Device Information B IP Pott 5001 D Enable 1 0 Mirroring No i Stream Target 1 E Source Memory Map Information Stream Target 2 i 5 e Interval milliseconds 1000 Stream Target 3 a Stream Target 4 cote ee N Stream Target 5 ra Stream Target 6 F Stream Target 7 eee Stream Target 8 Eo oa OK Cancel Help oo Use Default Streaming Area Specify Streaming Area 5 Complete the fields as follows A Streaming is a separate function It s generally not a good idea to use both streaming and mirroring on the same I O unit See Configuring Streaming on page 98 for more information To enable mirroring choose Yes from the drop down list C Enter how often in milliseconds the data should be mirrored PAC Manager User s Guide Legacy Edition CHAPTER 3 CONFIGURING OPTIONAL FUNCTIONS D Enter the IP port number This is the primary port number used to communicate with the I O unit The default shown is 5001 enter 2001 instead Exception if you changed the MMP port for security reasons use the number you changed it to E Enter the IP address of the I O unit to receive the mirrored data CAUTION Since all digital and analog points are mirrored make sure that the points on the second 1 0 unit are configured to accept the values that will be written to them
239. ore information on mask data format see page 190 See the following pages for a step by step example to set up event reactions You can also configure the I O unit to send a message as a reaction to digital events See page 86 How Digital Events Trigger Reactions Reactions to digital events are level triggered not edge triggered The 1 0 unit continually checks the digital state to see if it matches the event The I O unit sends the reaction as soon as the state matches the event and it continues to send the reaction until the state changes If the state changes so that it no longer matches the event the I O unit does NOT reverse the reaction Example Digital Event Reaction For example suppose you have set up an event reaction to turn on a light when a door is open As soon as the event occurs the door opens the I O unit sends the reaction turn on the light Since the reaction is level triggered as long as the door remains open the light will remain on When the door is shut the I O unit stops turning on the light but it does NOT turn the light off To turn off the light when the door is shut you need to set up a second event reaction Suppose the input for the door s status is on point 0 on the module in position 0 and the output for the light is on point 1 on the module in position 1 Here are the two event reactions to turn on the light when the door is open and turn off the light when the door is shut Event 0 IF M
240. ould not configure watchdog See page 3 Save to Flash Operation Failed Clear Flash on I O Unit name of unit Operation Contact Product Support See page 3 Failed PAC Manager successfully connected to the device but could not send it a PUC Check cables and communica tion Communication could not be established with the restarted I O Unit PAC Manager User s Guide Legacy Edition TROUBLE CONNECTING TO THE I O UNIT OR CONTROLLER Trouble Connecting to the I O Unit or Controller See the Troubleshooting section in the user s guide for your device SNAP PAC S series form 1592 the SNAP PAC S Series Controller Users Guide SNAP PAC R series form 1595 the SNAP PAC R Series Controller Users Guide SNAP PAC EB brains form 1690 the SNAP PAC Brains Users Guide E1 or E1 1 0 units form 1563 the E1 and E2 User s Guide SNAP Ultimate SNAP Ethernet or SNAP Simple I O units form 1460 the SVAP Ethernet Based I O Units Users Guide Using PAC Manager to Troubleshoot Problems PAC Manager can be useful in troubleshooting problems with I O units and controllers Before calling Opto 22 Product Support you can use PAC Manager to get device and firmware information To help with communication problems you can change ICP settings You can also check for Ethernet errors which indicate network problems Getting Device and Firmware Information If you need to contact Opto 22 Product Support for
241. ounters Digital Points ccccsicecdscosctercasascdeevodstebisretsieeanes 71 Watchdog Digital and Analog Points ic s lt eteesseeesedebeeseieeesavesedeseeseseecsare ss 72 Scaling Analog POINTS ssericseriseie ecaa e 72 Minimum and Maximum Values Analog Points 0 0 0 0 ccc cece eee ee cece seen 73 Offset and Gain Analog FONG cncxsowrsacedmawrnawiewasdaesnaurenwi easdaucieaurendin 73 Claimpi ig ialOGPOINES 01sheratnewneuentedaneadaoterdarededsneeieoerncoanardaneiens 73 Average Filter Weight Analog Points 0 0 0cc cc cee eee ee annn ee eee ete tent eens is Chapter 3 Configuring Optional Functions cceeeeeeeeeeees 75 INGOs npdia Wok oueenetuae aed sinucherd E eantanuct ona tvaabentanun 75 Ce PSEA canal enr eet rea tuN ara welll pasteles pastel tae act galt 76 Limiting Access to Specific COMPUTES 1 11 lt dseuararchientineiaueieredeiaeetiuaiareies 76 Limiting Access to Specific Protocols lt winuieiaiwhadwiarwisatehsdwhadelawwapdueneiadeduks 76 PAC Manager User s Guide Legacy Edition Requiring a Password for FTP chase cores eoadeanehoud mereaeerdnourhord mreaeerdnourhoun 77 Protecting a PAC Control Strategy from Interference 2 00 c cece cece eee tenet ees 77 Configuring Security on an WOME j40 ascetineriarieinedrderaaeierienrdeciaadadants 77 Configuring Security on a Standalone Controller 0 0 c ccc cece eee eee eee e ees 80 Logging Data from M
242. p down list 2 Inthe IP Address field type the IP address of the controller or choose it from the drop down list EJ PAC Manager User s Guide Legacy Edition 3 4 CHAPTER 3 CONFIGURING OPTIONAL FUNCTIONS Click Communications and choose Network Security from the submenu Inspect 1 0 Unit IP Address 10 192 54 88 Port 2001 Timeout 1000 ms Status Network Security area last read at 10 09 06 15 05 01 Network Security Status Read Status Write aito Description PORTS OxFFFF FO34 0004 OptoMMP Apply Point Contig pio aw OxFFFF F03A 0008 Modbus Digital Bank OxFFFF FO34 000C SNMP OxFFFF F034 0010 FIP a p OxFFFF F034 0074 Control Engine Distal Point FTP LOGIN Analog Bank OxFFFF F03D 0000 FTP Username OxFFFF FO3D 0040 FTP Password Analog Point BROADCAST FILTER OxFFFF F034 0070 Stop incoming broadcasts High Density IP FILTERS OxFFFF F034 0020 Filter 0 Address System gt OsFFFF F034 0024 Filter 0 Mask OxFFFF F03A 0028 Filter 1 Address Scratch Pad gt OxFFFF F034 002C Filter 1 Mask OxFFFFFO340030 Filter 2 Address Datalog gt OxFFFF FO3A 0034 Filter 2 Mask OxFFFF FO3A 0038 Filter 3 Address PID 2 OsxFFFF OSA 003C Filter 3 Mask e R OxFFFF F034 0040 Filter 4 Address __Everis gt OxFFFF FO3A 0044 Filter 4 Mask sas OsFFFFFOSA0048 Filter 5 Address _Commuricatons gt OxFFFF F034 004C Filter 5 Mask Other gt OxFFFF F034 0050 Filter 6 Address OsFF
243. pe of serial module Before configuring a Wiegand module see EIO Opto 22 form 1191 the SNAP Serial Communication Module Users Guide for more information about these modules 1 With the configuration file open right click the name of the 1 0 unit the Wiegand module is on From the pop up menu choose Configure The Configure 1 0 Units dialog box opens 5 Configure 1 0 Units Address Watchdog Ref Count Desc Add 10 192 5 Enabled Modify Delete Import Copy 170 Points PID Loops Modules gt Modules ie Scratch Pad gt 2 Communications gt Help Others gt PAC Manager User s Guide Legacy Edition CONFIGURING 1 0 MODULES AND POINTS 2 Make sure the correct I O unit is highlighted Click the Modules button and choose Wiegand 7 Modules from the pop up menu 5 Configure Wiegand Modules r Wiegand Module Number 0 X M Used OxFFFF FOCO 0000 OxFFFF F034 8501 OxFFFF F034 8502 OxFFFF F034 8506 OxFFFF F034 8504 OxFFFF F034 8600 OxFFFF FO34 8604 OxFFFF F034 8608 OxFFFF F034 860C OxFFFF F034 8610 OxFFFF FOSA 8614 OxFFFF F034 8618 OxFFFF F034 861C OxFFFF F034 8620 OxFFFF F034 8624 OxFFFF F034 8640 OxFFFF FO34 8644 OxFFFF FOSA 8648 OxFFFF FO34 864C OxFFFF F034 8650 OxFFFF FO34 8654 OxFFFF FO34 8658 OxFFFF FO34 865C OxFFFF FO34 8660 OxFFFF FO34 8664 MODULE INFORMATION Module Type Module Subtype Hardware Revision Date Loader Version Firmware Versio
244. pect button before the last IP address you used is shown and current Status Read information appears in the window The most recently used IP addresses are available in the drop down list 140 PAC Manager User s Guide Legacy Edition 2 CHAPTER 4 SETTING UP EVENTS AND REACTIONS In the IP Address field type the IP address of the I O unit or choose it from the drop down list Click Events and choose Event Messages from the submenu 3 Inspect 1 0 Unit IP Address 10 192 55 67 X Port 2001 Timeout 1000 ms Status Event Message area last read at 01 30 07 13 53 10 Si SME r Event Message atus Rea Event Message Number 0 X Status Write Address Description vae Refresh Point Config MESSAGE Digital Bank OxFFFF F120 0040 Message Text Amy OxFFFF F120 9000 Most Recent Message Sent Digital Point OxFFFF F120 0000 State Inactive OxFFFF F120 0004 Scratch Pad Trigger ON Ox 00000000 00000000 Analog Bank OxFFFF F120 000C Scratch Pad Trigger OFF Ox 00000000 00000000 STREAMING Analog Point OxFFFF F120 0014 Enable Stream Packet Disabled OxFFFF F120 0018 0 Stream Period seconds High Density E MAIL OxFFFF F120 001C Enable E mail Message Disabled 0 System gt OxFFFF F120 0020 E mail Period seconds SERIAL MODULE Scratch Pad gt OxFFFF F120 0038 Enable Serial Module Message Disabled OxFFFF F120 003C Serial Ports Mask Ox 00000000 DataLog gt SNMP PID OxFFFF F120 0024 Enable SNMP Trap Disabled O
245. pret the information you see in the Status Read window Some items may not appear depending on the Opto 22 device you are using Some of this information can be changed see page 151 Much of it is used only for troubleshooting If you have additional questions about status data contact Product Support see page 3 The term device is used in this table to refer to a SNAP Ethernet based I O unit E1 or E2 brain board or SNAP PAC controller Powerup Clear Flag PUC needed Busy Flag Since a powerup clear PUC is automatically sent by the device whenever it is turned on this value should show PUC Received A zero means the device is not busy and can process your requests Loader Version Revision number of the device s loader The loader is like a basic input output system BIOS Memory Map Version Revision number of the device s memory map Firmware Version Firmware Version Date Firmware Version Time Revision number of the device s firmware and the date and time of the revision Unit Type Hex code indicating the device type Unit Description Part number of the device brain brain board or controller I O Unit Hardware Revision Month I O Unit Hardware Revision Day I O Unit Hardware Revision Year Version date of the device s hardware Installed Ram Number of bytes of RAM in the device Unique hardware Media Access Control MAC identifier for
246. ps in form 1576 O Configuration for E1 and E2 Brain Boards PAC Manager User s Guide Legacy Edition CHAPTER 2 CONFIGURING DEVICES Minimum and Maximum Values Analog Points All memory mapped I O units with analog capability automatically keep track of minimum and maximum values on analog points You can read and clear these values using PAC Manager s Inspect mode If you are running a PAC Control strategy you can use analog point commands such as Get amp Clear Analog Maximum Value to read and reset minimum and maximum values Offset and Gain Analog Points All memory mapped 1 0 units with analog capability can calculate offset and gain for analog input points Calculate offset first and then calculate gain The offset must be calculated at the point s low scale and the gain must be calculated at the point s high scale See page 47 for instructions NOTE If you are using Modbus TCP you will need to calculate the offset and gain yourself Then you can write offset and gain values to the I O unit See page 47 for more information Clamping Analog Points SNAP Ethernet based I O units with analog capability can clamp values sent to analog output points so they do not go above or below a specific limit For example if you are using a 0 10 VDC output module but the device attached to one of its points can only handle a maximum of 5 VDC you can set an upper clamp of 5 VDC for that point The values for upper an
247. quence number at the end of each subject line This plugin is in the format _seqid_ So for example if you enter process Data Log _seqida_ inthe subject field the first email message will have a subject line of Process Data Log 0 the next message will have a subject line of Process Data Log 1 andsoon For information on other plugins see Using Plugins on page 89 6 When all fields are correct click OK IMPORTANT For the configuration to take effect you must upload the configuration file to the I O unit save it to flash memory and restart the I O unit 7 Configure other optional functions or return to the PAC Manager main window and click the Save button all to save the configuration file When you are ready to upload the configuration file to the I O unit see Sending Configuration Data to the I O Unit on page 67 Setting Up Initial Values in the Scratch Pad Area Before you use this section read Event Reaction Concepts on page 124 To set initial Scratch Pad values and save them as part of the configuration file follow these steps To see Scratch Pad values or change them in real time see Reading and Writing to the Scratch Pad Area on page 180 1 In the PAC Manager main window click the Open button a or choose File Open PAC Manager User s Guide Legacy Edition SETTING UP INITIAL VALUES IN THE SCRATCH PAD AREA 2 In the Open Tag Database dialog box navigate to the configuration f
248. ration Clear e mail configuration Clear timer configuration Clear PID configuration Clear datalog ms Status Status Write area last read at 10 11 06 10 35 45 Retresh No Degrees C Apply 0 250 3000 5 240000 1000 1000 Ox 00000000 10 192 255 5 255 255 192 0 16 Click Send Command PAC Manager User s Guide Legacy Edition CHAPTER 4 SETTING UP EVENTS AND REACTIONS The configuration data is stored to flash memory and a Success message appears IMPORTANT For the following configurations you must also restart the unit in order for configuration to take effect Changes in IP port for serial modules SNMP configuration Email configuration PPP configuration Data logging interval 17 If you have configured any of these items in the Operation Commands list highlight Restart I O Unit from powerup Click Send Command The I O unit is restarted and a success message appears PAC Manager User s Guide Legacy Edition CONFIGURING EVENT MESSAGES 144 PAC Manager User s Guide Legacy Edition Reading and Writing to Specific Devices Introduction This chapter shows you how to read and write to an Ethernet based controller or I O unit directly by using PAC Manager s Inspect window In addition to reading and writing specific values you can configure points and functions using the steps in this chapter However these configurations cannot be saved to a configuration file Because all re
249. rent value that is acceptable beyond that range the reaction occurs For example suppose you are monitoring temperature If the current value is 80 and you set a deviation limit of 6 the reaction will not occur unless the value drops below 74 or rises above 86 NOTE When a reaction occurs the deviation limit stays the same but the value that set off the reaction becomes the new deviation value In this example if the temperature drops to 73 the reaction occurs Six is still the deviation limit but now 73 is the deviation value another reaction will not occur unless the value drops below 67 or rises above 79 PAC Manager User s Guide Legacy Edition CONFIGURING ALARMS AND REACTIONS High limit alarm sets a fixed upper limit If the analog value or counter is higher than the high limit the reaction occurs Low limit alarm sets a fixed lower limit If the analog value or counter is lower than the low limit the reaction occurs How Alarms Trigger Reactions Reactions to alarms are edge triggered not level triggered and when the alarm state changes the reaction is automatically reversed The I O unit sends the reaction just once as soon as the alarm occurs at the edge of the alarm The I O unit does not send the reaction again until the alarm occurs again If the alarm stops however the I O unit reverses the reaction For example suppose you set up a high limit alarm that turns on a Scratch Pad bit that wi
250. rmocouple 5 5 20 2 Degrees C 210 0 210 0 1200 0 1200 0 SNAP AITM i Type K Thermocouple 8 8 20 2 Degrees C 270 0 270 0 1372 0 1372 0 SNAP AITM 8 75 75 mV 68 44 4F 8 mV 82 5 75 0 75 0 82 5 SNAP AITM 8 50 50 mV 9 9 4F 8 mV 55 0 50 0 50 0 55 0 SNAP AITM 8 25 25 mV 67 43 4F 8 mV 27 5 25 0 25 0 27 5 SNAP AITM 8 Type B Thermocouple 24 18 4F 8 Degrees C 42 0 42 0 1820 0 1820 0 SNAP AITM 8 Type C Thermocouple 32 20 4F 8 Degrees C 0 0 0 0 2320 0 2320 0 SNAP AITM 8 Type D Thermocouple 33 21 4F 8 Degrees C 0 0 0 0 2320 0 2320 0 SNAP AITM 8 Type E Thermocouple 19 13 4F 8 Degrees C 270 0 270 0 1000 0 1000 0 SNAP AITM 8 Type G Thermocouple 31 1F 4F 8 Degrees C 0 0 0 0 2320 0 2320 0 SNAP AITM 8 Type J Thermocouple 5 5 4F 8 DegreesC 210 0 210 0 1200 0 1200 0 SNAP AITM 8 Type K Thermocouple 8 8 4F 8 Degrees C 270 0 270 0 1372 0 1372 0 SNAP AITM 8 Type N Thermocouple 30 1E 4F 8 Degrees C 270 0 270 0 1300 0 1300 0 SNAP AITM 8 Type R Thermocouple 17 11 4F 8 Degrees C 50 0 50 0 1768 0 1768 0 SNAP AITM 8 Type S Thermocouple 23 17 4F 8 Degrees C 50 0 50 0 1768 0 1768 0 SNAP AITM 8 Type T Thermocouple 18 12 4F 8 Degrees C 270 0 270 0 400 0 400 0 SNAP AITM2 50 50 mV 9 909 2 mV 55 0 50 0 50 0 55 0 SNAP AITM2 25 25 mV 67 43 09 2 mV 27 5 25 0 25 0 27 5 SNAP AITM2 Type B Thermocouple 24 18 09
251. rmware Filename IP Addresses Install Module Firmware a J ee 10 192 55 67 10 192 55 63 Module Position Clear Flash Files Execute Click the browse button g and locate the serial module firmware file you downloaded from our website Double click the filename The path and filename appear in the Filename field In the Module Position field type the serial module s position on the rack 0 15 In the IP Addresses list highlight the IP address of the I O unit the serial module is on If the correct IP address is not shown click Add to add it PAC Manager User s Guide Legacy Edition MAINTAINING FILES You can load serial module firmware to multiple I O units at the same time but only if the modules are in identical positions on all I O units 8 Click Execute The serial module firmware file is loaded to the 1 0 unit and then loaded to the serial module and a Success message appears in the Results area Maintaining Files This section applies to SNAP PAC and controllers and to SNAP Ultimate controller brains with firmware version 5 0 or newer SNAP Ethernet brains SNAP Simple brains E1 and E2 brain boards and Ultimate brains with older firmware do not have file capability To update a SNAP Ultimate controller brain to the newer firmware see the brain user s guide NOTE Form 1564 the E1 and E2 User s Guide describes the limited use of PAC Manager to FTP specific files to an E1 or E2 1 0 unit The
252. rom the source filename 5 Inthe IP Addresses list highlight the IP address of the SNAP device you are downloading the file from If it does not appear click Add to add it to the list 6 Click Execute The file is loaded from the device and a Success message appears in the Results area Reading Filenames You can use PAC Manager to read and list the names of all files and folders in the root of the controller or I O unit Note that files located inside folders or folders inside folders are not listed even though they are there You can use a standard FTP software program to see them 1 In the PAC Manager main window click the Maintenance button 2 In the Command list highlight Read Filenames On I O Unit 3 Inthe IP Addresses list highlight the IP address of the SNAP device you are reading If it does not appear click Add to add it to the list 4 Click Execute The list of root file and folder names appears in the Results area PAC Manager User s Guide Legacy Edition 20 MAINTAINING FILES All root level files and folders on the device with the IP address 10 192 55 67 Folders are designated as lt DIR gt 208 5 1 0 Unit Maintenance Command Install Firmware A IP Addresses Add 10 192 55 67 10 192 55 63 Modify Delete File On 1 0 Unit elete File On nil Baas Save Files To Flash Read Files From Flash E Clear Flash Files Save Load Execute Results Read Filenames On
253. rt the unit when the file is loaded to the I O unit and saved to flash memory However if you are writing configuration directly to the I O unit as in this chapter you need to follow these steps to restart it 1 In the PAC Manager main window click the Inspect button Ql 2 Inthe IP Address field type the IP address of the device Click Status Write 186 PAC Manager User s Guide Legacy Edition CHAPTER 5 READING AND WRITING TO SPECIFIC DEVICES 3 In the Operation Command list highlight Restart I O Unit from powerup 3 Inspect 1 0 Unit IP Address 10 192 55 67 Port 2001 Timeout 1000 ms Status Status Write area last read at 10 11 06 16 41 25 Status Write Status Read Rettesh OsFFFF F038 0004 OxFFFF F038 0008 Paint Config OsFFFF F038 0010 Digtal Bark DxFFFF F038 0014 __DigtalBark OEFFF F038 0018 SIPE OsFFFF F038 OO1C __Digtal Point OxFFFF F038 0020 Rpg bak OsFFFF F038 004C OxFFFF F038 0050 Analog Point OsFFFF F038 0054 OxFFFF FFFF F050 High Density DxFFFF FFFF F058 System gt Scratch Pad gt DataLog gt PID Restart 1 0 Unit from powerup None Send powerup clear Reset to defaults and Restart 1 0 Unit Store configuration to flash Erase configuration from flash Always BootP DHCP On Powerup Degrees F C Comm Watchdog Time msec 0 Disable TCP Minimum Retransmission Timeout msec TCP Initial Retransmission Timeout msec TCP Retransmission Attempts
254. s how to read data directly from a specific controller or 1 0 unit or write directly to a controller brain or I O points Chapter 6 Maintaining Devices changing IP addresses upgrading firmware and working with files on the device Chapter 7 Troubleshooting tips for resolving difficulties you may encounter while working in PAC Manager Information Key This guide includes information that applies to some types of controllers and I O units but not to others Sections are marked as follows to indicate the products that support them PAC R SNAP PAC R series controllers PAC S SNAP PAC S series controllers EB SNAP PAC EB brains UIO SNAP Ultimate I O EIO SNAP Ethernet I O SIO SNAP Simple I O E1 E1 brain boards E2 E2 brain boards PAC Manager User s Guide Legacy Edition For Help CHAPTER 1 INTRODUCTION Related Documentation You may also need some of the following documentation depending on the system you are using and how you expect to communicate with it Current Hardware and Software i SNAP PAC R Series Controller User s Guide 1595 SNAP PAC RP series controller OptoMMP Protocol Guide 1465 SNAP PAC S Series Controller User s Guide 1592 SNAP PAC S series controller OptoMMP Protocol Guide 1465 SNAP PAC Brain User s Guide 1690 SNAPPAC Braine OptoMMP Protocol Guide 1465 PAC Control User s Guide 1700 PAC Control strat
255. s However you can read current events and also change their configuration in the Inspect window Digital Events are shown below as an example PAC Manager User s Guide Legacy Edition READING AND WRITING TO POINTS Choose the event number from the drop down list This event s configuration data is shown here 3 Inspect 1 0 Unit IP Address 10 192 55 67 Port 2001 The current state of the Scratch Pad bitmask as ofthe Status date and time is shown here Timeout fi 000 ms Status Digital Event area last read at 10 1 06 16 38 36 Status Read Status Write Point Config Digital Bank Digital Point Analog Bank Analog Point High Density System Scratch Pad gt DataLog gt PID Events Communications gt Other r Digital Events Digital Event Number fo z OxFFFF FOD1 0000 OxFFFF FODO 0000 OxFFFF FODO 0008 OxFFFF FODO 0020 OxFFFF FODO 0028 OxFFFF FODO 0010 OxFFFF FODO 0018 OxFFFF FODO 0030 OxFFFF FODO 0038 EVENT Is Event Occurring Digital ON Digital OFF Scratch Pad Bits ON Scratch Pad Bits OFF REACTION Digital ON Digital OFF Scratch Pad Bits ON Scratch Pad Bits OFF Current Scratch Pad Bits Ox Joooooao0 fooonooca Ox 00000000 00000000 Ox 00000000 00000001 Ox 00000000 00000000 Ox 00000000 00000000 Ox 00000000 00000020 Ox 00000000 00000000 Ox 00000000 00000000 Ox 00000000 00000000 For help in understanding or changing
256. s PAC Manager User s Guide Legacy Edition CHAPTER 5 READING AND WRITING TO SPECIFIC DEVICES E1 and E2 Brain Boards When you use PAC Manager or the memory map with E1s and E2s each module on the E1 or E2 corresponds to the first point on a similar SNAP module E1 brain boards can be used with a variety of modules The maximum number of points is 16 on the largest rack as shown at right E1 shown with G4 modules Since each module has just one point use only the first point for each module in the memory map Module position 0 E1 with Quad Pak modules Quad Pak modules have four input or four output points but each point is treated as if it were a separate one point module 0 0 1 0 0 2 0 3 0 4 0 5 0 i 6 0 7 0 8 0 9 0 2 10 0 11 0 12 0 13 0 3 14 0 15 0 PAC Manager User s Guide Legacy Edition CONFIGURING 1 0 MODULES POINTS AND FEATURES E2 brain boards are used with analog G1 modules only The E2 with G1 modules largest rack shown at Since each module has just one point use only the right holds 1 first point for each module in the memory map single point modules BBa a Module position 0 Configuring I O Modules Points and Features Before you can read or write to I O points you must configure point types and point features You can do so using PAC Manager s Inspect window Remember however that configurations you set in the Inspect window cannot be
257. s brains and so on must have a unique IP address Failure to assign unique IP addresses may cause catastrophic network or hardware failures Ifyou don t know which IP addresses are safe to use check with your system administrator 8 When the IP address subnet mask and other fields are correct click OK The new IP address information appears in the upper list in the dialog box and the device s status changes to Mapped The address information also appears in the lower list to show that this device has been mapped to this address Status changes to Mapped 5 Assign IP Address Units Requesting IP Addresses Hostname Gateway Address DNS Assign 0 0 0 0 0 0 Set Static IP Unit has been Discovered Add a Mapping for this Unit MAC To IP Address Mappings Set Alls Address data appears MAC Address IP Address Subnet Mask Hostname Gateway Address DNS Address Te Adi i d in lower list 00A0 3D 00 E116 10 192 50 11 255 255 192 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 lete Save List Load List Close Help 14 PAC Manager User s Guide Legacy Edition CHAPTER 2 CONFIGURING DEVICES 9 With the device still highlighted click Assign The address is saved to flash memory and the status changes to Static IP Status changes to Static IP 5 Assign IP Address Units Requesting IP Addresses Status MAC Address IP Address Subnet Mask Hostname Gateway Address DNE asin J 00 40 3D 00 E1 16 10 192 50 11 255 2
258. s received from any of those serial ports the event triggers the reaction For example suppose you have serial modules in positions 1 and 2 on the rack Other kinds of modules are in positions 0 and 3 The following table shows how you might figure out the mask to monitor three of these serial ports Module position lt 3 2 1 0 Serial port lt B A B A Default IP port number 22505 22504 22503 22502 Monitor Y or N Y N Y Y Mask binary notation 0 0 1 0 1 1 0 0 Mask hex notation 2 Cc The complete hex mask you would enter to monitor these ports is 0000002C Enter the pattern string the event should match The string is limited to 40 characters Wildcards and can be used In the Reaction section do any or all of the following PAC Manager User s Guide Legacy Edition CONFIGURING TIMED EVENTS AND REACTIONS a osend text in an SNMP trap or a one time email message complete the Resulting string field If you send a string it is limited to 126 characters You can place data from the serial module or the 1 0 unit s memory map into the string by using any or all of the following plugins _str_ Includes the pattern string in the resulting string _port_ Shows which serial port sent the pattern string X_yyyyyyyy_ Includes data from a memory map address See Using Plugins on
259. saved to a configuration file They are sent directly to an individual I O unit To use a configuration file see Chapter 2 Configuring Devices especially Configuring 1 0 Modules and Points on page 39 NOTE For E1 and E2 1 0 units ifyou are communicating with them using Optomux only you do not need to configure them in PAC Manager However if you are also communicating with E2 1 0 units using OptoMMP Modbus TCP or PAC Project software including OptoOPCServer you must configure them To configure E1 and E2 1 0 units see Opto 22 form 1576 Technical Note I O Configuration for E1 and E2 Brain Boards Point Types Requiring Configuration For point types configuration requirements vary based on the type of processor SNAP PACs SNAP Ultimate SNAP Ethernet and SNAP Simple I 0 processors with analog capa bility The processor can recognize analog serial and high density digital modules and it assumes a default configuration for all points on those modules Any module position not occupied by an analog serial or high density module is assumed to be a 4 channel digital input module For these processors you must configure the following point types e All digital output points on 4 channel digital modules Use point type 180 e Analog points that do not use the default point type for the module For example if the points on a SNAP AIRTD module are 120 Ohm Nickel 3 wire RTDs 80 to 260 C they must be configur
260. sing the command Set Analog Filter Weight PAC Manager User s Guide Legacy Edition Configuring Optional Functions Introduction Chapter 2 showed you how to configure I O unit points and features This chapter includes instructions for setting up the following optional functions on SNAP Ethernet based devices Setting up security page 76 Logging data page 82 Sending event messages via email SNMP a stream packet or a serial module page 86 Using SNMP for communicating with enterprise management systems page 90 Sending email page 93 Using the Scratch Pad area for peer to peer data sharing page 95 Streaming data page 98 Mirroring I O point data page 101 Copying memory map data page 103 Configuring Modbus options page 106 Setting system date and time page 111 Communicating serially with devices attached directly to a controller page 113 Using PPP for communicating via modem with the device page 117 In most cases you use the same configuration file in PAC Manager to set up optional functions as you did to configure I O units so the complete configuration information can be uploaded all at once to SNAP Ethernet based I O units PAC Manager User s Guide Legacy Edition SETTING UP SECURITY Setting Up Security You can use PAC Manager to set up security for an Opto 22 SNAP Ethernet based device You can limit access to specific computers or other devices on the network You can also limit access to specific protocols used with the
261. smission Attempts 5 pei toa OxFFFF F038 0020 TCP Idle Session Timeout msec 0 Disable 240000 Analog Bank OxFFFF F038 004C Max Digital Scantime msec 1000 oe OxFFFF F038 0050 Max Analog Scantime msec 1000 Analog Point OxFFFF F038 0054 Scanner Flags Ox 00000000 OxFFFF FFFF F050 Secondary IP Address 10 192 255 5 High Density OxFFFF FFFF F058 Secondary Subnet Mask 255 255 192 0 System gt Operation Commands Send Command Scratch Pad gt Send powerup clear Reset to defaults and Restart 1 0 Unit DataLog gt Store configuration to flash Erase configuration from flash PID gt Restart 1 0 Unit from powerup Switch to loader mode Events gt Clear digital event configuration Clear alarm configuration Communications gt Clear PPP configuration Clear e mail configuration Other Clear timer configuration Clear PID configuration Clear datalog Close Help Digital Point 4 Items that can be changed are listed in the upper section of the dialog box To change one click its Value field and either choose from the drop down list or enter the new value as described below Always BootP DHCP on Powerup All devices If you change this field to Yes the current IP address becomes temporary and the device will send a BootP or DHCP broadcast the next time it is turned on If you change this field to No the current IP address is saved to flash memory and becomes a static IP address Degrees F C and Comm
262. stem to the Product Support engineer e Software and version being used e PC configuration type of processor speed memory and operating system e A complete description of your hardware and operating systems including loader and firmware versions for the controller or brain and device type see page 212 IP addresses and net masks for devices on the system accessories installed such as expansion cards type of power supply third party devices installed for example barcode readers Specific error messages seen 4 PAC Manager User s Guide Legacy Edition CHAPTER 1 INTRODUCTION Ethernet Based I O Processor Comparison Chart Some of the features mentioned in this guide apply to some models and not others Note that in the case of the E1 and E2 additional features are available if these brain boards are used with the Optomux protocol See the 7 and E2 User s Guide form 1563 for more information Input latching Watchdog timer On off status High speed counters up to 20 kHz Quadrature counters Digital I O points On pulse and off pulse measurement TPO time proportional output 1 3 e3 Pulse generation N pulses continuous square wave on pulse off pulse Thermocouple linearization 32 bit floating point for linearized values Minimum maximum values Offset and gain Scaling Time proportional output Output
263. system Enter the physical location of the I O unit Enter the ID of the contact person for the I O unit To set up the Community Groups you need highlight a line in the list Click the String cell within the line and type the name of the group Then click in the Read Write and Trap cells and choose Yes or No from the drop down list to indicate whether that group has privileges to read write and receive traps To set up Management Hosts highlight a line in the list Start with hosts on the local network first because the system sends messages to hosts in numeric order and it stops sending messages when it finds a host that it cannot connect to Click the Community String cell and enter the name of the community group the host belongs to Click the Host IP Address cell and enter its IP address including the dots for example 10 192 55 60 AIl 1 0 units except SNAP Simple and SNAP Ethernet From the drop down list choose the version of SNMP you are using 161 is the default port for SNMP communications If you know that your application will use a different port enter the number of that port here To enable authentication or cold start traps click the box to check it 6 When all fields are correct click OK PAC Manager User s Guide Legacy Edition CHAPTER 3 CONFIGURING OPTIONAL FUNCTIONS IMPORTANT For the configuration to take effect you must upload the configuration file to the I O unit save it to flash memory and res
264. t IP address The configuration will overwrite anything currently in the I O unit flash memory 6 When the destination is correct click Send The configuration is sent directly to the I O unit s flash memory and you see a confirmation box PAC Manager User s Guide Legacy Edition CHAPTER 2 CONFIGURING DEVICES Creating a Configuration File from Another Strategy If you use PAC Control ioControl or OptoControl and have a strategy with SNAP Ethernet based I O units already configured you may want to export that file and use it as a starting point rather than creating a configuration file from scratch The exported file will contain all the I O units in the strategy However note the following I O unit and point data is transferred optional functions such as event messages are not Four channel digital modules and points do not retain specific configurations but revert to generic ones Specific data will have to be reentered You cannot save changes you make in PAC Manager back to the strategy file Instead you save them to a configuration file which can then be imported into PAC Control or OptoControl Any serial I O units in the PAC Control ioControl or OptoControl strategy file are filtered out in PAC Manager and are no longer included in the configuration file Follow these steps to create a configuration file from an existing strategy 1 Configuration tree In PAC Control ioControl or OptoControl ope
265. t for security purposes according to instructions starting on page 76 Enter the IP address for the 1 0 unit If it s a SNAP PAC R series I O unit with a secondary IP address enter the secondary IP address Select whether you want a Watchdog on the unit The default is No disabled If you select Yes anew field appears enter the Watchdog timeout value in seconds The default timeout is 0 5 seconds For information on watchdogs see page 72 The Address List area shows IP addresses of the I O units that should receive this configuration If this is the only I O unit to receive the configuration don t add any addresses here However if you have I O units that are exactly alike list all of them here That way you can download the configuration file to all the I O units at once To add an IP address click Add PAC Manager User s Guide Legacy Edition ADDING AN 1 0 UNIT In the dialog box you can add a single IP address or a range of addresses 5 Add IP Address Add one IP Address Host Name PAddess E 0 0 0 Host Name Add a range of IP Addresses From SS To Cancel Help b Enter the IP address es and click OK The addresses appear in the Address List area 4 When information in the Add I O Unit dialog box is complete click OK The new I O unit appears in the Configure I O Units dialog box 5 Configure 1 0 Units Address Watchdog Ref Count Description Preprocess SNAP PAC A1 ET
266. t of memory map addresses Here are a couple of examples To include the on off state of a switch on module 0 point 3 you would put this in the message D_FO8000C0O_ To include the temperature of an ICTD input on module 4 point 0 you would use F_FOA00400_ PAC Manager User s Guide Legacy Edition EJ CONFIGURING SNMP Sending Binary Data in Event Messages To send binary data in the text of an event message begin with amp x and end with _ You can include any number of ASCII hex digits up to the 127 byte limit for the message field You can also include multiple amp x plugins This plugin is resolved after all other plugins have been resolved and only just before sending the contents of the message field out of the specified serial ports Examples To include an embedded null one binary character amp x00_ To include a number of binary characters amp x0a0dCF0034_ Configuring SNMP The Simple Network Management Protocol SNMP is used to communicate with an SNMP based enterprise management system such as Computer Associates Unicenter Hewlett Packard s OpenView or IBM s Tivoli These enterprise management systems can manage analog digital or serial devices through a SNAP PAC controller or SNAP PAC SNAP Ultimate or SNAP Ethernet I O unit just as they manage computer equipment on the Ethernet network SNMP Traps You can set up the controller or 1 0 unit to send messages to the manageme
267. t the 1 0 unit when you send the configuration data to the I O unit see page 67 Configuring Flow Control and 2 or 4 Wire Mode IMPORTANT You can configure flow control on a SNAP SCM 232 and 2 or 4 wire mode on a SNAP SCM 485 422 using PAC Manager However these configurations cannot be saved to the configuration file The I O unit that contains the serial module must be on the same network as your PC and the configuration is sent directly to the I O unit PAC Manager User s Guide Legacy Edition CHAPTER 2 CONFIGURING DEVICES 1 In the PAC Manager main window click the Inspect button Bl 3 Inspect 1 0 Unit IP Address Port 2001 Timeout 1000 ms Status REES GE Status Read Status Write Point Config Digital Bank Digital Point Analog Bank Analog Point High Density System gt Scratch Pad gt PID gt Events gt Communications gt Other gt Close Help If this is the first time you have used the Inspect button the IP address will show 0 0 0 0 as shown above If you have used the Inspect button before the last IP address you used is shown and the most recently used IP addresses are available in the drop down list 2 Inthe IP Address field type the IP address of the I O unit or choose it from the drop down list Click the Communications button and choose Serial Modules from the pop up menu PAC Manager User s Guide Legacy Edition CONFIGURING 1 0 MODULES AND POINTS Information from
268. tart the I O unit 7 Configure other optional functions or return to the PAC Manager main window and click the Save button al to save the configuration file When you are ready to upload the configuration file to the I O unit see Sending Configuration Data to the I O Unit on page 67 Configuring Email You can send an email message or page someone in response to an event Follow the steps in this section to set up email parameters See Configuring Event Messages on page 86 to set up the message itself 1 In the PAC Manager main window click the Open button a or choose File Open 2 In the Open Tag Database dialog box navigate to the configuration file and double click it to open it 3 PAC Manager Main_Process SEE File Edit Tools View Help ajajaj xaa A By o Main_Process AR Yo Units aAA Line 25 Preprocess 3 In the configuration tree right click the name of the 1 0 unit on which you want to set up email and choose Configure from the pop up menu PAC Manager User s Guide Legacy Edition CONFIGURING EMAIL For a SNAP PAC S series controller if it does not already appear in the list add it as an I O unit of the type Generic OptoMMP Device 5 Configure 1 0 Units Name Type Port Address Watchdog Ref Count Desc Add Line_1 SNAP E ETHER 10 192 5 Enabled 0 Preprocess SNAP P ETHER 10 1925 Enabled 5 Modify Delete
269. tatus changes to Mapped The address information also appears in the lower list to show that this device has been mapped to this address PAC Manager User s Guide Legacy Edition ASSIGNING AN IP ADDRESS Status changes to Mapped 5 Assign IP Address Units Requesting IP Addresses MAC Address IP Address Subnet Mask Hostname Gateway Address DNS Assign Mapped 0 00 9D 75 10 192 55 60 255 255 192 0 OPTO 00 9d 75 0 0 0 0 Set Static IP Assign All Set All Static IPs Unit has been Discovered Add a Mapping for this Unit MAC To IP Address Mappings Address data appears MAC Address IP Address SubnetMask Hostname AC i l Gateway Address DNS Address Add in lower list 00 A0 3D 00 9D 75 10 192 55 60 255 255 192 0 OPTO 00 9d 75 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 T Aodify Delete Save List Load List 7 With the device still highlighted click Assign The status changes to Assigned Status changes to Assigned 5 Assign IP Address Units Requesting IP Addresses Set Static IP Assign All Set All Static IPs Unit has been Discovered Add a Mapping for this Unit MAC To IP Address Mappings _MAC Address IP Address _ Subnet Mask Hostname 00 40 3D 00 9D 75 10 192 55 60 255 255 1920 OPTO 00 9 75 0 0 0 0 Gateway Address DNS Address Add 0 0 0 0 Modify Delete Save List Load List NOTE Once a devices status becomes Assigned you can no longer change its IP a
270. tem within the data log itself Data is logged in memory map addresses F3020000 F302175C Each data item takes 20 bytes YYYY MM DD Date the data was logged HH MM SS hh Time the data was logged Src Addr Memory map address the data came from Type Format of the data Data Data from the memory map address NOTE nan means not a number and indicates that data is not in the form of an IEEE float PAC R Clearing All Data from the Log EB e ots UIO 1 In the PAC Manager main window click the Inspect button Ql EIO 2 Inthe IP Address field type the IP address of the 1 0 unit or choose it from the drop down list Click Status Write 5 Inspect 1 0 Unit IP Address 10 192 55 67 v Port 2001 Timeout 1000 ms Status Status Write area last read at 10 11 06 12 26 56 Status Write Status Read Status Write Clear datalog command OxFFFF F038 0004 Always BootP DHCP On Powerup No Point Config Digital Bank Digital Point Analog Bank Analog Point High Density System gt Scratch Pad gt DataLog gt PID gt Events gt Communications gt Other gt OxFFFF F038 0008 OxFFFF F038 0010 OxFFFF F038 0014 OxFFFF F038 0018 OxFFFF F038 001C OxFFFF F038 0020 OxFFFF F038 004C OxFFFF F038 0050 OxFFFF F038 0054 OxFFFF FFFF F050 OxFFFF FFFF F058 Degrees F C Comm Watchdog Time msec 0 Disable TCP Minimum Retransmission Timeout msec TCP Initial Retransmission Timeout msec TCP Retransmission At
271. tempts TCP Idle Session Timeout msec 0 Disable Max Digital Scantime msec Max Analog Scantime msec Scanner Flags Secondary IP Address Secondary Subnet Mask Operation Commands Send Command Send powerup clear Reset to defaults and Restart 1 0 Unit Store configuration to flash Erase configuration from flash Restart 1 0 Unit from powerup Switch to loader mode Clear digital event configuration Clear alarm configuration Clear PPP configuration Clear e mail configuration Clear timer configuration Clear PID configuration gt Clear datalog Degrees C Apply 0 250 3000 5 240000 1000 1000 Ox 00000000 10 192 255 5 255 255 192 0 3 In the Operation Commands list click to highlight Clear datalog Click Send Command The data log is cleared and a Success message appears PAC Manager User s Guide Legacy Edition CONFIGURING EVENT MESSAGES Configuring Event Messages You may need to send a message via email data streaming SNMP or a serial module from an I O unit or a controller when a specific event occurs For example you could send a message if a digital point is on ifan analog point reaches a certain value if a specific string is received through a serial module or if a variable contains a specific value You can send one type of message or more NOTE You must be using a PAC Control strategy to configure event messages in this way In the PAC Control strategy your f
272. the counter for a point highlight the point and click the Clear Counter button The change is immediately sent to the I O unit and the window is updated PAC Manager User s Guide Legacy Edition CHAPTER 5 READING AND WRITING TO SPECIFIC DEVICES SNAP High Density Digital Output For an output module the current states appear as bitmasks in hex and for each point 3 Inspect 1 0 Unit IP Address 10 192 55 67 Port 2001 Timeout f 000 ms Status High Density Digital Module area last read at 10 11 06 16 20 41 m High Density Digital Module Status Read Module Number e X Module 3 is a High Density Digital Output Source Module Status Write Point Config STATUS Refresh Digital Bank OxFFFF F180 80C0 Point State Mask Ox 00000000 900041CB Apply Digital Point Analog Bank Analog Point System gt Scratch Pad gt DataLog gt PID gt Events gt Communications gt Other gt To turn a point on or off highlight the point number and click the Turn On or Turn Off button The change is immediately sent to the I O unit and the window is updated PAC Manager User s Guide Legacy Edition READING AND WRITING TO POINTS Reading System Date and Time SNAP PAC controllers and SNAP Ultimate and SNAP ENET RTC brains have a realtime clock 1 To read the date and time on the device click the Inspect button Ql in the PAC Manager main window 2 In the Inspect window t
273. to save the IP address information as static addresses If you do not save the address as a static IP address the E1s and E2s will lose their addresses as soon as power is turned off The next time power is turned on the brain boards will send out a DHCP broadcast again The devices now have their IP addresses If you need to change an address use Tools Change IP Settings see page 195 To assign a secondary IP address to a SNAP PAC controller see the steps in the next section Assigning a Secondary IP Address SNAP PAC Controller Only PAC S NOTE This section does not apply to SNAP PAC brains the two Ethernet network interfaces on a SNAP PAC brain have the same IP address SNAP PAC R series and S series controllers have two independent Ethernet network interfaces labeled on the top of the controller as ENET1 and ENET2 The controller sends its initial BootP request from ENET1 and the IP address you assign to the controller is for this primary interface To communicate through ENET2 you must assign it a separate IP address following the steps below IMPORTANT The two Ethernet interfaces will work only ifthey are on separate network segments so the control engine can clearly determine where to direct communication For example IP Address 192 168 0 12 10 0 0 5 Subnet Mask 255 255 255 0 255 255 255 0 1 If PAC Manager is not already open choose Start Programs gt Opto 22 gt PAC Project Software
274. troller such as the SNAP PAC S 1 use PAC Control See Opto 22 form 1710 the PAC Control Users Guide Legacy Edition for instructions NOTE SNAP LCE controllers are not supported by PAC Manager but by ioManager For a SNAP LCE see form 1440 the ioManager User s Guide PAC Manager User s Guide Legacy Edition EE ABOUT THIS GUIDE Contents This guide assumes that you have some familiarity with TCP IP UDP IP and Ethernet networking If you are not familiar with these subjects we strongly suggest you consult commercially available resources to learn about them before attempting to use these systems This user s guide includes the following sections Chapter 1 Introduction information about the guide and how to reach Opto 22 Product Support Also includes product comparison charts Chapter 2 Configuring Devices how to assign an IP address to your hardware how to configure I O units and I O points how to use I O point features such as counters watchdogs and analog scaling and how to send configuration data to O units Chapter 3 Configuring Optional Functions information on configuring security communication protocols like SNMP and PPP streaming the Scratch Pad area and other optional functions Chapter 4 Setting Up Events and Reactions f you are not using PAC Control information on configuring local reactions to local events Chapter 5 Reading and Writing to Specific Device
275. ts see page 187 for more information Clear digital event configuration Clear alarm configuration Clear PPP configuration Clear e mail configuration Clear timer configuration Clear PID configuration 4 With the command you want highlighted click Send Command The command is sent immediately to the I O unit and you see a Success message PAC Manager User s Guide Legacy Edition 189 FORMATTING AND INTERPRETING DATA Formatting and Interpreting Data Data is formatted differently for different addresses in the device s memory map Starting memory map addresses are shown in PAC Manager for a complete list of memory map addresses see form 1465 the OptoMMP Protocol Guide This section shows how to format and interpret various types of data when you are reading or writing to a memory mapped device Mask Data Some data is in the form of a 32 bit or 64 bit mask four or eight addresses each holding eight bits Each bit in the mask contains the data for one thing in a group one point one module one Scratch Pad bit etc Mask Data for SNAP For example most digital bank data as well as high density digital module data is in this form To read the state of digital points in a bank you would read the eight bytes starting at FFFFFO400000 Here s how the data would be returned At address FFFFF0400000 FFFFF0400007 These bit numbers 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
276. tter determined in the tuning process Click OK The new PID appears in the list 5 Configure PID Loops 140 Unit Preprocess Type SNAP PAC R1 analo Name Input Setp Dutput Mode Enable Ref Descri Add Ove Ove Host Fuel Auto Ena 0 Not Not Not Delete Not Not Not Hoo 6 When you have finished configuring PIDs click Close PIDs appear in the configuration tree under the I O unit RE MainProcess DAR MainProcess Yo Units nn 0 Wee Points HE Pump_1_Status fe Flowmeter _4 qa Oven_A_Temp as Fuel_Pump 3 0 PIDs Ae Oven_4_Control E Memory Map Values PID loops cE PAC Manager User s Guide Legacy Edition CHAPTER 2 CONFIGURING DEVICES Sending Configuration Data to the I O Unit After you have configured 1 0 units and set up optional functions such as security email and SNMP from Chapter 3 you must load the configuration file onto the I O unit You can load the configuration file into RAM only or you can save it to flash memory at the same time If you don t save to flash the configuration is lost if the I O unit is turned off When you save to flash the new configuration overwrites any configuration already in the flash memory Note that for some functions you must save to flash and restart the 1 0 unit for the configuration to take effect 1 With the configuration file open choose Tools Send Configur
277. tual addresses on devices cannot be assigned or changed here The important thing to remember about this lower section is that the list does not necessarily reflect actual addresses on devices The IP addresses in the list may not have been assigned yet or a device s address might have been changed at some point and the list not updated 4 In the lower section of the dialog box click Add Add MAC To IP Mapping MAC Address IP Address Oo Subnet Mask 0 F F Gateway Address 0 DNS Address Oo Host Name Cancel 5 For the first Opto 22 device type the correct MAC address the first six digits are entered for you they are the same for all Opto 22 devices Enter the IP address and subnet mask Enter the Gateway address if needed Leave the DNS address at 0 0 0 0 and the Host Name field blank 6 Double check all numbers When all are correct click OK PAC Manager User s Guide Legacy Edition ASSIGNING AN IP ADDRESS The device s address information is listed in the lower section of the dialog box 5 Assign IP Address Units Requesting IP Addresses Status MAC Address IP Address Listening for DHCP Discovers and BootP Requests MAC To IP Address Mappings IP Address Gateway Address DNS Address 00 a0 3d 00 30 75 10 192 55 60 255 255 192 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Save List Load List 7 Click Add again and add additional addresses until all of them are listed
278. tus Read information appears in the window The most recently used IP addresses are available in the drop down list If you have not used the Inspect window before the window will not show any data PAC Manager User s Guide Legacy Edition CONFIGURING DIRECT SERIAL COMMUNICATION 2 Inthe IP Address field type the IP address of the controller or choose it from the drop down list Click Communications and choose Communication Port Control from the submenu 5 Inspect 1 0 Unit IP Address 10 192 56 241 gt Port 2001 Timeout 1000 ms Status Comm Port Control area last read at 01 30 07 12 39 17 r Communication Port Control Status Read __ Status wite COMMUNICATION PORT 0 i icati Apply Point Config OxFFFF F031 0400 Control Function For Communication Port 0 PPP OxFFFF F031 0404 Logging For Communication Port 0 Disabled Digital Bank COMMUNICATION PORT 1 2 OxFFFF F031 0408 Control Function For Communication Port 1 None a p OxFFFF F031 040C Logging For Communication Port 1 Disabled __Diaital Point COMMUNICATION PORT 2 Analog Bank OxFFFF F031 0410 Control Function For Communication Port 2 None OxFFFF F031 0414 Logging For Communication Port 2 Disabled Analog Point High Density System gt ScratchPad gt DataLog gt PID gt Events gt Communications gt Other Close Port 0 Port SO on the PAC S Port 1 Port 1 on the PAC S For each port that is directly connect
279. umber Baud Rate Parity Data Bits Stop Bits Hardware Flow Control Power up Test Message EOM Character List PORT B IP Port Number Baud Rate Parity Data Bits Stop Bits Hardware Flow Control Power up Test Message EOM Character List Refresh Apply No Yes Ox OD040000 5 When you have finished changing parameters for this module click Apply The configuration changes are sent to the I O unit Configuring Profibus Modules From the pop up menu choose Configure Profibus modules part number SNAP SCM PROFI are a special type of serial module Before configuring a Profibus module see Opto 22 form 1191 the SNAP Serial Communication Module User s Guide for more information about these modules 1 With the configuration file open right click the name of the I O unit the Profibus module is on PAC Manager User s Guide Legacy Edition CONFIGURING 1 0 MODULES AND POINTS The Configure I O Units dialog box opens 3 Configure 1 0 Units Address Watchdog Ref Count Desc Add Preprocess SNAP P ETHER 10 192 5 Enabled 2 Modify Delete Import Copy 1 0 Points Modules gt Modules Everts gt button Scratch Pad gt 2 Communications gt Others 2 Make sure the correct I O unit is highlighted Click the Modules button and choose Profibus Modules from the pop up menu 5 Configure Profibus Modules Number fo F Used Address Description le MODUL
280. ure None 000 Name Refresh r Read Area Current values for point 0 Analog Point OxFFFF F026 2000 Sealed Units OxFFFF F026 2004 Counts on module 2 To update values click the Refresh button NaN NaN OxFFFF F026 2008 Min Value Scaled Units OxFFFF F026 200C Max Value Scaled Units High Density System gt Scratch Pad gt DataLog gt PID Communications gt Other ly Write Area Output Values Output Scaled 0xF024 2000 6 245 Apply Output Counts 0xF024 2004 2326 000 Apply TPO Period Ox p a OxFO1D 4600 OxFO1D 4604 Change the value on an output point by using the Write Area Close Help 1 Click the point number you want to read or write to The current values for that point number appear in the Read Area 2 To change the value of an output point enter the value in the Write Area either Scaled or Counts and click Apply The change is immediately sent to the I O unit and the window is updated PAC Manager User s Guide Legacy Edition READING AND WRITING TO POINTS Reading Analog and Digital Banks You can use PAC Manager to read a bank of points at one time Currently it is not possible to write to a bank of points using PAC Manager You must configure points before you can read them NOTE Bank reading cannot be done on digital or analog modules containing more than four points To read or write
281. ured you can save them as a configuration file page 35 and modify the configuration Note that this method transfers 1 0 unit and point information only any event messages email or SNMP settings and so on are not included when a configuration file is exported from or imported to OptoControl ioControl or PAC Control Also 4 channel digital module and point information is generic you will need to reenter specific digital configurations PAC R Creating a New Configuration File If PAC Manager is not already open choose Start gt Programs gt Opto 22 PAC Project Software gt PAC Manager In the PAC Manager main window click the New button a or choose File gt New In the Create New Tag Database dialog box navigate to the location where you want the file to be Type a filename Click Open A new configuration tree appears If you are familiar with PAC Control ioControl or OptoControl you ll notice that this window looks like part of a Strategy Tree lt 3 PAC Manager Main_Process File Edit Tools Yiew Help alaja xaje Bl Bil l DEK You can expand and collapse the folders to see or hide the I O units and points in them Closing the configuration tree is the same as closing the configuration file 4 To save the configuration file click the Save button E or choose File Save Once the file is saved continue with Adding an I O Unit on page 36 PAC Manager User s Guide Legacy Edition CREATING
282. ut Modules page 165 Digital Input and Output Modules Digital input module 256 100 00 Digital output module 384 180 00 Does not apply to SNAP high density digital modules which are recognized by the processor PAC Manager User s Guide Legacy Edition 161 CONFIGURING 1 0 MODULES POINTS AND FEATURES Analog Input Modules Use this data for configuring point types and features see page 158 Ifa module has multiple listings the default point type is shaded SNAP AIARMS 0 10 A AC DC 71 47 71 2 A 0 0 0 0 10 0 11 0 SNAP AIARMS i 0 10 A AC DC 71 47 28 2 A 0 0 0 0 10 0 11 0 SNAP AICTD ICTD Temp Probe 4 4 04 2 DegreesC 273 0 40 0 150 0 150 0 SNAP AICTD 4 ICTD Temp Probe 4 4 42 4 Degrees C 273 0 40 0 150 0 150 0 SNAP AILC 2 2 mV V Fast 34 22 OB 2 Percent 110 0 100 0 100 0 110 0 SNAP AILC 2 2 mV V Slow 36 24 OB 2 Percent 110 0 100 0 100 0 110 0 SNAP AILC 3 3 mV V Fast 35 23 OB 2 Percent 110 0 100 0 100 0 110 0 SNAP AILC 3 3 mV V Slow 37 25 OB 2 Percent 110 0 100 0 100 0 110 0 SNAP AILC Filter of 1st channel 0 0 OB 2 Percent 110 0 100 0 100 0 110 0 SNAP AILC 2 3 3 mV V Fast 35 23 OC 2 Percent 110 0 100 0 100 0 110 0 SNAP AILC 2 3 3 mV V Slow 37 25 OC 2 Percent 110 0 100 0 100 0 110 0 SNAP AILC 2 4 4 mV V
283. ve button Hl to save the configuration file IMPORTANT If you have changed the data logging interval you must save the configuration file to flash memory and restart the I O unit for the configuration to take effect When you are ready to upload the configuration file to the I O unit see page 67 PAC R Reading the Data Log ie The data log is a single file that records data from all the memory map addresses you have EIO configured to log data from see steps starting on page 82 The data from up to 64 memory map addresses can be logged and all logged data is recorded in one file The log file holds up to 300 lines of data when it is filled new entries replace the oldest ones This composite log file can be viewed through PAC Manager and can be emailed to someone at regular intervals you set Each line in the log file consists of the date and time stamp the memory map address the data is coming from the type of data and the data itself 1 To view logged data click the Inspect button Ql in the PAC Manager main window 2 Inthe IP Address field type the IP address of the I O unit or choose it from the drop down list Click Data Log and choose Data Logging Samples from the pop up menu 3 Inspect 1 0 Unit IP Address 10 192 55 69 Port 2001 Timeout 1000 ms Status Data Logging Sample area last read at 10 09 06 15 40 09 Data Logging Samples Status Read TMM A Status Write Address MM S5 Src Addr z F3020000 2006 10
284. ving to an I O Unit s Flash Memory Saving configuration data to the 1 0 unit s flash memory makes sure that the data is not lost when power to the unit is turned off If you are using a configuration file as in most of Chapters 2 3 and 4 you can choose to save configuration data to flash memory when the file is loaded to the I O unit However if you are writing configuration directly to the I O unit as in this chapter you ll need to follow these steps to save to flash 1 In the PAC Manager main window click the Inspect button Ql 2 Inthe IP Address field type the IP address of the I O unit Click Status Write PAC Manager User s Guide Legacy Edition WRITING COMMANDS TO THE DEVICE 3 In the Operation Command list highlight Store configuration to flash 3 Inspect 1 0 Unit IP Address 10 192 55 67 Port 2001 Timeout 1000 Status Read Point Config Digital Bank Digital Point Analog Bank Analog Point High Density System gt Scratch Pad gt Status Write OxFFFF F038 0004 OxFFFF F038 0008 OxFFFF F038 0010 OxFFFF F038 0014 OxFFFF F038 0018 OxFFFF F038 001C OxFFFF F038 0020 OxFFFF F038 004C OxFFFF F038 0050 OxFFFF F038 0054 OxFFFF FFFF F050 OxFFFF FFFF F058 Always BootP DHCP On Powerup Degrees F C Comm Watchdog Time msec 0 Disable TCP Minimum Retransmission Timeout msec TCP Initial Retransmission Timeout msec TCP Retransmission Attempts TCP Idle Session Timeout msec 0 Disabl
285. wnload fails on a controller and you have FTP files to the controller s file system there might not be enough file space for the new firmware To check choose Start Programs Opto 22 PAC Project Software Tools PAC Terminal Make sure the File Space Available is larger than the size of the firmware file PAC Manager User s Guide Legacy Edition CHAPTER 6 MAINTAINING DEVICES PAG R Loading Serial Module Firmware EB If you have a SNAP PAC 1 0 unit or a SNAP Ultimate I O unit with firmware version 5 0 or newer you UIO can load new serial module firmware to a SNAP serial communication module on the I O unit If you want to update the SNAP Ultimate I O unit to newer firmware so you can use this procedure follow the steps in its user s guide form 1460 NOTE If the serial module is on a SNAP Ethernet or SNAP Simple 1 0 unit contact Opto 22 Product Support for assistance Contact information is on page 3 1 Make sure you have the new serial module firmware file available You can download new firmware files from our website at www opto22 com If you have any trouble locating or downloading a firmware file contact Opto 22 Product Support If PAC Manager is not already open choose Start gt Programs Opto 22 gt PAC Project Software gt PAC Manager In the PAC Manager main window click the Maintenance button In the Command list highlight Install Module Firmware 5 1 0 Unit Maintenance Command Install Fi
286. x66 oints OxFFFF F0A0 0000 Current Value N A p OxFFFF F300 0018 Logging interval in milliseconds 0 log once 5000 Cancel 5 Choose the lowest empty Log Point number from the drop down list and click to put a check mark in the Used box NOTE To reduce scanning time the I O unit stops scanning log points when it reaches an unused data logging number Make sure you use these numbers in order starting with the lowest 6 To have the data log emailed click the Value column cell and enable email Also enter the number of data entries in the log you want each email message to contain A maximum of 140 log entries can go in each email Remember that email applies to all points that are logged since all the data goes into one file PAC Manager User s Guide Legacy Edition LOGGING DATA FROM MEMORY MAP ADDRESSES 7 Inthe Value column click the cell and then enter the Scratch Pad On mask and Off mask to trigger this data log point Also enter the memory map address of the data you want to log and choose the format of data in that address Finally enter how often data should be logged for this address in milliseconds to log data just once enter 0 8 When all values are correct click OK Repeat from step 5 for additional log points 9 Remember to also configure email to indicate where the data log should be sent See page 93 10 Configure other optional functions or return to the PAC Manager main window and click the Sa
287. xFFFF F120 0028 Trap Period seconds 0 OxFFFF F120 002C Trap Type 0 Everts oma Pan High AS MEMMAP COPY DESTINATION OxFFFF F120 8000 MemMap Address Ox 00000000 Other gt OxFFFF F120 8004 IP Address of Destination 0 0 0 0 OxFFFF F120 8008 IP Port 0 OxFFFF F120 800C Period milliseconds 0 Close Help From the drop down list choose the lowest unused message number Unused message numbers have no asterisk For an email or serial message or optionally for an SNMP message enter the message text Message text is not sent in the streaming packet Message text is limited to 127 characters You can place data from the I O unit s memory map into the message by using a plugin see page 89 If you are sending a serial message make sure the text is formatted so the serial device that receives it will understand it Enter two masks indicating the Scratch Pad on and off bits that should trigger the message For help in figuring out the masks see Digital Point and Scratch Pad Masks on page 128 Streaming section To send a stream of data as the message choose Enabled from the drop down list Enter how often in seconds to send the stream 0 sends it only once For information on streaming see page 98 E mail section To send an email message choose Enabled from the drop down list Enter how often in seconds to send the email 0 sends it only once Serial Module section To send a message through a serial module
288. y if needed If power to the controller or I O unit is turned off files are destroyed unless they have been saved to flash PAC Manager User s Guide Legacy Edition 2 MAINTAINING FILES Moving Files to the SNAP Controller or I O Unit To move files to the SNAP controller or I O unit use any standard FTP client software or PAC Manager A maximum of five devices can FTP files to a SNAP controller or I O unit simultaneously Follow these steps to move files to the SNAP device using PAC Manager 1 Choose Start Programs Opto 22 PAC Project Software gt PAC Manager The PAC Manager main window opens 3 PAC Manager DE File Tools Yiew Help Haaj xaa Bl ai of a Filename le j Modify Restart Confirmation Interval sec EEA sue Read Filenames On 1 0 Unt P Delete Save Files To Flash 3 y Read Files From Flash Rott Timeout msec Clear Flash Files v 2001 fi 000 J Synchronize to PC Time Execute Copy Select All Clear Completed Results PAC Manager User s Guide Legacy Edition CHAPTER 6 MAINTAINING DEVICES In the Command list highlight Upload File To I O Unit Click the browse button Bl and locate the source file you want to load In the Destination field type the filename as you want it to appear on the SNAP device The filename can be the same or different from the source filename You can specify a path on the device using the separator For example to pl
289. y one or two points the addresses for the upper two or three points in each module will contain the following for output modules 0 for input modules FFFFFFFF PAC Manager User s Guide Legacy Edition FORMATTING AND INTERPRETING DATA For example to read all bank analog point values in scaled units you would read 256 bytes starting at address FFFFFO600000 Here s how data for two channel input modules in positions 0 and 1 would appear PAC Manager User s Guide Legacy Edition would contain 0 outputs or FFFFFFFF inputs FFFF F060 0000 FFFF F060 0003 four bytes IEEE float 0 FFFF F060 0004 FFFF F060 0007 four bytes IEEE float 1 FFFF F060 0008 FFFF F060 000B FFFFFFFF 2 FFFF F060 000C FFFF F060 000F FFFFFFFF 3 FFFF F060 0010 FFFF F060 0013 four bytes IEEE float 0 FFFF F060 0014 FFFF F060 0017 four bytes IEEE float 1 FFFF F060 0018 FFFF F060 001B FFFFFFFF 2 FFFF F060 001C FFFF F060 001F FFFFFFFF 3 On an I O unit with an E2 brain board all modules have only one point so the upper three points Maintaining Devices Introduction This chapter includes step by step procedures for maintaining SNAP PAC controllers and Ethernet based brains and brain boards including Viewing and changing IP addresses below e Loading new firmware See page 197 To find out the current brain firmware version see Getting Device and Firmware Information on page 212 e
290. ype of module being configured white for digital DC input red for digital DC output yellow for digital AC input and black for digital AC output 5 Configure 1 0 Points Module icon Expand or collapse points on the module by clicking the or sign in the box Points Expand All Collapse All z wf 5 Double click the point you want to configure Add Digital Point Name A Description l B Type Input C Module SNAP IDC5 Features None 7 D Watchdog No Ye E Cancel Help 6 Complete the fields as follows A Enter a name for the point The name must start with a letter and may contain letters numbers and underscores Spaces are converted to underscores B Optional Enter a description of the point C Type and module are already filled in for you PAC Manager User s Guide Legacy Edition Ea CONFIGURING 1 0 MODULES AND POINTS D To use a feature of the module choose it from the drop down list See Using 1 0 Point Features on page 68 for explanations of point features E Output modules only To configure a status the point should be set to if the Watchdog timer on this 1 0 unit expires click Yes and choose On or Off from the drop down list 7 When you have completed the fields click OK The new point appears in the list 3 Configure 1 0 Points DEAR 120 Unit Preprocess Type SNAP PAC AT analog digital Modules and Points led
291. ype the IP address of the device or choose it from the drop down list Click System Date And Time The device s date and time appear NOTE Although you can change the date and time by clicking a cell in the Value column and typing in the new number then clicking Apply there is a slight delay before the time is set on the unit Other ways of setting time may be more accurate for example using PAC Control to synchronize system date and time Also see Setting Up System Date and Time on page 111 for another method Reading and Writing to the Scratch Pad Area Before using this section be sure to read Event Reaction Concepts on page 124 Remember that support for these areas varies by processor Scratch Pad Bits Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes No Scratch Pad Integers Strings Floats Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes No No You can read the current state of Scratch Pad bits and current values in Scratch Pad integers strings and floats using PAC Manager You can also change these values in real time which can be useful for testing If you are running PAC Control make sure your changes do not conflict with strategy logic 1 To read or change the Scratch Pad area click the Inspect button Ql in the PAC Manager main window 2 In the Inspect I O Unit dialog box type the IP address of the I O unit or choose it from the drop down list Click Scratch Pad and then choose the area you want from the pop

PAC MANAGER™ USER'S GUIDE LEGACY EDITION

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents

PAC MANAGER&trade; USER'S GUIDE LEGACY EDITION

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents

PAC MANAGER™ USER'S GUIDE LEGACY EDITION